You are on page 1of 369

INTERCONTINENTAL HOTEL, DHAKA

Project No: 5119

Architectural Specification

Issue 0: 6th November 2014 Construction Documents


DISCLAIMER:

The  following  specifica1ons  are  bench  marks  in  terms  of  standards  and  performance.  Any  alterna1ves  
proposed  by  the  Contractor  are  to  be  equal  or  be?er,  and  must  be  approved  by  LW  Design  Group  prior  to  
fabrica1on  and  installa1on.
Table of Contents
Title Page
C20 Demolition 5

C90 Alterations - spot items 10

E40 Designed joints in in situ concrete 12

F10 Brick/ block walling 15

F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stone walling 24

G12 Isolated structural metal members 30

G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing 33

H11 Curtain walling 40

H20 Rigid sheet cladding 56

H21 Timber weatherboarding 60

H31 Metal profiled/ flat sheet cladding/ covering 62

H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete cladding/ components 68

H43 Metal composite panel cladding/ covering 77

H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ features 84

H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ flashings 92

J10 Cementitious mortar tanking/ damp proofing 97

J30 Liquid applied tanking/ damp proofing 101

J40 Flexible sheet tanking/ damp proofing 105

J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coverings 109

J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof coverings 119

K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings 125

K40 Demountable suspended ceilings 137

K41 Raised access floors 146

L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres 153

L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches 164

L30 Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ balustrades 182


L35 Fixed utilitarian access systems 187

M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing screeds 193

M12 Resin flooring 206

M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatings 213

M30 Metal lathing/ anchored mesh reinforcement for plastered/ 221


rendered coatings

M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling 224

M50 Vinyl/ carpet 235

M60 Painting/clear finishing 240

N10 General fixtures/ furnishings/ equipment 251

N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings 256

N14 General internal signage systems 268

N15 Fire and safety signage systems 272

N17 Portable fire fighting systems 276

N25 Permanent access and safety equipment 279

P12 Fire stopping systems 293

P20 Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry items 310

P21 Door/ window ironmongery 314

P31 Holes, chases, covers and supports for services 321

Q10 Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving accessories 325

Q41 Barriers/ guardrails 330

Q50 Site/ street furniture/ equipment 334

Q55 External decks and wall features 337

Z10 Purpose made joinery 341

Z11 Purpose made metalwork 344

Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment 349

Z20 Fixings/ adhesives 352

Z21 Mortars 358

Z22 Sealants 361

Z31 Powder coatings 364


P21 Door/ window ironmongery 0

P31 Holes, chases, covers and supports for services 0

Q Paving/Planting/Fencing/Site furniture 0

Q10 Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving accessories 0

Q41 Barriers/ guardrails 0

Q50 Site/ street furniture/ equipment 0

Q55 External decks and wall features 0

Z Building fabric reference specification 0

Z10 Purpose made joinery 0

Z11 Purpose made metalwork 0

Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment 0

Z20 Fixings/ adhesives 0

Z21 Mortars 0

Z22 Sealants 0

Z31 Powder coatings 0


C20
Demolition
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

C20 Demolition

TO BE READ WITH PRELIMINARIES/GENERAL CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION


DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF STRUCTURE, M.E.P & LANDSCAPE

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

110 DESK STUDY/ SURVEY


• Scope: Before starting deconstruction/ demolition work, examine available information, and
carry out a survey of:
- the structure or structures to be deconstructed/ demolished,
- the site on which the structure or structures stand, and
- the surrounding area.
• Report and method statements: Submit, describing:
- Form, condition and details of the structure or structures, the site, and the surrounding area.
Extent: Refer to Demolition Drawing Package .
- Type, location and condition of features of historical, archaeological, geological or ecological
importance.
- Type, location and condition of adjoining or surrounding premises that might be adversely
affected by removal of the structure or structures, or by noise, vibration and/ or dust
generated during deconstruction/ demolition.
- Identity and location of services above and below ground, including those required for the
Contractor's use, and arrangements for their disconnection and removal.
- Form and location of flammable, toxic or hazardous materials, including lead-based paint,
and proposed methods for their removal and disposal.
- Form and location of materials identified for reuse or recycling, and proposed methods for
removal and temporary storage.
- Proposed programme of work, including sequence and methods of deconstruction/
demolition.
- Details of specific pre-weakening required.
- Arrangements for protection of personnel and the general public, including exclusion of
unauthorized persons.
- Arrangements for control of site transport and traffic.
- Special requirements: Structural calculations in support of method statements .
• Format of report: Paper & Electronic .

120 EXTENT OF DECONSTRUCTION/ DEMOLITION


• General: Subject to retention requirements specified elsewhere, deconstruct/ demolish
structures down to levels as shown on drawing .

130 GROUNDWORKS
• Old foundations, slabs and the like: Break out in locations and to the extents stated.
• Contaminated material: Remove, and carry out remediation required by the Enforcing
Authority.

150 FEATURES TO BE RETAINED


• General: Keep in place and protect the following: refer to Demolition drawings.

Issue 0: Construction Documents C20 Demolition Page 5 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

SERVICES AFFECTED BY DECONSTRUCTION/ DEMOLITION

210 SERVICES REGULATIONS


• Work carried out to or affecting new and/ or existing services: Carry out in accordance with the
byelaws and/ or regulations of the relevant Statutory Authority.

220 LOCATION OF SERVICES


• Services affected by deconstruction/ demolition work: Locate and mark positions.
• Mains services marking: Arrange with the appropriate authorities for services to be located and
marked.
- Marking standard: In accordance with National Joint Utilities Group 'Guidelines on the
positioning and colour coding of underground utilities' apparatus'.

232 SERVICES DISCONNECTION ARRANGED BY EMPLOYER AND CONTRACTOR


• Responsibility: The Employer will arrange with the appropriate authorities for disconnection of
services and removal of fittings and equipment owned by those authorities prior to
deconstruction/ demolition, as follows: services affecting the daily operation of facility.
• Disconnection of remaining services: Arrange with the appropriate authorities. Remove fittings
and equipment not owned by those authorities.
• Timing: Do not start deconstruction/ demolition until disconnections are completed.

240 DISCONNECTION OF DRAINS


• General: Locate, disconnect and seal disused foul and surface water drains.
• Sealing: Permanent, and within the site.

250 LIVE FOUL AND SURFACE WATER DRAINS


• Drains and associated manholes, inspection chambers, gullies, vent pipes and fittings:
- Protect; maintain normal flow during deconstruction/ demolition.
- Make good any damage arising from deconstruction/ demolition work.
- Leave clean and in working order at completion of deconstruction/ demolition work.
• Other requirements: None.

260 SERVICE BYPASS CONNECTIONS


• General: Provide as necessary to maintain continuity of services to occupied areas of the site
on which the deconstruction/ demolition is taking place and to adjoining sites/ properties.
• Minimum notice to adjoining owners and all affected occupiers: 72 hours, if shutdown is
necessary during changeover.

270 SERVICES TO BE RETAINED


• Damage to services: Give notice, and notify relevant service authorities and/ or owner/
occupier regarding damage arising from deconstruction/ demolition.
• Repairs to services: Complete as directed, and to the satisfaction of the service authority or
owner.

Issue 0: Construction Documents C20 Demolition Page 6 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

DECONSTRUCTION/ DEMOLITION WORK

310 WORKMANSHIP
• Standard: Demolish structures in accordance with BS 6187.
• Operatives:
- Appropriately skilled and experienced for the type of work.
- Holding, or in training to obtain, relevant CITB Certificates of Competence.
• Site staff responsible for supervision and control of work: Experienced in the assessment of
risks involved and methods of deconstruction/ demolition to be used.

320 GAS OR VAPOUR RISKS


• Precautions: Prevent fire and/ or explosion caused by gas and/ or vapour from tanks, pipes,
etc.

330 DUST CONTROL


• General: Reduce airborne dust by periodically spraying deconstruction/ demolition works with
an appropriate wetting agent. Keep public roadways and footpaths clear of mud and debris.
• Lead dust: Submit method statement for control, containment and clean-up regimes.

340 HEALTH HAZARDS


• Precautions: Protect site operatives and general public from hazards associated with vibration,
dangerous fumes and dust arising during the course of the Works.

350 ADJOINING PROPERTY


• Temporary support and protection: Provide. Maintain and alter, as necessary, as work
proceeds. Do not leave unnecessary or unstable projections.
• Defects: Report immediately on discovery.
• Damage: Minimize. Repair promptly to ensure safety, stability, weather protection and security.
• Support to foundations: Do not disturb.

360 STRUCTURES TO BE RETAINED


• Extent: Refer to drawings.
• Parts which are to be kept in place: Protect.
• Interface between retained structures and deconstruction/ demolition: Cut away and strip out
with care to minimize making good.

370 PARTLY DEMOLISHED STRUCTURES


• General: Leave in a stable condition, with adequate temporary support at each stage to
prevent risk of uncontrolled collapse. Make secure outside working hours.
• Temporary works: Prevent overloading due to debris.
• Access: Prevent access by unauthorized persons.

380 DANGEROUS OPENINGS


• General: Provide guarding at all times, including outside of working hours. Illuminate during
hours of darkness.
• Access: Prevent access by unauthorized persons.

Issue 0: Construction Documents C20 Demolition Page 7 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

391A ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS – UNKNOWN OCCURRENCES


• The Contractor is to carry out a comprehensive survey of the building to ascertain whether
Asbestos or other hazardous materials are present on site, this must be undertaken before
commencing any other work. A Health & Safety Manual containing all safety procedures is to
be produced by the Contractor and submitted to the Project Manager for approval prior to
commencement of work.
• Discovery: Give notice immediately of suspected asbestos-containing materials when
discovered during deconstruction/ demolition work. Avoid disturbing such materials.
• Removal: Submit statutory risk assessments and details of proposed methods for safe
removal.

410 UNFORESEEN HAZARDS


• Discovery: Give notice immediately when hazards such as unrecorded voids, tanks, chemicals,
are discovered during deconstruction/ demolition.
• Removal: Submit details of proposed methods for filling, removal, etc.

442 SITE SURFACE AT COMPLETION


• Levels: Grade the site to follow the levels of adjacent areas.
• Temporary surface: Cover the site with 150 mm thick consolidated layer of reclaimed rubble.

450 SITE CONDITION AT COMPLETION


• Debris: Clear away and leave the site in a tidy condition.
• Other requirements: Contractor to remove all waste materials from site, no waste is to be
stored on site as this presents a fire hazard.

MATERIALS ARISING

510 CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY


• Components and materials arising from the deconstruction/ demolition work: Property of the
Contractor except where otherwise provided.
• Action: Remove from site as work proceeds where not to be reused or recycled for site use.

511 EMPLOYER'S PROPERTY


• Components and materials to remain the property of the Employer: refer drawings for itemised
materials for reuse.
• Protection: Maintain until these items are removed by the Employer or reused in the Works, or
until the end of the Contract.
• Special requirements: refer drawings.

520 RECYCLED MATERIALS


• Materials arising from deconstruction/ demolition work: Can be recycled or reused elsewhere
in the project, subject to compliance with the appropriate specification and in accordance with
any site waste management plan.
• Evidence of compliance: Submit full details and supporting documentation.
- Verification: Allow adequate time in programme for verification of compliance.

Issue 0: Construction Documents C20 Demolition Page 8 of 367


C90
Alterations - spot items
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

C90 Alterations - spot items

GENERAL

110 DESCRIPTIONS
• Location of spot item descriptions: BOQ, and refer Drawings.

120 EMPLOYER'S PROPERTY


• Components and materials arising from alterations that are to remain the property of the
Employer: refer drawings.
- Protection: Maintain until items listed above are removed by the Employer or reused in the
Works, or until the end of the Contract.
• Special requirements: None.

130 RECYCLED MATERIALS


• Materials arising from alterations: May be recycled or reused elsewhere in the project, subject
to compliance with the appropriate specification and in accordance with any site waste
management plan.
• Evidence of compliance: Submit full details and supporting documentation.
- Verification: Allow adequate time in programme for verification of compliance.

Issue 0: Construction Documents C90 Alterations - spot items Page 10 of 367


E40
Designed joints in in situ concrete
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

E40 Designed joints in in situ concrete

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract.
• Where performance specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate
to the satisfaction of the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the
applicable performance specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install floor and wall expansion joints in accordance with this
specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- All floor and wall expansion joints
- All adhesive fixings.
- All grouting etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with all specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details, setting out, including joints, edge details, and interface details to adjacent
construction:

120 CONSTRUCTION/ MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY


• Accuracy: Position and form joints accurately, straight, well-aligned and truly vertical or
horizontal or parallel with setting out lines of the building.
• Modifications to joint design or location: Submit proposals.
• Placing concrete to form movement joints:
- Maintain effectiveness of joints. Prevent concrete entering joints or penetrating or
impregnating compressible joint fillers.
- Do not place concrete simultaneously on both sides of movement joints.

Issue 0: Construction Documents E40 Designed joints in in situ concrete Page 12 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

210 FORMED JOINTS


• Forms/ stop ends generally: Rigid and grout-tight.
• Forms/ stop ends for projecting continuity reinforcement: To accommodate bars or fabric
without temporary bending or displacement.

211 FORMED JOINTS IN CONCRETE WEARING SURFACES


• Temporary forms: Square edged with a steel top surface.
• Placing concrete: Compact thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no
lipping.

230 PREPARATION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS


• Roughening of joint surfaces: Select from:
- Brushing and spraying: Remove surface laitance and expose aggregate finish while
concrete is still green.
- Other methods: Submit proposals.
• Condition of joint surfaces immediately before placing fresh concrete: Clean and damp.

510 SHEET MEMBRANE FOR SLIDING JOINTS


• Manufacturer: Saudi BASF for Building Materials Co. (Jeddah Branch), Baladiyah Street, P.O
Box 19465, Jeddah 21434, Saudi Arabia. Tel: +966 2 663 5019 or equal and approved by
Architect.
- Product reference: Wabo Seismic Span ref: APX-1800 - refer to drawings for locations.
• Fixing: Bond to first cast concrete surface, or otherwise hold in position during concreting.

545A COMPRESSIBLE SEALING STRIP SYSTEM TO FLOOR JOINTS


• Manufacturer: Saudi BASF for Building Materials Co. (Jeddah Branch), Baladiyah Street, P.O
Box 19465, Jeddah 21434, Saudi Arabia. Tel: +966 2 663 5019 or equal and approved by
Architect.
- Product reference: Masterflex 1029 - refer to drawings for locations.
- Colour: n/a.

545B COMPRESSIBLE SEALING STRIP SYSTEM TO WALL JOINTS


• Manufacturer: Saudi BASF for Building Materials Co. (Jeddah Branch), Baladiyah Street, P.O
Box 19465, Jeddah 21434, Saudi Arabia. Tel: +966 2 663 5019 or equal and approved by
Architect.
- Product reference: Masterflex 1036 - refer to drawings for locations.
- Colour: n/a.

590 INSPECTION OF TIED AND PARTIALLY TIED JOINTS


• Purpose: To determine whether shrinkage is concentrated at occasional joints.
• Timing: At intervals from one month after casting of slab for duration of works.
• Joints that have opened significantly more than the average: Submit proposals for grouting.

Issue 0: Construction Documents E40 Designed joints in in situ concrete Page 13 of 367
F10
Brick/ block walling
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

F10 Brick/ block walling

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILTIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
- The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent.
• Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be responsible for the
completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's Requirements and shall
prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for the efficient execution of
the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance specification is defined the
Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Designer and the
Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and lay blockwork walling in accordance to this specification. The
scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
- Solid/ hollow blockwork walling lintels etc.
- Structural stainless steel ties and fixings required to complete the installation.
- All proprietary movement joints and materials necessary to complete the works.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- All the sops necessary to maintain the fire integrity of the walling.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Any miscellaneous steel structure/ structure necessary to ensure structural stability of the
walling i.e. wind posts as determined by the structural engineer.
- The contractor shall be fully responsible for the detailing and provision of all stiffeners,
movement joints etc for the masonry walls in accordance with standards and to the
Structural Engineer's approval.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F10 Brick/ block walling Page 15 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF WALLING

255A CONCRETE FACING BLOCKWORK TO INTERNAL WALLS THAT ARE PAINTED AND NOT
PLASTERED
• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3.
- Manufacturer: Emcon LLC, PO Box 62942, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971 4 347 3400 or equivalent
and approved by Architect.
Product reference: submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Configuration: Solid.
- Compressive strength: Minimum crushing strength of 12.4 N/mm2
Density: Minimum density of 1840kg/m3.
Characteristic value: Not applicable.
Category: I.
- Freeze/ Thaw resistance: Not applicable.
- Recycled content: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Work sizes (length x width x height): 400L x 200H x 100W / 150W / 200W mm as indicated
in the Architect's drawings.
- Finish/ Colour: FAIRFACE.
- Special shapes: None.
- Additional requirements: None.
• Mortar: As section Z21.
- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand, minimum cube strength of 5 N/mm2.
- Additional requirements: LAYING: At every alternate course place 4mm dia x 150mm wide
ladder mesh continuous and Column / masonry ties 2.5mm thick x 20mm wide x 150mm
long, place ties and mesh on top of block before placing the next layer. CONTROL /
MOVEMENT JOINTS: Locate at major changes of wall height or thickness, at openings, and
at not more than 6 metre centres, or, as shown on the drawings. Refer to manufacturers
recommendations for control joints. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Form and treat construction
joints between block walls and hardened concrete work to ensure bonding occurs.
• Bond: Half lap stretcher.
• Joints: Flush.
• Features: None.
• Sample Panels: as per F10/730.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F10 Brick/ block walling Page 16 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

355A CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK FOR EXTERNAL WALLS


• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3.
- Manufacturer: Emcon LLC, PO Box 62942, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971 4 347 3400 or equivalent
and approved by Architect.
Product reference: submit for architect / engineer approval.
- Configuration: Solid.
- Compressive strength: Minimum crushing strength of 12.4 N/mm2.
Density: Not applicable.
Characteristic value: Not applicable.
Category: I.
- Freeze/ Thaw resistance: Not applicable.
- Thermal properties: Thermal conductivity: certified by UKAS or Local Authority accredited
laboratory at 3% moisture content BS 874-2.1. Thermal resistance: 2.198 m²K/W.
- Recycled content: Submit proposals for Architect Approval.
- Work sizes ( length (L) x height (H) x width (W): 400L x 200H x 200W mm as indicated in
the Architect's drawings.
- Special shapes: Include all special shapes such as end, half sizes, lintel units etc required to
complete installation indicated in the drawings.
- Additional requirements: All blockwork beneath ground level to be painted with 3 coats of
bitumen paint.
• Mortar: As section Z21.
- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand, minimum cube strength of 5 N/mm2.
- Additional requirements: LAYING: At every alternate course place 4mm dia x 150mm wide
ladder mesh continuous and Column / masonry ties 2.5mm thick x 20mm wide x 150mm
long, place ties and mesh on top of block before placing the next layer. CONTROL /
MOVEMENT JOINTS: Locate at major changes of wall height or thickness, at openings, and
at not more than 6 metre centres, or, as shown on the drawings. Refer to manufacturers
recommendations for control joints. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Form and treat construction
joints between block walls and hardened concrete work to ensure bonding occurs.
• Bond: Half lap stretcher.
• Sample Panels: as per F10/730.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F10 Brick/ block walling Page 17 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

355B CONCRETE COMMON BLOCKWORK TO INTERNAL WALLS GENERALLY


• Blocks: To BS EN 771-3.
- Manufacturer: Emcon, PO Box 62942, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971 4 347 3400 or equivalent and
approved by Architect.
Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Configuration: Solid.
- Compressive strength: Minimum crushing strength of 12.4 N/mm2
Density: Not applicable.
Characteristic value: Not applicable.
Category: I.
- Freeze/ Thaw resistance: Not applicable.
- Thermal properties: Thermal conductivity: certified by UKAS or Local Authority accredited
laboratory at 3% moisture content BS 874-2.1. Thermal resistance: 2.198 m²K/W.
- Recycled content: Submit proposals.
- Work sizes (length (L) x height (H) x width (W): 400L x 200H x 100W / 150W / 200W mm
as indicated in the Architect's drawings.
- Special shapes: Include all special shapes such as end, half sizes, lintel units etc required to
complete installation indicated in the drawings.
- Additional requirements: All hollow blocks under lintel seatings to be filled with concrete.
• Mortar: As section Z21.
- Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
- Mix: 1:1:6 cement:lime:sand, minimum cube strength of 5 N/mm2.
- Additional requirements: LAYING: At every alternate course place 4mm dia x 150mm wide
ladder mesh continuous and Column / masonry ties 2.5mm thick x 20mm wide x 150mm
long, place ties and mesh on top of block before placing the next layer. CONTROL /
MOVEMENT JOINTS: Locate at major changes of wall height or thickness, at openings, and
at not more than 8 metre centres, or, as shown on the drawings. Refer to manufacturers
recommendations for control joints. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Form and treat construction
joints between block walls and hardened concrete work to ensure bonding occurs..
• Bond: Half lap stretcher.
• Sample Panels: as per F10/730.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F10 Brick/ block walling Page 18 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TESTING

410A COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MORTAR FOR EACH WALLING TYPE


• Testing authority: By a Local Authority approved laboratory.
• Test method: BS 5628-1 Annex A and BS EN 1015-11.
• Preliminary tests procedure: As follows:
- Specimens:
Number of specimens: 6.
Type: 40 x 40 x 100 mm prisms.
Preparation: At least six weeks before walling commences.
- Specimen testing: Half of specimens at 7 days. Remainder at 28 days.
Retarded mixes: Extend curing periods to include retardation period.
- Response to result: If mean compressive strength at 28 days is not within the range given
below repeat tests with more suitable sand or next higher designation of mortar.
• Site tests procedure: As follows.
- Number of specimens: Six per 150m² of walling or per storey whichever the more frequent.
- Specimen types: As preliminary test, but prepared during construction.
- Specimen testing: Half of specimens at 7 days. Remainder at 28 days.
Retarded mixes: Extend curing periods to include retardation period.
• Required test mean compressive strength at 28 days (N/mm²): To be within the following
range:

Walling type Preliminary tests Site tests


Min. Max. Min. Max.
N/mm² N/mm² N/mm² N/mm²
(MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa)

F10/255A, F10/335A 3.6 6.5 5 6.5


& F10/355B
• Results: Submit to Architect and structural engineer for approval.

415 FRESH MORTAR CEMENT CONTENT


• Test method: BREMORTEST in accordance with Building Research Establishment Information
Paper 8/89 .
• Test specimens: Test mortar for the following wall types: F10/ 255A, 355A / 355B .
• Results: Submit.

WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

440 CONDITIONING OF CONCRETE BRICKS/ BLOCKS


• Autoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks delivered warm from manufacturing process: Do not use.
• Age of nonautoclaved concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not use until at least four weeks old.
• Avoidance of suction in concrete bricks/ blocks: Do not wet.
- Use of water retaining mortar admixture: Submit details.

500 LAYING GENERALLY


• Mortar joints: Fill vertical joints. Lay bricks, solid and cellular blocks on a full bed.
• Bond where not specified: Half lap stretcher.
• Vertical joints in facework: Even widths. Plumb at every fifth cross joint.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F10 Brick/ block walling Page 19 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

520 ACCURACY
• Courses: Level and true to line.
• Faces, angles and features: Plumb.
• Permissible deviations:
- Position in plan of any point in
relation to the specified building
reference line and/ or point at
the same level ± 10 mm.
- Straightness in any 5 m length ± 5 mm.
- Verticality up to 3 m height ± 10 mm.
- Verticality up to 7 m height ± 14 mm.
- Overall thickness of walls ± 10 mm.
- Level of bed joints up to 5 m
(brick masonry) ± 11 mm.
- Level of bed joints up to 5 m
(block masonry) ± 13 mm.

535 HEIGHT OF LIFTS IN WALLING USING CEMENT GAUGED OR HYDRAULIC LIME


MORTAR
• Quoins and advance work: Rack back.
• Lift height (maximum): 1.2 m above any other part of work at any time.
• Daily lift height (maximum): 1.5 m for any one leaf.

595 LINTELS
• Bearing: Ensure full length masonry units occur immediately under lintel ends.

635 JOINTING
• Profile: Consistent in appearance.

645 ACCESSIBLE JOINTS NOT EXPOSED TO VIEW


• Jointing: Struck flush as work proceeds.

665 POINTING TO ALL BLOCK WALLS


• Joint preparation: Remove debris. Dampen surface.
• Mortar: As section Z21.
- Standard: As section Z21.
- Mix: Group 3 as clause 460.
- Additional requirements: None.
• Profile: Flush.

671 FIRE STOPPING


• Avoidance of fire and smoke penetration: Fit tightly between cavity barriers and masonry.
Leave no gaps.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F10 Brick/ block walling Page 20 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

690 ADVERSE WEATHER


• General: Do not use frozen materials or lay on frozen surfaces.
• Air temperature requirements: Do not lay bricks/ blocks:
- In cement gauged mortars when at or below 3°C and falling or unless it is at least 1°C and
rising.
- In hydraulic lime:sand mortars when at or below 5°C and falling or below 3°C and rising.
- In thin joint mortar glue when outside the limits set by the mortar manufacturer.
• Temperature of walling during curing: Above freezing until hardened.
• Newly erected walling: Protect at all times from:
- Rain and snow.
- Drying out too rapidly in hot conditions and in drying winds.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FACEWORK

710 THE TERM FACEWORK


• Definition: Applicable in this specification to brick/ block walling finished fair.
- Painted facework: The only requirement to be waived is that relating to colour.

730 BRICK/ CONCRETE BLOCK SAMPLES


• General: Before placing orders with suppliers submit for approval of appearance labelled
samples of the following: Blocks as in clauses F10/255A, F10/355A & F10/355B .
• Selection of samples: Representative of the range in variation of appearance.

740 FINISHED MASONRY WORK REFERENCE PANELS


• General: Before proceeding to construct the following walling types, construct panels as
specified. Give notice when panels are dry.
• Selection of masonry units: Reasonably representative of the average quality of the whole
order to be delivered .
• Panel types:
- Walling type: Blocks as in clauses F10/255A, F10/355A & F10/355B .
Location: to be agreed .
Size: 1.5 x 1.5 m .
Other requirements: to contain length of soft facet .

745A MASONRY SAMPLE PANELS


• Sampling frequency: A panel for each type and delivery of masonry unit.
• Selection of masonry units: Reasonably representative of the average quality of the whole
order to be delivered .

750 COLOUR CONSISTENCY OF MASONRY UNITS


• Colour range: Submit proposals of methods taken to ensure that units are of consistent and
even appearance within deliveries.
• Conformity: Check each delivery for consistency of appearance with previous deliveries and
with approved reference panels; do not use if variation is excessive.
• Finished work: Free from patches, horizontal stripes and racking back marks.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F10 Brick/ block walling Page 21 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

760 APPEARANCE
• Brick/ block selection: Do not use units with damaged faces or arrises.
• Cut masonry units: Where cut faces or edges are exposed cut with table masonry saw.
• Quality control: Lay masonry units to match relevant reference panels.
- Setting out: To produce satisfactory junctions and joints with built-in elements and
components.
- Coursing: Evenly spaced using gauge rods.
• Lifts: Complete in one operation.
• Methods of protecting facework: Submit proposals.

780 GROUND LEVEL


• Commencement of facework: Not less than 150 mm below finished level of adjoining ground or
external works level.

790 PUTLOG SCAFFOLDING


• Use: Not permitted in facework.

830 CLEANLINESS
• Facework: Keep clean.
• Mortar on facework: Allow to dry before removing with stiff bristled brush.
• Removal of marks and stains: Rubbing not permitted.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F10 Brick/ block walling Page 22 of 367


F30
Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stone walling
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ block/ stone walling

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

155A INSULATION TO EXTERNAL AREAS


• Insulation: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) bead boards.
- Standard: BS EN 13163.
- Product certification: Not Applicable.
• Manufacturer: Knauf Insulation Limited or equal and approved by Architect - Submit proposals
for Architect approval .
- Product reference: EPS Insualtion - Expanded polystyrene.
• Recycled content: 25% (minimum) to BS EN ISO 14021.
• Face size (length x width): 1200 x 450 mm.
• Thickness (nominal): 100 mm.
• Thermal conductivity: 0.038 W/mK.
• Reaction to fire class: F.
• Additional requirements: All fixings to be as per Manufacturer's recommendations. Vapour
barrier to outside face of EPS Insulation.
• Placement: Secure against face of inner leaf.
- Residual cavity: Clear and unobstructed.
• Joints between boards, at closures and penetrations: No gaps and free from mortar and
debris.

REINFORCING/ FIXING ACCESSORIES

214A WALL TIES Blockwork to Concrete Columns


• Standard: To BS 1248 FIG. 2 CP 121 PART 1.73
- Type: 4 (Masonry light duty) .
• Manufacturer: Ancon (Middle East) FZE, PO Box 17225, Jebel Ali, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 (0) 4
883 4346, Fax: +971 (0) 4 883 4347 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Ancon SDB Wall Tie .
- Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel .
• Sizes: 150 mm .
• End types: Symmetrical pierced deformed plate .
• Design embedment length (minimum): 50 mm .
• Movement: Non tolerant .
• Additional requirements: Vertical spacing to be every alternate course .

241A WALL STARTERS/CONNECTORS Blockwork to Concrete Columns


• Manufacturer: Ancon (Middle East) FZE, PO Box 17225, Jebel Ali, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 (0) 4
883 4346, Fax: +971 (0) 4 883 4347 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Ancon 36/8 Wall Extension System .
- Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel grade 316 .
• Sizes: as required to suit application .
• Wall Ties: Ancon type SP36 .
- Length (minimum): 150 mm .
- Material: Stainless steel grade 316.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ Page 24 of 367
block/ stone walling
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

251A WALL HEAD RESTRAINT SLIP TIES TO UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR SLAB


• Standard: To BS 1248 FIG. 2 CP 121 PART 1.73.
• Manufacturer: Ancon (Middle East) FZE, PO Box 17225, Jebel Ali, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 (0) 4
883 4346, Fax: +971 (0) 4 883 4347 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: IHR-V Head Restraint .
• Material/ finish: Austenitic stainless steel .
• Sizes: Standard .

255 WIND POSTS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect & Structural Engineer approval .
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect & Structural Engineer approval .
• Material: Austenitic stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) .
• Sizes: Refer to Structural Engineer's drawings .
• Fixings (complete with washers and shims): Refer to Structural Engineer's drawings .

FLEXIBLE DAMP PROOF COURSES/ CAVITY TRAYS

330A DAMP PROOF COURSE - To Blockwork Walls as required


• Manufacturer: Duproof L.L.C, Dubai Investment Park, Dubai, UAE, P.O. 74334, or equal and
approved by Architect .
- Tel: +971 4 8851212, Fax: +971 4 8851313.
- Product reference: Damp Guard H - or equal and approved by Architect .
• Width: 100 / 150mm or to suit wall width.
• Jointing: 150mm minimum overlap with jointing tape
• Accessories: Jointing tape and preformed stop ends
• Other Requirements: Lay DPC to Architect's detail, inaccordance with good building practice.
Do not dry bed. Observe manufacturer's instructions which accompany every consignment.

INSTALLATION OF DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS

415 HORIZONTAL DPCS


• Placement: In continuous lengths on full even bed of fresh mortar, with 100 mm laps at joints
and full laps at angles.
• Width: At least full width of leaf unless otherwise specified. Edges of dpc not covered with
mortar or projecting into cavity.
• Overlying construction: Immediately cover with full even bed of mortar to receive next masonry
course.
• Overall finished joint thickness: As close to normal as practicable.

425 GROUND LEVEL DPCS


• Joint with damp proof membrane: Continuous and effectively sealed.

435 STEPPED DPCS IN EXTERNAL WALLS


• External walls on sloping ground: Install dpcs not less than 150 mm above adjoining finished
ground level.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ Page 25 of 367
block/ stone walling
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

455A COPING/ CAPPING DPCS


• Placement: Bed in one operation to ensure maximum bond between masonry units, mortar
and dpc.

465 SEALING DPCS Generally


• Overlaps and junctions: Seal with Adhesive recommended by DPC manufacturer .

525A DPC LEADING EDGE IN FACEWORK - SET BACK


• Treatment at face of masonry: Set back 5 mm from face of wall with recessed mortar joint to
expose edge at the following locations: At window and door heads .

560 VERTICAL DPCS GENERALLY


• Form: In one piece wherever possible.
- Joints: Upper part overlapping lower not less than 100 mm.

570 JAMB DPCS AT OPENINGS


• Joint with cavity tray/ lintel at head: Full underlap.
• Joint with sill/ horizontal dpc at base: Full overlap.
• Projection into cavity: Not less than 25 mm.
• Relationship with frame: In full contact.

JOINTS

610A MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH SEALANT External Blockwork & Render


• Joint preparation and sealant application: As section Z22.
• Filler: Closed cell polyethylene foam .
- Thickness: To match design width of joint.
- Manufacturer: Saudi BASF for Building Materials Co. Ltd, Al Khobar, Dammam 2nd
Industrial Area, P.O. Box 1884, Dammam, Tel: +966 38 121140, Fax +966 38 121822 or
equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Sonolastic Expansion Joint Filler .
- Placement: Build in as work proceeds with no projections into cavities and to correct depth
to receive sealant system.
• Sealant:
- Designation: ISO 11600-F-20LM .
- Manufacturer: Saudi BASF for Building Materials Co. Ltd, Al Khobar, Dammam 2nd
Industrial Area, P.O. Box 1884, Dammam, Tel: +966 38 121140, Fax +966 38 121822 or
equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Masterflex 472 .
- Colour: to match wall finish .

Issue 0: Construction Documents F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ Page 26 of 367
block/ stone walling
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

PROPRIETARY SILLS/ LINTELS/ COPINGS/ DRESSINGS

720B THRESHOLDS [TO EXTERNAL WINDOWS / DOORS]


• Standard: To BS 5642-1.
• Material: Precast coloured concrete .
• Manufacturer: Submit Proposals for Architect Approval .
- Product reference: Submit Proposals for Architect Approval .
• Dimensions:Refer to Architect's drawings
• Finish: Smooth .
• Colour: RAL 1013 to match external render.
• Mortar for bedding/ jointing: Cement gauged as section Z21.
• Joints: Flush.
• Bedding one piece sills: Leave bed joints open except under end bearings and masonry
mullions. On completion, point to match adjacent work.

735A PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS


• Standard: To BS EN 845-2.
• Manufacturer: Submit Proposals for Architect Approval .
- Product reference: Submit Proposals for Architect Approval .
• Sizes & Location: Lintel depths and reinforcement should be designed to suit structural
opening spans - refer to Architect's drawings for Structural Opening sizes. Structural Engineer
to confirm lintel sizes and all loading requirements .
• Additional requirements: None .
• Placement: Bed on mortar used for adjacent work.
- Bearing length (minimum): 150 mm .

760A COPING UNITS [TO ROOF PARAPET WALLS]


• Standard: To BS 5642-2.
• Material: Glass Fibre Reinforced Concrete - Precoloured .
• Manufacturer: Submit Proposals for Architect Approval .
- Product reference: GRC Coping Unit - contractor to submit proposals for Architect approval.
Coping unit to lay on a 10mm thick mortar bed with DPC under. Also to have stainless steel
dowel fixing to mechanically fix unit to concrete parapet .
• Dimensions: Refer to Architect's drawings.
• Finish: Smooth - Precoloured GRC .
- Colour: to match external render.
• Mortar for bedding/ jointing: Cement gauged as section Z21.
• Joints: Full and finished flush.
• Placement: Lay on a full bed of mortar to line and level.

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

830 BUILDING IN FRAMES


• Preparation: Remove horns and provide support.
• Fixing cramps: Fully bed in mortar.

840 OPENINGS FOR FRAMES


• Formation: Use accurate, rigid templates to required size.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ Page 27 of 367
block/ stone walling
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

980 LINEN CHUTE TO SERVICE LIFT LOBBY


• Manufacturer: Specialized Factory for Steel Products SFSP, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. Tel. +
9662 6374482, Fax. 9662 6361963 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Product Reference: Standard Linen Chute
• Size: 600mm internal diameter linen chute as provided by SFSP.
• Material: All vertical chute trunking entry sections and vent pipes shall be manufactured from
1.5mm thick stainless steel grade 304 and comply with BS 1449:2.
• Door: 450 x 450mm stainless steel, fully opening, automatic closing side hung doors with
electric interlock. Door to be self sealing with a lockable handle, key to pass and be 120 minute
fire rated.
• Electric Interlock: Each side hung door to have an electro-magnetic solenoid bolt. The system
should be mounted in the panel above the entry section. Operation shall be push button, with
one indicator lamp, green indicating ready for operation and red indicating that the system is in
use. The master control box for the interlock system shall be mounted within the Express
Laundry Room. The interlock system shall operate off a 120/240V electric supply reduced to
24V for safety and shall have a manufacturer's factory fitted preset timer. The timer shall be
preset to allow single use of the chute at any given time.
• Ventilation: The manufacturer shall provide, from the top entry section to the 1st floor, a top
cover plate with sufficient vent pipe (600mm internal diameter) to pass through the roof slab
and terminating 1200mm above the finished roof level with a terminal and weathering cravat.
• Discharge: The manufacturer shall provide a 2mm stainless steel angle discharge, with a
tubular leg for additional support. The discharge section shall pass through a 120 minute fire
rated, fire shutter door complete with 165 degree fahrenheit fusible link.
• Accessories: Type 'D' Top Hung Automatic Fire Door required to base of linen chute.
• Sprinklers: Glass bulb sprinkler required for fire protection inside the chute, minimum
requirement for one sprinkler at the head of the chute, fixed to top cover plate.
• Signage: Sign saying 'Linen Only' to be be provided to door on each level, to be written in
English and Arabic.
• Other Requirements: The sections of the chute shall have no rivets, bolts or other projections
inside the chute to impede the fall of linen. The manufacturer shall provide sealant and all
other neccessary equipment to successfully execute the system. Under no circumstances shall
the chute be used for waste during the construction period of the building.
• Submittals: The manufacturer shall supply detailed shop drawings to the Architect for approval
prior to manufacture.
• Acceptance: The manufacturer's certificate of acceptance shall be signed by the Main
Contractor or Client on successful completion of the work.

Issue 0: Construction Documents F30 Accessories/ sundry items for brick/ Page 28 of 367
block/ stone walling
G12
Isolated structural metal members
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

G12 Isolated structural metal members

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILTIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance
specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance
specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and lay isolated structural members in accordance to this
specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
- Isolated structural members.
- Stainless steel fixings required to complete the installation.
- All proprietary movement joints, connections and materials necessary to complete the
works.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- All the sops necessary to maintain the fire integrity of the walling.
- Any miscellaneous steel structure/ structure necessary to ensure structural stability as
determined by the structural engineer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents G12 Isolated structural metal members Page 30 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

110 FABRICATION OF MEMBERS


• Steel sections: To BS 4-1, BS EN 10055, BS EN 10056 or BS EN 10210, as appropriate.
- Steel: To BS EN 10025-2, grade S275JR.
- Surface condition: Free from heavy pitting and rust, burrs, sharp edges and flame cutting
dross.
• Cuts and holes: Accurate and neat.
• Welding: Metal arc method to BS EN 1011-2.
- Welded joints: Fully fused, with mechanical properties not less than those of the parent
metal.
- Site welding: Obtain approval.

150 SHOP PRIMING STEEL MEMBERS


• Preparation: Loose scale and rust, burrs, fins, sharp edges and weld spatter removed; crevices
cleaned out; surfaces thoroughly degreased, rinsed with clean water and allowed to dry.
• Primer: Zinc phosphate modified alkyd.
- Application: One full coat within 8 hours of cleaning surfaces.

250 BOLT ASSEMBLIES


• Type: Stainless steel
• Location: Refer to the drawings.
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Size: As shown on drawings.

310 INSTALLATION
• Accuracy: Members positioned true to line and level using, if necessary, steel packs of
sufficient area to allow full transfer of loads to bearing surfaces.
• Fixing: Use washers under bolt heads and nuts.
- Tapered washers: Provide under bolt heads and nuts bearing on sloping surfaces. Match
taper to slope angle and align correctly.

Issue 0: Construction Documents G12 Isolated structural metal members Page 31 of 367
G20
Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract.
• Where performance specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate
to the satisfaction of the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the
applicable performance specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install all carpentry items in accordance to this specification.
The scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
- Carpentry items and associated fixings.
- Stainless steel fixings required to complete the installation.
- All proprietary movement joints, connections and materials necessary to complete the
works.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- All the sops necessary to maintain the fire integrity of the walling.
- Any miscellaneous steel structure/ structure necessary to ensure structural stability as
determined by the structural engineer.

GENERAL

150 STRENGTH GRADING OF TIMBER


• Grader: Any company currently registered under a third party quality assurance scheme
operated by a certification body approved by the UK Timber Grading Committee.

Issue 0: Construction Documents G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing Page 33 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

PRODUCTS

260 STRUCTURAL HARDWOOD (STRENGTH CLASS NOT SPECIFIED) FOR GENERAL USE
• Species and origin: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Grading standard: To BS 5756 and so marked.
- Grade: Temperate hardwoods:.
• Surface finish: Regularized.
• Treatment: Organic solvent impregnation to NBS section Z12 and British Wood Preserving and
Damp-proofing Association Commodity Specification C8, Service life: 40 years.

310 STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD FOR GENERAL USE


• Standard: To the relevant national standards and quality control procedures specified in BS
5268-2, and so marked.
• Type: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Grade: American construction and industrial plywood.
• Nominal thickness/ number of plies: 18mm.
• Finish: Unsanded.
• Treatment: Organic solvent impregnation to NBS section Z12 and British Wood Preserving and
Damp-proofing Association Commodity Specification C8, Service life: 40 years.

WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

401 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF STRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD AND HARDWOOD


• Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are target sizes as
defined in BS EN 336.
• Tolerances: The tolerance indicators (T1) and (T2) specify the maximum permitted deviations
from target sizes as stated in BS EN 336, clause 4.3:
- Tolerance class 1 (T1) for sawn surfaces.
- Tolerance class 2 (T2) for further processed surfaces.

402 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF NONSTRUCTURAL SOFTWOOD


• Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are finished sizes.
• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes: As stated in BS EN 1313-1:
- Clause 6 for sawn sections.
- Clause NA.2 for further processed sections.

403 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF NONSTRUCTURAL HARDWOOD


• Dimensions: Dimensions in this specification and shown on drawings are finished sizes.
• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes: As stated in BS EN 1313-2:
- Clause 6 for sawn sections.
- Clause NA.3 for further processed sections.

420 WARPING OF TIMBER


• Bow, spring, twist and cup: Not greater than the limits set down in BS 4978 or BS EN 519 for
softwood, or BS 5756 for hardwood.

Issue 0: Construction Documents G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing Page 34 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

430 SELECTION AND USE OF TIMBER


• Timber members damaged, crushed or split beyond the limits permitted by their grading: Do
not use.
• Notches and holes: Position in relation to knots or other defects such that the strength of
members will not be reduced.
• Scarf joints, finger joints and splice plates: Do not use without approval.

440 PROCESSING TREATED TIMBER


• Cutting and machining: As much as possible before treatment.
• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed, planed,
ploughed, etc.
• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a solution
recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.

450 MOISTURE CONTENT


• Moisture content of wood and wood based products at time of installation: Not more than:
- Covered in generally unheated spaces: 24%.
- Covered in generally heated spaces: 20%.
- Internal in continuously heated spaces: 20%.

451 MOISTURE CONTENT TESTING


• Procedure: When instructed, test timber sections with an approved electrical moisture meter.
• Test sample: Test 5% but not less than 10 lengths of each cross-section in the centre of the
length.
• Test results: 90% of values obtained to be within the specified range. Provide records of all
tests.

510 PROTECTION
• Generally: Keep timber dry and do not overstress, distort or disfigure sections or components
during transit, storage, lifting, erection or fixing.
• Timber and components: Store under cover, clear of the ground and with good ventilation.
Support on regularly spaced, level bearers on a dry, firm base. Open pile to ensure free
movement of air through the stack.
• Trussed rafters: Keep vertical during handling and storage.

550 EXPOSED TIMBER


• Planed structural timber exposed to view in completed work: Prevent damage to and marking
of surfaces and arrises.

JOINTING TIMBER

570 JOINTING/FIXING GENERALLY


• Generally: Where not specified precisely, select methods of jointing and fixing and types, sizes
and spacings of fasteners in compliance with section Z20.

Issue 0: Construction Documents G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing Page 35 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

580 FRAMING ANCHORS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Material/ finish: Galvanized low carbon steel.
• Fasteners: Galvanized or sherardized square twist nails.
- Size: Not less than size recommended by anchor manufacturer.
• Fixing: Secure using not less than the number of nails recommended by anchor manufacturer.

600 BLACK BOLTS AND NUTS


• Standard: To BS EN ISO 898-1 and BS EN 20898-2.
• Finish (applied by manufacturer): Galvanized.

610 BLACK CUP AND COUNTERSUNK HEAD BOLTS AND NUTS


• Standard: To BS 4933.
• Finish (applied by manufacturer): Galvanized.

620 WASHERS
• Standard: Plain to BS 4320, spring to BS 4464.
• Material and finish: To match bolts.
• Dimensions when seated directly on timber surfaces: Unless specified otherwise:
- Diameter/side length: Not less than 3 times bolt diameter.
- Thickness: Not less than 0.25 times bolt diameter.

625 STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS


• Bolts and nuts:
- Standard: To BS EN ISO 3506, Grade A2.
• Washers:
- Material: To match bolts.
- Diameter: Not less than 2 times bolt diameter.
- Thickness: Not less than 0.2 times bolt diameter.

630 BOLTED JOINTS


• Bolt spacings (minimum): To BS 5268-2, table 81.
• Holes for bolts: Located accurately and drilled to diameters as close as practical to the nominal
bolt diameter and not more than 2 mm larger.
• Washers: Placed under bolt heads and nuts that would otherwise bear directly on timber. Use
spring washers in locations which will be hidden or inaccessible in the completed building.
• Bolt tightening: So that washers just bite the surface of the timber. Ensure that at least one
complete thread protrudes from the nut.
- Checking: At agreed regular intervals up to Completion. Tighten as necessary.

Issue 0: Construction Documents G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing Page 36 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

ERECTION AND INSTALLATION

715 BONDED ANCHORS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Size: Refer to the drawings.
• Material/ finish: Refer to the drawings.
• Spacing/ edge distance (minimum): Refer to the drawings.
- Obtain instructions if specified spacing or edge distance cannot be achieved.
• Installation holes: Drilled to diameter and depth recommended by manufacturer. Clean and
free from dust.
• Permeable sleeves: Use in conditions where otherwise loss of bonding agent would be
unacceptably high.
• Installation/ tightening: To manufacturer's instructions.

721 EXPANSION ANCHORS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Size: Refer to the drawings.
• Material/ finish: Refer to the drawings.
• Spacing/ edge distance (minimum): Refer to the drawings.
- Obtain instructions if specified spacing or edge distance cannot be achieved.
• Installation holes: Drilled to diameter and depth recommended by manufacturer. Clean and
free from dust.
• Installation/ tightening: To manufacturer's instructions.

725 HAMMER-IN FASTENERS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Type: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Size: Submit proposals for Architect approval.

750 MODIFICATIONS/REPAIRS
• Defects due to detailing or fabrication errors: Report without delay.
• Methods of rectification: Obtain approval of proposals before starting modification or remedial
work.
• Defective/damaged components: Timber members/ components may be rejected if the nature
and/or number of defects would result in an excessive amount of site repair.

760 TEMPORARY BRACING


• Provision: As necessary to maintain structural timber components in position and to ensure
complete stability during construction.

770 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS


• Provision: Position and fix additional studs, noggings and/ or battens to support edges of
sheets materials, and wall/ floor/ ceiling mounted appliances, fixtures, etc. shown on drawings
• Material properties: Additional studs, noggings and battens to be of adequate size and have
the same treatment, if any, as adjacent timber supports.

Issue 0: Construction Documents G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing Page 37 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

775 BEARINGS
• Timber surfaces which are to transmit loads: Finished to ensure close contact over the whole
of the designed bearing area.
• Packings: Where provided, to cover the whole of the designed bearing area.
- Crushing strength: Not less than timber being supported.
- In external locations: Rot and corrosion proof.

850 INSPECTION GENERALLY


• Structural timber-work: Give reasonable notice before covering up.

860 BOLTED JOINTS INSPECTION


• Timing: Inspect all accessible bolts at the end of the Defects Liability Period and tighten if
necessary.

870 ANCHOR TESTING


• Standard: To BS 5080-1 and -2.
• Preliminary tests: Not required.
• Proof tests: Test 10% of working fixings to 1.5 times the working load..
• Test reports: Submit as soon as available.

Issue 0: Construction Documents G20 Carpentry/ timber framing/ first fixing Page 38 of 367
H11
Curtain walling
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

H11 Curtain walling

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

TENDERING

10 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER


• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:
- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.
- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including full size detail of all head, cill and jamb
types .
- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with specification of
proposed incorporated products and finishes, including insulating glass units, Aluminium and
powder coating, .
- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with specification of
proposed curtain walling.
- Proposals for connections to and support from the building structure and building
components.
- Proposals for amendments to primary supporting structure and for secondary supporting
structure additional to that shown on preliminary design drawings.
- Schedule of builder's work, special provisions and special attendance by others.
- Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be prepared.
- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.
- Schedule of products and finishes with a design life expectancy less than that specified in
clause 440, with proposals for frequencies and methods of replacement.
- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.
- Areas of non-compliance with the specification.

15 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• Design Requirements
The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance
specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance
specification.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 40 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

20 DESIGN STANDARDS
• The Contractor shall ensure that the Works designed by him comply with all statutory
requirements and in particular, with the requirements of the current Local Authority
Regulations.
• The Contractor shall ensure that the Works comply with The Centre for Window and Cladding
Technology (CWCT) 'Standard for Curtain Walling'. For the duration of the contract, the main
contractor is to keep a copy of the CWCT Standard at the design office, workshops and on site
for reference.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to complete the design and documents for the Curtain Walling and
assemblies in accordance with this specification. The scope of works includes but is not limited
to the following:
- Curtain Walling and all associated fixings.
- Associated support systems, membranes and insulation.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Secondary steel & fixings required to achieve intended design profile and appearance and
design performance criteria.
- All flushings and weathering details associated with above.
- Interfaces with associated works.
- Fixings and methods of alignment for the above.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed applications.
• The completion of the design where required and the preparation of the documents are to be
sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant details including joints, fixings, clips,
edge, details, expansion joints, service penetrations, abutments, steps, brackets, and
interfaces to adjacent construction with associated fixings, flushings and seals.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 41 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF CURTAIN WALLING

110A CURTAIN WALLING WITH CLEAR GLASS


• Supporting structure: Insitu concrete building frame .
• Curtain walling system:
- Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A,
Dubai Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4
204 5642 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: FW50+ SG - 250 box section with structural insert mullions and 110
transom and 125mm box section .
- Type: Unitized Curtain Wall, drained and ventilated, pressure equalised, thermally broken .
• Internal framing member:
- Material: Aluminium as clause 710 .
- Finish: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat Class 2 ,
AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25 .
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour/ texture: Exterior RAL 1035 Pearl Biege; Interior RAL 9010 .
- Minimum film thickness: 60 micrometres .
• External cover cap:
- Material: Not applicable - flush glazed .
- Sealant Colour: Black .
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Inner pane: [6mm thick clear glass] .
- Air space: 12mm
- Outer pane: 6mm thick Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
• Glazing system: Structural sealant as clauses 775 and 777, four side bonded .
• Accessories: All flashings and components necessary to complete installation in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations .
• Incorporated components: Integrated doors as shown on architect's drawings .
• Other requirements: Any electrical wiring/cabling to be integrated within the transoms and
mullions. Mullion depths are to be consistent where they can be seen together. Glass
toughening / laminating and thickness to be determined as required for structural and safety
reasons. Water and airtight seal at all perimeter interfaces formed with an EPDM membrane..
• Note that this is a contractor design package.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

210 DESIGN
• Curtain walling and associated features: Complete the detailed design. Submit before
commencement of fabrication.
• Related works: Coordinate in the detailed design.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 42 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

215 DESIGN PROPOSALS


• Alternative proposals: Preliminary design drawings indicate intent. Other reasonable proposals
will be considered.

220 SPECIFICATION
• Compliance standard: The Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) 'Standard for
curtain walling'.
• Reference information: For the duration of the contract, keep a copy of the CWCT 'Standard
for curtain walling' at the design office, workshop and on site.

230 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN STAGE


• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:
- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from the curtain walling to the structure.
- Proposed fixing anchor details relevant to structural design and construction.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with the Main Contract master programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with the Main Contract
master programme.
- A quality plan in compliance with CWCT 'Guide to good practice for facades', Section 6.
- Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or
relaxations.

232 QUALITY PLAN


• Requirement: Submit during detailed design
Content: In accordnace with BS 5750, BS EN ISO 9001 and including the following:
- Name of the Quality Manager
- Quality Assessment Procedures
- Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work.
- Stages at which check lists will be used and samples of the lists.
- List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off-site and on-
site.
- List of product information with latest revisions.
- Subcontractors involved in the work.
- Subcontractor's quality plans.
- Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures.
- Procedure for registering and reporting non-compliance.
- Maintenance procedures and calibration records.
- Certification that completed work complies with specification.
- Checklist Register to ensure all items have been inspected and non-compliances
discharged.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 43 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

235 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT TESTING OR


FABRICATION OF CURTAIN WALLING
• Submit the following curtain walling particulars:
- Detailed drawings to fully describe fabrication and installation.
- Detailed calculations to prove compliance with design/ performance requirements.
- Project specific fabrication, handling and installation method statements.
- Certification for incorporated components manufactured by others confirming their suitability
for proposed locations in the curtain walling.
- Recommendations for spare parts for future repairs or replacements.
• Recommendations for safe dismantling and recycling or disposal of products.

240 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF STRUCTURAL


SEALANT GLAZING
• Submit structural bonding sealant manufacturer's project specific approval for:
- Compatibility and adhesion of products and finishes.
- Full details of structural sealant glazing design.
- Structural sealant dimensions.
- Project specific sealant application method statement.

250 PRODUCT SAMPLES


• General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples of: H11 / 110A, 600 x
600mm mullion and transom intersection fitted with insulated glass units. Sample to be
representative of finishes. Obtain Architect's approval before proceeding with fabrication .

260 SAMPLES OF FIXINGS


• General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fixing anchor,
including casting-in restraints and shims, together with manufacturers' recommended torque
figures.

270 FABRICATION SAMPLES


• General: During detailed design, submit samples of: Typical Cross joint including specified
powder coating and glazing .
- Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.

280 MOCK-UP
• General: Construct during detailed design work in an approved location. Obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding. Retain undisturbed until completion of curtain walling
installation.
• Extent: Storey height bay of front elevation .
• Purpose: To serve as an installation reference panel .

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

305 CWCT 'STANDARD FOR CURTAIN WALLING'


• General: Comply with Section 2 - Performance Criteria unless specified or agreed otherwise.
• Project performance requirements specified in this subsection: Read in conjunction with CWCT
performance criteria.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 44 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

313 INTEGRITY
• Requirement: The curtain walling must resist wind loads, dead loads and design live loads,
and accommodate deflections and movements without damage.
• Design wind pressure: Calculate in accordance with BS 6399-2.
• Permanent imposed loads: To be determined by curtain wall manufacturer - to Architect's &
Structural Engineer's approval .
• Temporary imposed loads: Maintenance, occupant and impact as determined by curtain wall
manufacturer - to Architect & Structural Engineer's approval .

320 DEFLECTION UNDER DEAD LOADS


• Requirement: Framing members parallel to the curtain walling plane must not:
- Reduce glass bite to less than 75% of design dimension.
- Reduce edge clearance to less than 3 mm between members and immediately adjacent
glazing units, panel/ facing units or other fixed units.
- Reduce clearance to less than 2 mm between members and movable components such as
doors and windows.

330 GENERAL MOVEMENT


• Requirement: Curtain walling must accommodate anticipated building movements as follows: R
efer structural design .

340 AIR PERMEABILITY


• Requirement: Permissible air leakage rates of 1.5m³/hr/m² for fixed lights and 2.0 m³/hr/lin.m
for opening lights must not be exceeded when the curtain walling is subjected to a peak
positive test pressure of 600 Pascals .

345 AIR PERMEABILITY EXFILTRATION


• Requirement: The maximum permissible air exfiltration rate through the external envelope of
the whole building must not exceed: 7m3/h/m2 at a test pressure of 50 Pascals. A whole
building test will be carried out on completion and the contractor will be required to make good
any faults identified in their works.

350 WATER PENETRATION


• Requirement: Moisture must not penetrate to internal surfaces or into cavities not designed to
be wetted when the curtain walling is subjected to a peak positive test pressure of 600 Pascals
.

370 THERMAL PROPERTIES


• Requirement: Average thermal transmittance (U-value) of the curtain walling, calculated in
accordance with BRE Report 443: Not to exceed 2.1W/m2K and to comply with local
regulation requirements .

380 SOLAR AND LIGHT CONTROL


• Glass panes/ units in curtain walling: Must have:
- Total solar energy transmission of normal incident solar radiation (maximum): 30% .
- Total light transmission (minimum): 60% .

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 45 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

385 THERMAL STRESS IN GLAZING


• Glass panes/ units: Must have adequate resistance to thermal stress generated by orientation,
shading, solar control and construction.

390 AVOIDANCE OF CONDENSATION


• Requirement: Notional psychrometric conditions under which condensation must not form on
building interior surfaces of framing members or any part of infill panels/ facings are:
- External summer: +45 deg C maximum at 100% RH .
- External winter: +3 deg C minimum at 90% RH .
- Internal summer: +20°C at 40% RH .
- Internal winter: +20°C at 40% RH .

410 SOUND TRANSMITTANCE


• Weighted sound reduction index (Rw) within 100 to 3150 Hz frequency range to BS 5821-3:
- Between internal and external surfaces of curtain walling (minimum): 40 dB .
- Between adjoining floors abutting curtain walling (minimum): 40 dB .
- Between adjoining rooms on same floor abutting curtain walling (minimum): 40 dB .

425 INTERNAL SURFACE SPREAD OF FLAME OF CURTAIN WALLING


• Standard: To BS 476-7.
- Class 0 .

430A FIRE STOPPING


• Locations: At junctions of curtain walling with compartment walls and floors.
• Materials and methods of fixing: To ensure fire resistance not less than that specified for
compartment walls and floors. Apply CP672 sprayable fire-rated flexible joint mastic with 50%
movement to ensure fire resistance not less that that specified for compartment walls and
floors, including insulation and integrity when subject to the test conditions of BS 476:Pt
20/prEN 1366, after age testing to DafStb guidlines. All installations to be in full accordance
with manufacturer's application instructions.
• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal approved

440 DESIGN LIFE OF CURTAIN WALLING


• Duration (minimum): not less than 30 years .
• Maintenance: Submit a schedule for maintenance and for replacement of secondary
components.

450 SAFETY
• Finished surfaces of curtain walling: Accessible internal and external areas must not:
- Have irregularities capable of inflicting personal injury.
- Release irritant or staining substances.

460 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING REQUIREMENTS


• Structural sealant glazing units: Installable, removable and replaceable without site application
of structural bonding sealant.
• Structural sealant glazing design: Must limit design tensile stress of sealants to 138 kPa.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 46 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TESTING

510 COMPARISON (TYPE) TESTING


• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for curtain walling', section 3.
• Test results and reports: Before commencement of curtain walling fabrication and installation,
submit proof of compliance with this specification.

520 PROJECT TESTING (SITE)


• Timing: At an agreed stage during preliminary installation on site, arrange for testing of a
section of curtain walling in accordance with relevant clauses of this specification.
• Test results and reports: Before installation of general areas of curtain walling, submit proof of
compliance with this specification.

525 PULL OUT TEST FOR ANCHORS


• Pull out test for all anchoring system to be conducted by Third Party or by approved
manufacturer.

535 TESTING AUTHORITY


• Requirement: Project testing must be carried out by the curtain walling manufacturer/
contractor and is to be witnessed/ certified by the Local Authority and the Structural Engineer .

540 TEST SPECIMEN


• Overall dimensions: One typical guestroom bay .
• Features: to include opening light as applicable .

545 FIRESTOP TESTING AND CERTIFICATES

• Firestop system: The fire stop system made of: Curtain walling, Edge of slab, Firestop material
and backing material.
• Requirements:
- The Firestop System shall be approved by at least one of the following laboratories:
Warrington, Underwritters, Omega Point
- The firestop products shall be age tested by a third party approved laboratory

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 47 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

555 TEST SEQUENCE - STANDARD LABORTORY TESTS


• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for curtain walling', section 3 and clause 3.8.2, Standard
sequence B, as follows:
• Air permeability/ leakage: To CWCT clause 3.4.
- Peak pressure: As specified in clause 340.
- Test conditions: Calm wind. Standard temperature, pressure and humidity.
- Regions of concentrated air leakage: Identify by smoke.
• Watertightness - static: To CWCT clause 3.5.1.
- Peak pressure: As specified in clause 350.
• Wind resistance - serviceability: To CWCT clause 3.6.
- Peak pressure: Equal to design wind pressure specified in clause 313 .
- Glazed units: All edges to be supported.
• Air permeability/ leakage: Repeat as above.
• Watertightness - static: Repeat as above.
• Watertightness - dynamic: To CWCT clause 3.5.2.
- Peak pressure as specified in clause 350.
• Wind resistance - safety: To CWCT clause 3.6.
- Peak pressure: Equal to 1.5 times design wind pressure specified in clause 313 .
• Dismantle, inspect and record.

635 WATERTIGHTNESS - HOSE SITE TEST


• Requirement: To CWCT 'Standard for curtain walling', clause 3.11.3.
- Joints to be tested: Vertical & Horizontal joints .

650 ADDITIONAL TESTS


• Sound attenuation: To CWCT 'Standard for curtain walling', clause 3.12.2
Thermal performance: To CWCT 'Standard for curtain walling', clause 3.12.3 .

660 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING TESTS


• Product samples: Provide the structural bonding sealant manufacturer with framing profiles,
glass, gaskets, assembly/ weathering sealants and other curtain walling products that are
proposed for contact with structural bonding sealant.
• Testing: By sealant manufacturer to determine compatibility and adhesion of structural bonding
sealant under specified design loadings.
• Modification of product to enable compliance with test criteria: Details must be recorded in the
sealant manufacturer's project specific approval.

PRODUCTS

710 ALUMINIUM ALLOY FRAMING SECTIONS


• Standard: To relevant parts of BS EN 515, BS EN 573, BS EN 755 and BS EN 12020.
• Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.
• Structural members: To BS 8118-2.

712 ALUMINIUM ALLOY SHEET


• Standards: To relevant parts of BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573.
• Alloy, temper and thickness: Suitable for the application and specified finish.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 48 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

715 MILD STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/ REINFORCEMENT


• Standards: To relevant parts of BS 7668, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10113, BS EN 10137, BS EN
10155 and BS EN 10210.
• Thickness: Suitable for the application, and for galvanizing or other protective coating.

717 MILD STEEL SHEET


• Standards: To relevant parts of BS 1449-1, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10111, BS
EN 10131, BS EN 10132, BS EN 10139, BS EN 10140, BS EN 10149, BS EN 10209 and BS
EN 10268.
• Grade and thickness: Suitable for the application, and for galvanizing or other protective
coating.

720 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET


• Standards: To relevant parts of BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10095, BS
EN 10258, BS EN 10259.
• Grade: To BS EN 10088-2, austenitic 1.4301 (304) generally, 1.4401 (316) when used
externally or in severely corrosive environments.
• Thickness: Suitable for the application.

730A MECHANICAL FIXINGS


• Stainless steel: To BS EN ISO 3506-1 and - 2, grade A4 generally and when used in severely
corrosive environments for all components of the anchoring system.
• Mild steel: To BS 4190 and suitable for galvanizing or other protective coating.
• GI Galvanized steel: The coating thickness of the galvanization should be minimum 5 Microns.
• Aluminium brackets, rivets and shear pins: To relevant parts of BS EN 755.

732 ADHESIVES
• General: Not degradable by moisture or water vapour.

735 FIXING ANCHORS


• Dimensions: Not less than recommended by their manufacturers.
• Adjustment capability: Sufficient in three dimensions to accommodate building structure and
curtain walling fabrication/ installation tolerances.

737 GLASS GENERALLY


• Standards: To BS 952 and relevant parts of:
- BS EN 572 for basic soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 1096 for coated glass.
- BS EN 1748 for borosilicate glass.
- BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 12150 for thermally toughened soda lime silicate glass.
- BS EN 13024 for thermally toughened borosilicate glass.
- BS EN ISO 12543 for laminated glass.
• Glass quality: Clean and free from obvious scratches, bubbles, cracks, ripplings, dimples and
other defects.
• Glass edges: Generally undamaged. Shells and chips not more than 2 mm deep and
extending not more than 5 mm across the surface are acceptable if ground out.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 49 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

739 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES ON GLASS


• Measurement of tolerances: Before any thermal toughening/ heat strengthening.
• Pane dimensions less than 1500 mm:
- For 3 to 6 mm thick glass: ± 1.0 mm.
- For 8 to 12 mm thick glass: ± 1.5 mm.
- For 15 mm and thicker glass: ± 2.5 mm.
• Pane dimensions more than 1500 mm:
- For 3 to 6 mm thick glass: ± 1.5 mm.
- For 8 to 12 mm thick glass: ± 2.0 mm.
- For 15 mm and thicker glass: ± 3.0 mm.
• Pane squareness: Not more than 4 mm difference in diagonal measurements.

741 DISTORTIONAL TOLERANCES ON GLASS


• Measurement of tolerances: After any thermal toughening/ heat strengthening.
• Maximum bow: 0.2% of pane dimension.
• Maximum roller wave:
- For 3 to 5 mm thick glass: 0.5 mm.
- For 6 to 10 mm thick glass: 0.3 mm.
- For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.15 mm.
• Maximum edge dip:
- For 3 to 5 mm thick glass: 0.8 mm.
- For 6 to 10 mm thick glass: 0.5 mm.
- For 12 mm and thicker glass: 0.25 mm.

742 HEAT SOAKING OF THERMALLY TOUGHENED GLASS


• Requirement: To minimize the incidence of glass failure due to nickel sulfide inclusions in the
following locations: Any overhead panels .
• Heat soaking regime: To achieve a mean glass temperature of 290 ± 10°C for not less than 3
hours .

745 INSULATING GLASS UNITS


• Standard for double glazed units: To BS 5713 and Kitemark certified.
• Colour of aluminium perimeter spacers: Black .
• Perimeter seals: Resistant to UV light degradation on exposed edges. Compatible with any
structural/ assembly/ weather sealants with which they come into contact.
• Perimeter taping: Not permitted.

747 GLASS EDGE CONDITION FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING


• Bonded, unframed outer edges: Flat ground with a small arris suitable for open jointing or for
weatherseal jointing.

750 INFILL PANELS/ FACINGS


• Tolerances:
- Deviation in size (maximum): ± 1 mm.
- Deviation in flatness from plane per 2 m length (maximum): ± 1 mm.
• Rigidity: Adequate to comply with design/ performance requirements.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 50 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

760 GASKETS
• Material:
- Noncellular rubber to BS 4255-1.
- Cellular rubber to ASTM-C509.
• Continuity: Outer gaskets of single front sealed curtain walling systems and inner gaskets of
drained and ventilated or pressure equalized curtain walling systems must be formed in a
complete frame with sealed joints. Vulcanized rubber gaskets must have factory moulded
corner joints.
• Durability: Resistant to oxidation, ozone and UV degradation.

770 GENERAL SEALANTS


• Selection: In accordance with BS 6213 from:
- Silicone to BS 5889.
- One part polysulfide to BS 5215.
- Two part polysulfide to BS 4254.
- One or two part polyurethane.

771 FIRESTOP SYSTEM


- Material: Sprayable mastic for curtain wall to concrete elements joints where dynamic
movement is expected. Water based formulation containing no halogens, solvents or
asbestos.
- Age tested to 30 years with approvimately 50% movement capability.
- Manufacturer: Hilti or equal approved.
- Product reference: CP672 Firestop Joint Spray
- Colour: Black

775 BONDING SEALANTS FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING


• Material: Silicone, neutral curing, designed and manufactured for bonding of structural sealant
glazing. Compatible with contact and close proximity products and finishes.
• Manufacturer: to be specified by the Curtain Walling Manufacturer .
- Product reference: to be specified by the Curtain Walling Manufacturer .

777 WEATHERSEALING FOR STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING


• Material: Silicone, one or two part, neutral curing. Designed and manufactured for
weathersealing of structural sealant glazing. Compatible with contact and close proximity
products and finishes.
• Manufacturer: to be specified by the Curtain Walling Manufacturer .
- Product reference: to be specified by the Curtain Walling Manufacturer .
• Colour: Black .

780 THERMAL INSULATION


• Material: Rigid Insulation .
- Properties: Durable, rot and vermin proof and not degradable by moisture or water vapour.
• Fixing: Attached to or supported within the curtain walling so as not to bulge, sag, delaminate
or detach during installation or in situ during the life of the curtain walling.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 51 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

785 VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER


• Acceptable materials:
- Aluminium alloy: As clause 712.
- Mild steel: As clause 717, galvanized or protective coated.
- Stainless steel: As clause 720.
- Reinforced membranes: Foil, plastics or rubbers, protected both sides by rigid facings/
linings.
• Location: Warm side of thermal insulation.
• Integrity: Continuous, free from gaps and sealed at joints.

FINISHES

810 PROTECTIVE COATING OF MILD STEEL FRAMING SECTIONS/ REINFORCEMENT


• Treatment: One of the following to all surfaces:
- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
- An appropriate equivalent coating to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944 or BS EN ISO 14713.

820 PROTECTIVE COATING OF MILD STEEL MECHANICAL FIXINGS


• Treatment: One of the following to all surfaces:
- Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
- Sherardized to BS 4921, class 1 coating thickness and passivated.
- Zinc plated to BS EN 12329, coating designation Fe//Zn//C for an iridescent (yellow
passivate) chromate conversion coating or Fe//Zn//D for an opaque (olive green) chromate
conversion coating.

830 POWDER COATING


• Requirement: As section Z31.

FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

910 GENERALLY
• Electrolytic corrosion: Prevent. Submit proposed methods.
• Fixings: Concealed unless indicated on detailed drawings. Where exposed they must match
material and finish of the products fixed.
• Fabrication: Machine cut and drill products in the workshop wherever possible.
• Identification of products: Mark or tag to facilitate identification during assembly, handling,
storage and installation. Do not mark surfaces visible in the completed installation.

912 METALWORK
• Requirement: As section Z11, unless specified otherwise in this section.

915 GLAZING
• Requirement: As section L40, unless specified otherwise in this section.
• Directional patterned/ wired glass: Generally fix parallel to surround and align adjacent panes
where seen together at close quarters.

917 FIXINGS/ ADHESIVES APPLICATION


• Requirement: As section Z20, unless specified otherwise in this section.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 52 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

920 SEALANT APPLICATION


• Requirement: As section Z22, unless specified otherwise in this section.

925 STRUCTURAL SEALANT GLAZING


• Working conditions: Prepare for and apply structural bonding sealant in a favourable workshop
environment.
• Curing: Do not transport units until structural bonding sealant has adequately cured for the
period stated in the project specific approval.

930 ASSEMBLY
• General: Carry out as much assembly as possible in the workshop.
• Joints (other than movement joints): Rigidly secured, reinforced where necessary and fixed
with hairline abutments.
• Displacement of components in assembled units: Submit proposals for reassembly on site.

950 SUITABILITY OF SUPPORTING STRUCTURE


• Pre-installation survey: Submit report if required accuracy or security of curtain walling
installation cannot be achieved.

955A FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION


• Site drilling or cutting into structure: Submit proposals for positions other than shown on
detailed drawings. All proposals shall be justified by calculation designs made by approved
manufacturer.
• Concrete supporting structure:
- Cast-in inserts: Provide detailed locational information. Protect cavities in inserts from entry
of concrete.
- Edge fixing distances: Not less than recommended by fixing anchor manufacturers.
• Corrective fabrication: Minimize. Where necessary, use HIT RE500 Epoxy adhesive
(maanufacturer: Hilti or equal approved) and / or submit proposals with design calculations
based on Rebar Theory according to BS8110.

965 PRELIMINARY CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION


• Requirement: Complete an area for inspection and approval of appearance as follows: One
typical guest room bay .

970 CURTAIN WALLING INSTALLATION


• Securing to fixing anchors: Through holes formed during fabrication only.
• Tightening mechanical fasteners: To manufacturer's recommended torque figures. Do not
overtighten fasteners intended to permit differential movement.
• Protective coverings: Remove only where necessary to facilitate installation and from surfaces
that will be inaccessible on completion.

975 WELDING
• In situ welding: Not permitted. .

980 INTERFACES
• Flashings, closers, etc: Locate and form correctly to provide weathertight junctions with the
curtain walling.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 53 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

982 IRONMONGERY
• Assembly and fixing: Accurately, using fasteners with matching finish supplied by ironmongery
manufacturer.
• Completion: Check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H11 Curtain walling Page 54 of 367


H20
Rigid sheet cladding
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

H20 Rigid sheet cladding

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILTIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent.
Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be responsible for the
completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's Requirements and shall
prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for the efficient execution of
the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance specification is defined the
Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Designer and the
Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install rigid sheet cladding in accordance with this
specification. The scope of works includes but is not limited to the following:
- All Rigid Sheeting Cladding system elements.
- Associated support systems - vapour barriers, jointers, gaskets, flashings, cavity flashings,
trims, acoustic jointing, fire barriers, sealants, etc.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Any secondary support systems or structural systems to achieve intended design profile and
appearance, and design performance criteria.
- Fixings and method of alignment for the cladding system.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details including, joints, fixings, clips, edge/ ceiling details, expansion joints, service
penetrations, abutments, steps, brackets and interfaces to adjacent construction with
associated flushings seals etc

Issue 0: Construction Documents H20 Rigid sheet cladding Page 56 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPE(S) OF SHEET CLADDING

150A CEMENTITIOUS SHEET CLADDING TO SOFFITS AS INDICATED


• Support structure: Steel and concrete structure.
• Board/ Sheet:
- Manufacturer: Knauf LLC, P.O Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 3377 170, Fax: +971
4 3349 659.
- Product reference: AQUAPANEL Cement Board Outdoor.
- Material: Cement Board.
- Thickness: 12.5mm.
- Finish: Paint Finish as per M60 / 110B, colour RAL 1013 to match external render.
- Joints:
Type/ Treatment: Flush Joint.
Width: 3-5mm maximum.
Filler: At board joints and screw heads install AQUAPANEL Joint Filler - White. Insert
100mm wide AQUAPANEL Tape to the joint area.
• Air gap: as required.
• Support system: Corrosion-protected metal furring with reference to DIN EN 13964 of at least
0.6 mm galvanised sheet steel sections.
- Manufacturer: Knauf LLC.
- Fasteners: Knauf Maxi Screws.
Number and location of screws: 25pcs per m2.
• Breather membrane: Not required.
• Cavity barriers: Not required.
• Thermal insulation: Not required.
• Vapour control layer: Not required.
• Accessories: None.
• Other requirements: Provide all fixings and materials etc to complete installation in accordance
with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

210 CONTROL SAMPLES


• General: Complete an area of the cladding and obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
- Location: to be determined on site and approved by the Architect.
- Extent of area: 2 Sheets with flush joint and 10x10 Neg detail to edge.

230 TIMBER BATTENS


• General: Regularized softwood free from decay, insect attack (except ambrosia beetle
damage) and with no knots wider than half the width of the section.
• Preservative treatment: As section Z12 and British Wood Preserving and Damp-proofing
Association Preservative Treatment Commodity Specification C8.
- Type: Organic solvent.
• Moisture content at time of fixing (maximum): 19%.

240 TREATED TIMBER


• Exposed cut and drilled surfaces: Treat with two flood coats of a solution recommended for the
purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H20 Rigid sheet cladding Page 57 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

260 FIXING SHEETS


• General: Secure to supports without producing distortion.
• Fasteners: Evenly spaced in straight lines, in pairs across joints and sufficient distance from
edge of sheet to prevent damage.

270 COVER STRIPS


• General: Form straight runs in single lengths wherever possible.
• Location and method of forming joints: Submit proposals where not detailed.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H20 Rigid sheet cladding Page 58 of 367


H21
Timber weatherboarding
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

H21 Timber weatherboarding

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

111A HORIZONTAL TIMBER WEATHERBOARDING TO SOFFITS AS INDICATED


• Manufacturer: Parklex, Composites Gurea, S.A, Zalain Auzoa 13, 31780 Vera de Bidasoa,
Navarra, Spain. Tel: +34 948 625 045, Fax: +34 948 625 015 or equal and approved by
Architect.
Supplier: OBRAS General Trading LLC, UAE. Tel: +971 4 609 1419, Fax: +971 4 609 1423 or
equal and approved by Architect.
• Product Ref: Parklex Facade Copper.
Panel Size: refer to Architect's drawings.
Panel Thickness: Minimum of 8mm.
- Method of fixing to each support: Hidden fixings with adhesive system. All fixings to be
stainless steel grade 316.
• Other requirements: Contractor to submit a full set of comprehensive shop drawings and a 1 x
1m sample to the Architect for approval.System must be installed as per manufacturer's
literature.

120 CONTROL SAMPLE


• General: Complete an area of boarding in an approved location and obtain approval of
appearance before proceeding.

141 FIXING BATTENS/ COUNTERBATTENS TO FRAMING/ SHEATHING


• Setting out: In straight, vertical lines at centres coincident with vertical framing members.
• Batten/ Counterbatten length (minimum): 1200 mm.
• Installation: Where sheathing is provided, fix through sheathing into framing. Fastener heads to
finish flush with or slightly below batten face.

145 TREATED TIMBER


• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a solution
recommended for the purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.

160 FIXING BOARDING


• General: Fix boards securely to give flat, true surfaces free from undulations, lipping, splits,
hammer marks and protruding fasteners.
• Movement: Allow for movement of boards and fixings to prevent cupping, springing, excessive
opening of joints or other defects.
• Heading joints: Position centrally over supports and at least two board widths apart on any one
support.
• Nail heads: Punch below surfaces that will be seen in the completed work.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H21 Timber weatherboarding Page 60 of 367


H31
Metal profiled/ flat sheet cladding/ covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

H31 Metal profiled/ flat sheet cladding/ covering

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

TYPES OF CLADDING/ COVERING SYSTEM

110A ALUMINIUM PROFILED CLADDING TO ROOF GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: Kalzip Systems Middle East, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 887 3232, Fax: +971 4
887 3977 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Humidity load: To BS EN ISO 13788: Class 1.
• Support structure: Steel trrusses.
- Bearing width (minimum): as recommended by manufacturer.
- Pitch: minimum 1.5 degree.
• Cladding/ covering system type: Standing seam.
• External sheets: Aluminium to BS EN 508-2.
- Material: Aluminium grade EN AW-3004.
- Thickness (nominal): As determined by clause 165.
- Profile: Kalzip 50/333 or equal and approved.
- Cover width: as per manufacturer's recommendations.
- Finish side 1 (outer): Stucco embossed.
Colour: natural mill.
• Accessories: As required to complete installation.
• Primary cladding/ covering sheet fasteners: Self drilling and tapping carbon steel stand off
screws with assembled carbon steel .
- Fastener profile location: Crown.
- Number and location of fasteners: As clause 165.
• End laps size (minimum): as per manufacturer's recommendations.
- Depth of spacer: To be such that insulation is not compressed between external and lining
sheets.
• Breather membrane: Type 3 to BS 4016.
• U-value (plane): Minimum of 0.3 W/m2K .
• Thermal insulation: Flexible rock wool mat to BS EN 13162.
• Vapour control layer: Virgin polyethylene sheet.
• Sound transmittance: To BS 5821-3.
• Sound absorption: To BS EN ISO 354.
• Acoustic insulation: Rock wool slab.
• Lining sheets: as required.
• Additional requirements: Contractor to provide sample of complete system to the architect for
approval prior to installation.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H31 Metal profiled/ flat sheet cladding/ Page 62 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

165 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN OF ROOF COVERING TO WINTERGARDEN


• Design responsibility: Determine depth and thickness of profile and type, sizes and number of
fixings.
• Design standard: In accordance with BS 5427-1.
• Structural and fire requirements:
- Generally: As section B50.
- Modifications: None.
- Design: Complete the design in accordance with the designated code of practice to satisfy
specified performance criteria.
• Functional requirements: As specified in this section.
• Additional requirements: None.
• Design and production information: As Preliminaries section A31.
• Timing of submissions: As Preliminaries section A31.

172 THERMAL PERFORMANCE/ BRIDGING


• Requirement: Complete the thermal design of the cladding/ covering system to avoid
excessive thermal bridging.
- Standard: MCRMA Technical Paper 14, MCRMA Technical Paper 17 with MCRMA
Technical Bulletin 14 and BRE Information Paper 1/06.

175 PRODUCT SAMPLES


• General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples of the following: H31/11
0A.

176 FASTENER SAMPLES


• General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fastener.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

187 DEFLECTION OF METAL CLADDING/ COVERING


• Roof covering: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of span and
due to:
- Dead load: L/500.
- Dead and imposed loads: L/200.
- Dead and wind loads: L/90.
• Wall cladding: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of span and
due to:
- Dead and wind loads: L/120.

198 WATER PENETRATION


• Requirement: Under site exposure conditions, moisture must not penetrate onto internal
surfaces, or into cavities not designed to be wetted.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H31 Metal profiled/ flat sheet cladding/ Page 63 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

200 AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION


• Requirement: Determine interstitial condensation risk of cladding/ covering system using the
method described in BS 5250 Appendix D. If necessary, provide a vapour control layer to
ensure that damage and nuisance from interstitial condensation does not occur.
• Outdoor psychrometric conditions (notional): To BS 6229, table A.1 as follows:
- Temperature: Winter -5°C, summer 18°C.
- Relative humidity: Winter 90%, summer 65%.
- Vapour pressure: Winter 0.36 kPa, summer 1.34 kPa.
• Indoor psychrometric conditions (notional): As follows:
- Temperature: 20°C.
- Relative humidity: 55%.
- Vapour pressure: 0.93 kPa.
• Calculated amount of winter interstitial condensate (maximum): 0.35.
• Winter interstitial condensate:
- Calculated amount (maximum): 0.35 kg/m².
- Calculated annual net retention: Nil.

202 AVOIDANCE OF SURFACE CONDENSATION


• Requirement: Determine surface condensation risk of cladding/ covering system using the
method described in BS EN ISO 13788. If necessary, revise thermal insulation to provide
satisfactory temperature factor (fmin). Ensure that damage and nuisance from surface
condensation does not occur.

FIXING CLADDING/ COVERING

215 PAINTING STRUCTURE


• Sequence: Paint outer surface of supporting structure before fixing cladding/ covering.

219 FASTENERS
• Unspecified fasteners: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering manufacturer.

221 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES


• Unspecified fittings and accessories: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering
manufacturer.

223 PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTIC ACTION


• Isolating tape: Type recommended by cladding/ covering manufacturer.
- Location: To contact surfaces of supports and sheets of dissimilar metals.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H31 Metal profiled/ flat sheet cladding/ Page 64 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

280 BREATHER MEMBRANE


• Standard: To BS 4016, type 3.
• Manufacturer: contractor to submit proposals.
- Product reference: contractor to submit proposals.
• Continuity: No breaks. Minimise joints.
- Penetrations and abutments: Attach to breather membrane with tape. Achieve full bond.
- Laps: Not less than 150 mm, bond with tape. Achieve full bond.
• Tape: As recommended by breather membrane manufacturer.
• Repairs: Lapped patch of breather membrane material secured with continuous band of tape
on edges.
• Junctions at flashings, sills, gutters etc. Overlap and allow free drainage to exterior.

410 FIXING SHEETS GENERALLY


• Cut edges: Clean true lines.
• Penetrations: Openings to minimum size necessary.
- Edge reinforcement: Angles.
• Sheet orientation: Exposed joints of side laps away from prevailing wind unless shown
otherwise on drawings.
• Sheet ends, laps and raking cut edges: Fully supported and with fixings at top of lap.
• Fasteners: Drill holes. Position at regular intervals in straight lines, centred on support
bearings.
- Position of fasteners in oversized drilled holes: Central.
- Fasteners torque: Sufficient to correctly compress washers.
• Debris: Remove dust and other foreign matter before finally fixing sheets.
• Completion: Check fixings to ensure watertightness and that sheets are secure.
• Cut edges: Paint to match face finish.

470 STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT JOINTS


• Type: Cover flashing fixed on one side over gap between sheets.
• Location: Coincident with structural movement joint.
• Width of gap: To match structural movement joint requirements.
• Requirement: Weathertight.

480 FLASHINGS/ TRIMS GENERALLY


• Lap joint treatment:
- Vertical and sloping flashings/ trims: End laps to be same as for adjacent sheeting.
- Horizontal flashings/ trims: End laps to be 150 mm, sealed and where possible arranged
with laps away from prevailing wind.
• Method of fixing: To structure in conjunction with adjacent sheeting. Otherwise to sheeting.
- Fasteners: as recommended by manufacturer.

540 ABUTMENTS
• Junctions with flashings: Weathertight and neatly dressed down.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H31 Metal profiled/ flat sheet cladding/ Page 65 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

550 SEALING LAPS ON EXTERNAL SHEETS


• Sealant tape: Types recommended by sheet manufacturer.
- Position: Below fixing positions in straight unbroken lines, parallel to and slightly back from
edge of sheet.
• Seal quality: Effective, continuous and not overcompressed.
• End laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Immediately below line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): Slightly set back from edge of external sheet.
• Side laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Outside line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): On other side of fasteners.

560 SAFETY SIGNS


• Fixing locations of signs: to be confirmed on site.
• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.
- Product reference: Contractor's choice.
• Material: Aluminium with polyester powder coated base, screen printed graphics.
• Signs description:
- Warning sign to BS ISO 7010, code W001 with supplementary text sign warning, 'DANGER
fragile roof'.
- General mandatory action sign to BS ISO 7010, code M001 with supplementary text sign
instruction, 'Use crawling boards'.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H31 Metal profiled/ flat sheet cladding/ Page 66 of 367
covering
H40
Glass fibre reinforced concrete cladding/ components
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete cladding/ components

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

TYPES OF CLADDING/ COMPONENTS

130A GRC CANOPY TO POOL BAR


• Primary support structure: Concrete Blockwork / In-situ concrete columns.
• GRC components:
- Manufacturer: Contractor to submit proposals for Architect approval.
Product reference: Purpose made roof canopy.
- Construction: Solid moulding.
- Thickness: 125mm - Structural Engineer & Supplier to confirm.
- Finish: Painted as per M60 / 110B.
- Colour: Refer to Architect's Finishes Specification.
- Fire rating: Manufacturer's standard.
• Fixings and fasteners: As clause 225.
• Joints: Sealant filled as clause 785.
• Accessories: As per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Other Requirements: Contractor to submit an in-situ mock-up sample for a part of the canopy
prior to fabrication and installation to the Architect for approval. Contractor to also submit a full
set of comprehensive shop drawings to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

210 COMPLETION OF DESIGN


• GRC: Complete detailed design.
- Compliance: To GRCA 'Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of GRC
products'.
• Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.

225 FIXINGS AND FASTENERS TO COMPONENTS


• Fixing type: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Material: Austenitic stainless steel, grade 1.4401 (316).
- Isolation of fixings: Separate dissimilar metals at risk of bimetallic corrosion with suitable
plastic washers, sleeves etc.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete Page 68 of 367
cladding/ components
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

240 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN


• Submit the following GRC particulars:
- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from GRC to the support structure/ background.
- Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to structural design and construction with
methods of adjustment and tolerances.
- A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances.
- A schedule of mix details with design limit of proportionality (LOP) and modulus of rupture
(MOR) for each mix.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with Main Contract master programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with Main Contract master
programme.

250 PRODUCT CONTROL SAMPLES


• GRC samples: Before general manufacture obtain approval of appearance of fully tested
compliant control samples of: Each cladding panel and component type.
- Finish: Include all variations of face mix and applied surface finish

260 FIXING SAMPLES


• Fixings: At an agreed stage during detailed design, submit samples of: All proposed GRC
fixings.

270 MOCK-UP
• Element: At an agreed stage during detailed design construct in approved location a mock-up
of: Balcony edge capping and soffit assembly.
• Function: As installation reference panel.
• Inspection: Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding. Retain mock-up in undisturbed
condition until completion of GRC installation.

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

330 PANEL ACCURACY


• Finished dimensions of completed panels: Within the permissible deviations given in BS 8297,
table 11.
• Accuracy of moulds: Check overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and flatness of
moulds immediately before each reuse, and of each unit as soon as possible after demoulding.
Make adjustments to moulds as necessary.

TESTING

410 QUALITY CONTROL


• Production control standard: To BS EN 1169.
• Quality control standard: To BS EN ISO 9001 or the GRCA Approved Manufacturers Scheme.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete Page 69 of 367
cladding/ components
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

420 DRY MATERIALS


• Production samples: Take during manufacture.
• Constituent samples: Take roving, sand, cement and facing material samples from each
consignment. Store until test data has been processed.
• Admixtures, curing agents, formwork release agents: Retain manufacturers' certificates.

430 WET MATERIALS


• Production samples: Take before production starts and when mix or equipment settings are
changed.
- Matrix consistency standard: To BS EN 1170-1.
Roving delivery rate: Bag test to GRCA, 'Specification for the manufacture, curing and
testing of GRC products'.
• Test boards: Take from each shift.
- Fibre content standard: To BS EN 1170-2.
• Thickness tests: At regular intervals over area of each production panel.
• Values for compliance:
- Minimum fibre content requirement (for all mixes): As mix design.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete Page 70 of 367
cladding/ components
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

440 CURED MATERIALS


• Test board frequency: Take from each production team at each shift.
- Curing: Under water.
• Test for structural requirements:
- Bending strength standard: To BS EN 1170-5.
- Time: 28 days after production.
• Tests for other requirements:
- Absorption and dry density standard: To BS EN 1170-6.
- Time: To be agreed with Architect.
• Values for compliance: Minimum test board requirements are:
- Vibration cast (grade 5):
Average limit of proportionality (LOP) of 4 consecutive test samples: 6.5 N/mm².
Minimum LOP of individual test sample: 5.0 N/mm².
Average modulus of rupture (MOR) of 4 consecutive test samples: 7.0 N/mm².
Minimum MOR of individual test sample: 5.0 N/mm².
Minimum bulk density (dry): 1800 kg/m³.
Minimum bulk density (wet): 2000 kg/m³.
- Vibration cast (grade 10 or 10P):
Average LOP of 4 consecutive test samples: 7.25 N/mm².
Minimum LOP of individual test sample: 5.0 N/mm².
Average MOR of 4 consecutive test samples: 12.0 N/mm².
Minimum MOR of individual test sample: 8.50 N/mm².
Minimum bulk density (dry): 1800 kg/m³.
Minimum bulk density (wet): 2000 kg/m³.
- Spray-up (grade 18 or 18P):
Average LOP of 4 consecutive test samples: 8.0 N/mm².
Minimum LOP of individual test sample: 6.0 N/mm².
Average MOR of 4 consecutive test samples: 21.0 N/mm².
Minimum MOR of individual test sample: 15.0 N/mm².
Minimum bulk density (dry): 1800 kg/m³.
Minimum bulk density (wet): 2000 kg/m³.
• Other tests: Full scale load tests on minimum two panels taken at random at age 28 days..

450 PRODUCTION NON-COMPLIANCE


• Extent of GRC at risk:
- Failure of single test board: Material produced between previous complying test board and
next complying test board.
- Failure of consecutive groups of four boards: First and fourth test boards together with all
intervening material.
• Action in the event of production non-compliance: Submit proposals.

MATERIALS

510 GLASS FIBRE


• Type: Alkali-resistant continuous filament fibre.
- Compliance: To GRCA 'Specification for alkali resistant glassfibre rovings and chopped
strands for reinforcement of cements and concretes'.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete Page 71 of 367
cladding/ components
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

520 CEMENT
• Standard: To BS EN 197-1, CEM 1 Portland cement.
- Type: Ordinary Portland cement, 52.5N.

530 SAND
• Type: Silica sand to GRCA 'Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of GRC
products'.

540 MIXING WATER


• Standard: To BS EN 1008.

550 ADMIXTURES
• Type: Submit proposals.
• Calcium chloride based admixtures: Do not use if GRC contains cast-in steel.

560 PIGMENTS
• Standard: To BS EN 12878.
- Type: Powder pigments or dispersions.
• General: To have proven successful use in GRC.

580 SURFACE COATING


• Coating: Refer to the Finishes Schedule.
- Manufacturer: Jotun.
Product reference: Refer to Finishes Schedule.
• Application: As recommended by Paint manufacturer.

MANUFACTURE

610 GENERALLY
• Standard: To GRCA 'Specification for manufacture, curing and testing of GRC products' and
BS EN 1169 for factory production.

615 MOULDS
• Material and construction: To accommodate the panel size, complexity and detail incorporated
in the product.

620 CEMENTITIOUS SLURRY


• Mixing: In high shear mixer in accordance with the mixer manufacturer's instructions and
loading sequence.

625 PREMIX GRC


• Mixing: In forced pan mixer, gradually incorporating AR fibres into cementitious slurry.

630 SPRAY-UP GRC


• Spraying: Use proprietary equipment that incorporates simultaneous deposition of known
quantities of matrix and chopped glass fibre.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete Page 72 of 367
cladding/ components
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

640 MIST COAT


• Mix: As backing mix without fibres
• Additives: Acrylic polymer may be included in mist coat slurry.
• Thickness: As thin as practicable.
• Pigments: Not required.

645 FACE MIX


• Consolidation: To a uniform, consistent thickness appropriate for proposed finish and to
prevent backing mix being visible once unit has cured.
• Thickness measurement: Check and record at regular intervals over entire unit.

650 BACKING MIX


• Consolidation: In thin layers of 3-4 mm to achieve the required thickness.
• Thickness measurement: Check and record total thickness of GRC at same locations as facing
mix.

660 CONSOLIDATION
• Method: By trowelling, tamping, rolling or vibration, combinations of these or by vacuum de-
watering.
• Layers: Compact each sprayed layer and final layer before matrix has set.

680 CURING NON-POLYMER GRADE GRC


• Before demoulding: Cover filled mould with polyethylene immediately after spraying and
compacting.
- Temperature: Minimum 5°C, maximum 50°C.
- Duration: Until component has gained sufficient strength for demoulding and transporting.
• After demoulding:
- Temperature: Minimum 16°C, maximum 30°C.
- Duration: Minimum seven days.
- Humidity: 95% relative humidity.

685 CURING POLYMER GRADE GRC


• Dry cure:
- Protection: Polyethylene wrap units.
- Temperature: Above film formation temperature but below 50°C.
- Duration: 12 - 16 hours.
• Shrinkage cracks: Prevent excessive heat and/ or preheated moulds drying out units
prematurely and causing drying shrinkage cracks.

INSTALLATION

710 GENERALLY
• Prefabrication: Complete products and attach fixings in workshop wherever possible.
• Identification: Mark or tag products. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete installation.
• Electrolytic corrosion: Isolate dissimilar metals.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete Page 73 of 367
cladding/ components
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

720 SUITABILITY OF STRUCTURE


• Contractor's survey:
- Programme: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Scope: Geometric survey of supporting structure, checking line, level and fixing points.
- Coordinate: With surveys for adjacent cladding.
- Give notice: If the structure will not allow the required accuracy or security of erection.
• Setting out: Establish erection datum points, lines and levels for a complete elevation at a time
unless otherwise agreed.

730 INSTALLATION OF INTERFACES


• General: Locate flashings, closers etc. correctly with neat overlaps to cladding to form
weatherproof junctions.

740 METALWORK
• Material standards and fabrication: As section Z11.

750 WELDING
• In situ welding: Not permitted.

760 ACCURACY OF ERECTION OF CLADDING


• Elevation joint widths: Within joint lengths, including in-line continuations across transverse
joints, as follows:
- Tolerance: Greatest width not to exceed least width by more than 10% width of joint.
- Variations: Evenly distribute, with no sudden changes.
• Offset in elevation: Between nominally in-line edges across transverse joints not to exceed 10
% width of joint.
• Offset in plan or section: Between flat faces or adjacent panels across joints not to exceed 10
% width of joint.
• Sealant joints width limitations: To recommendations of sealant manufacturer.
• Finished work: Square, regular, true to line and plane with satisfactory fit at junctions.

765 ACCURACY OF ERECTION OF GRC COMPONENTS


• Joint widths: Within joint lengths, including in-line continuations across transverse joints, as
follows:
- Tolerance: Greatest width not to exceed least width by more than 10% width of joint.
- Variations: Evenly distribute, with no sudden changes.
• Offset in elevation: Between component edges across transverse joints not to exceed 10%
width of joint.
• Offset in plan or section: Between flat faces of adjacent units across joints not to exceed 10%
width of joint.
• Sealant joints width limitations: To recommendations of sealant manufacturer.
• Finished work: True to line and plane with satisfactory fit at junctions.

770 FIXING
• Torque figures and shim dimensions: Do not exceed fixing manufacturer's recommendations.
• Grouting: Fill at dowel positions to panel base supports with resilient filler as recommended by
GRC manufacturer.
• Give notice: Before covering up loadbearing fixings.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete Page 74 of 367
cladding/ components
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

785 SEALANT JOINTING


• Sealant: Mastic Sealant.
- Manufacturer: BASF.
Product reference: Masterflex 472.
- Colour: To match finished surface adjacent.
- Application: As section Z22.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H40 Glass fibre reinforced concrete Page 75 of 367
cladding/ components
H43
Metal composite panel cladding/ covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

H43 Metal composite panel cladding/ covering

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILTIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract.
• Where performance specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate
to the satisfaction of the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the
applicable performance specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install Composite Aluminium Panel cladding in accordance
with this specification. The scope of works includes but is not limited to the following:
- All Composite Aluminium Panel cladding system elements.
- Associated support systems - vapour barriers, jointers, gaskets, flashings, cavity flashings,
trims, acoustic jointing, fire barriers, sealants, etc.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Any secondary support systems or structural supports to achieve intended design profile and
appearance, and design performance criteria.
- Fixings and method of alignment for the cladding system.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details including, joints, fixings, clips, edge/ ceiling details, expansion joints, service
penetrations, abutments, steps, brackets and interfaces to adjacent construction with
associated flushings seals etc

Issue 0: Construction Documents H43 Metal composite panel cladding/ Page 77 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

120A METAL COMPOSITE PANEL AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS


• Support structure: Galvanized steel DHS purlins, refer to Architect's detail drawings and
structural engineer drawings.
- Bearing width (minimum): Refer to the drawings.
- Pitch: 2°.
• Panels:
- Manufacturer: Tosolbond Composites, P.O.Box 114747, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 2622213,
Fax:+971 4 2629199 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Tosolbond Aluminium Composite Panel.
- Size: refer to Architect's drawings.
- External facing material: Aluminium grade EN AW-3004.
- Finish: [Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat Class 2 ,
AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25] .
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: TCL 1003 Champayne Gold.
- Internal facing material: Aluminium grade EN AW-3004.
- Finish: Powdercoated as per external face.
- Colour: to match external face.
• Panel thickness: as per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Joint Type: overlapping.
• Fixings: All fixings to be stainless steel.
• Accessories: as required to complete full installation.
• Primary fasteners: Refer to manufacturers printed literature.
- Number and location of fasteners: Refer to manufacturers printed literature for
recommendations.
• Other Requirements: Contractor to submit a full finished sample of a typical panel to the
Architect for approval prior to fabrication and installation.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

170 DESIGN
• Cladding: Complete detailed design of the cladding system and submit before commencement
of fabrication.
- Standard: To BS 5427-1.
• Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.

172 THERMAL PERFORMANCE/ BRIDGING


• Requirement: Complete thermal design of the cladding/ covering system to avoid excessive
thermal bridging.
- Standard: MCRMA Technical Paper 14.

175 PRODUCT SAMPLES


• General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples of the following:
H43 / 120A, 120B, 120C

176 FASTENER SAMPLES


• General: During detailed design, submit labelled samples of each type of fastener.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H43 Metal composite panel cladding/ Page 78 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

185 PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE


• Verification: Before commencing fabrication, submit evidence based on laboratory testing or
computer modelling.
- Verifying authority: UKAS or Local Authority .

187 DEFLECTION OF METAL CLADDING/ COVERING


• Roof covering: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of span and
due to:
- Dead load: L/500 .
- Dead and imposed loads: L/200 .
- Dead and wind loads: L/90 .
• Wall cladding: Maximum permitted deflection under distributed loads as a multiple of span and
due to:
- Dead and wind loads: L/120 .

196 INTEGRITY OF CLADDING/ COVERING


• Requirement: Determine profiles, sizes and thicknesses of panels and sheets, the sizes,
number and spacing of fixings, and incorporation of other accessories and fittings to ensure
cladding/ covering system will resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and
accommodate deflections and thermal movements without damage, in accordance with BS
5427-1.
• Primary fasteners: Not to be subjected to any bending moment.
• Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2, Standard Method and BS 5427-1 appropriate to location,
exposure, height, building shape and size, taking account of existing and known future
adjacent structures.
• Imposed roof load (no access): As determined from
• BS 6399-3 and BS 5427-1.
• Permanent imposed roof loads: none .
• Temporary imposed roof loads: maintenance access equipment and personnel .
• Impact loads: To BS 8200:
- Location and category: Roof canopies and pergola .

198 WATER PENETRATION


• Requirement: Under site exposure conditions, moisture must not penetrate onto internal
surfaces, or into cavities not designed to be wetted.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H43 Metal composite panel cladding/ Page 79 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

200A AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION


• Requirement: Determine interstitial condensation risk of cladding system using the method
described in BS 5250 Appendix D. If necessary, provide a vapour control layer to ensure that
damage and nuisance from interstitial condensation does not occur.
• Outdoor psychrometric conditions (notional) based on Environmental Report of Jeddah carried
out by the Local Consultant as follows:
Winter Summer
- Temperature 18.4°C 40°C
- Relative humidity 3% 100%
- Vapour pressure tbc tbc
• Indoor psychrometric conditions (notional): As follows:
- Temperature: 20ºC .
- Relative humidity: 55% .
- Vapour pressure: 0.935 kPa .
• Calculated amount of winter interstitial condensate (maximum):
• Winter interstital condensate:
- Calculated amount (maximum): 0.35 kg/m².
- Calculated annual net retention: Nil.

202 AVOIDANCE OF SURFACE CONDENSATION


• Requirement: Determine surface condensation risk of cladding system using the method
described in BS EN ISO 13788. If necessary, revise thermal insulation to provide satisfactory
temperature factor (fmin). Ensure that damage and nuisance from surface condensation and
does not occur.

FIXING CLADDING/ COVERING

215 PAINTING STRUCTURE


• Sequence: Paint outer surface of supporting structure before fixing cladding/ covering.

219 FASTENERS
• Unspecified fasteners: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering manufacturer.

221 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES


• Unspecified fittings and accessories: Recommended for the purpose by the cladding/ covering
manufacturer.

223 PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTIC ACTION


• Isolating tape: Type recommended by cladding/ covering manufacturer.
- Location: To contact surfaces of supports and sheets of dissimilar metals.

272 THERMAL INSULATION FOR SEMI COMPOSITE PANEL CLADDING/ COVERING


• Material: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) .
- Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Installation: Continuous. Joints in thermal insulation offset from joints in outer and inner
cladding/ covering sheets.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H43 Metal composite panel cladding/ Page 80 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

410 FIXING PANELS AND SHEETS GENERALLY


• Cut edges: Clean true.
• Penetrations: Openings to minimum size necessary.
- Edge reinforcement: Sections to details .
• Orientation: Exposed joints of side laps away from prevailing wind unless shown otherwise on
drawings.
• Panel and sheet ends, laps and raking cut edges: Fully supported and with fixings at top of lap.
• Fasteners: Drill holes. Position at regular intervals in straight lines, centred on support
bearings.
- Position of fasteners in oversized drilled holes: Central.
- Fasteners torque: Sufficient to correctly compress washers.
• Debris: Remove dust and other foreign matter before finally fixing panel and sheets.
• Completion: Check fixings to ensure watertightness and that panels and sheets are secure.
• Cut edges: Paint to match face finish.

470 STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT JOINTS


• Type: Cover flashing fixed on one side over gap between panels.
• Location: Coincident with structural movement joint.
• Width of gap: To match structural movement joint requirements.
• Requirement: Weathertight.

480 FLASHINGS/ TRIMS GENERALLY


• Lap joint treatment:
- Vertical and sloping flashings/ trims: End laps to be same as for adjacent panels.
- Horizontal flashings/ trims: End laps to be 150 mm, sealed and where possible arranged
with laps away from prevailing wind.
• Method of fixing: To structure in conjunction with adjacent panels. Otherwise to panels.
- Fasteners: As reccommended by manufacturer .

540 ABUTMENTS
• Junctions with flashings: Weathertight and neatly dressed down.

550 SEALING EXTERNAL LAPS


• Sealant tape: Types recommended by panel/ sheet manufacturer.
• Position of tape: Below fixing positions in straight unbroken lines, parallel to and slightly back
from edge of panel/ sheet.
• Seal quality: Effective, continuous and not overcompressed.
• End laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Immediately below line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): Slightly set back from the edge of external sheet.
• Side laps: Sealant tape positions:
- Single line tape: Outside line of fasteners.
- Second line tape (where specified): On other side of fasteners.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H43 Metal composite panel cladding/ Page 81 of 367
covering
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

555 SEALING AT LAPS AND PENETRATIONS IN SEMI-COMPOSITE PANEL LININGS


• Aluminium foil tape: Submit proposals for Architect approval .
- Position: On inside face centrally and parallel to edge of oversheet in straight unbroken
lines.
- Joints in tape: Minimum overlap of 50 mm.
• Seal and adhesion quality: Effective and continuous.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H43 Metal composite panel cladding/ Page 82 of 367
covering
H51
Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ features
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ features

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH TENDER


• Submit the following cladding particulars:
- Typical plan, section and elevation drawings at suitable scales.
- Typical detailed drawings at large scales, including typical junctions ,sizing and fixing
methodology .
- Technical information and certification demonstrating compliance with specification of
proposed incorporated products and finishes, including compliance statement and
identification of source .
- Certification, reports and calculations demonstrating compliance with specification of
proposed cladding.
- Proposals for connections to and support from the support structure/ background.
- Proposals for additional support structure/ background to that shown on preliminary design
drawings.
- Schedule of builder's work, special provisions and special attendance by others.
- Examples of standard documentation from which project quality plan will be prepared.
- Preliminary fabrication and installation method statements and programme.
- Proposals for replacing damaged or failed products.
- Areas of non-compliance with specification.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ Page 84 of 367
features
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF CLADDING

110 CLADDING TO BUILDING FACADE


• Support structure/ background: reinforced concrete wall.
• Stone slabs to BS EN 1469:
- Face dimensions, length (l) x width (b): As shown on Architect's drawings.
- Thickness (d): 20mm.
- Petrographic name to BS EN 12407: TRAVERTINE.
- Denomination to BS EN 12440:
Name (traditional): N/A.
Petrological family: Marble.
Colour: natural biege, to meet architect's control sample.
Origin: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Finish: Honed.
- Supplier: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Quality: Free from vents, cracks, fissures, discolouration, or other defects deleterious to
strength, durability or appearance. Before delivery to site, season thoroughly, dress and
work in accordance with shop drawings prepared by supplier.
• Fixings: For wall features and signage fixings shall be as per clauses 230 and 305. All fixing
proposals to be shown on preliminary design shop drawings and submitted to the Architect for
approval prior to installation.
• Joints:
- Type: Cement:lime:crushed stone mortar filled as clause 590
/ Open refer drawings for details.
- Bond pattern: Stack bonded.
- Width (nominal): 5 mm.
- Profile: slightly concave.
• Cavity width (nominal): N/A.
- Air gap: N/A.
• Cavity barriers: Not required.
• Thermal insulation: Not required.
• Vapour control layer/ Waterproofing: Liquid applied bitumen paint waterproofing to all concrete
surfaces as per J30 / 110A.
• Accessories/ Other requirements: Contractor to submit stone sample for Architect approval
prior to fabrication and installation. Stone to be triple sealed on all sides/faces with clear
sealant as per M60 / 175A.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

210 DESIGN
• Cladding: Complete detailed design.
- Standard: To BS 8298.
• Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ Page 85 of 367
features
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

230 FIXINGS
• Standard: To BS 8298, clauses 2.3 and 3.10.
• Designer/ Supplier: Halfen or equivalent and approved .
• Type: Secretly fixed.
• Material: Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 grade 1,4301 (304 S16) .
• Dimensions: Not less than recommended by manufacturers.
• Extent of adjustment: To accommodate support structure/ background and cladding
fabrication/installation tolerances.
• Method of fixing to backing wall: Stainless steel expanding bolts .

245 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING DETAILED DESIGN


• Submit the following cladding particulars:
- A schedule of detailed drawings and dates for submission for comment.
- A schedule of loads that will be transmitted from cladding to the support structure/
background.
- Proposed fixing details and systems relevant to structural design and construction with
methods of adjustment and tolerances.
- A schedule of fabrication tolerances/ size tolerances.
- A detailed testing programme in compliance with Main Contract master programme.
- A detailed fabrication and installation programme in compliance with Main Contract master
programme.
- Proposals to support outstanding applications for Building Regulation consents or
relaxations.

247 QUALITY PLAN


• Requirement: Submit during detailed design.
• Content: In accordance with BS 5750, BS EN ISO 9001 and including the following:
- Name of the quality manager.
- Quality assessment procedures.
- Inspection procedures to be adopted in checking the work.
- Stages at which check lists will be used and samples of the lists.
- List of work procedures on the correct use of materials or components, both off site and on
site.
- List of product information with latest revisions.
- Subcontractors involved in the work.
- Subcontractors' quality plans.
- Storage, handling, transport and protection procedures.
- Procedure for registering and reporting non compliances.
- Maintenance procedures and calibration records.
- Certification that completed work complies with specification
- Check list register to ensure all items have been inspected and non compliances
discharged.

261A STONE SAMPLES


• General: Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples or arrange for samples
that represent the range of variation in appearance to be inspected. The size of the samples
shall be a minimum of 300 x 300mm.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ Page 86 of 367
features
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

271 FIXING SAMPLES


• General: During detailed design, submit samples of every type. Clearly identify. Include
manufacturer's recommended torque figures.
• Shims: Submit dimensions.

281 CONTROL SAMPLES


• General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
• Size: 1m² .
• Location: to area adjacent to finished works as determined by architect. Agree and carry out
any modification to detail with architect prior to commencement of the remainder of the works .

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

305 INTEGRITY OF CLADDING


• Requirement: Determine sizes and thickness of slabs/ panels, sizes, number and spacing of
fixings, configuration and location of support systems and incorporation of accessories to
ensure the cladding system will resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and
accommodate deflections and thermal movements without damage.
• Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2 Standard Method appropriate to location, exposure,
height, building shape, and size, taking account of existing and known future adjacent
structures.
- Basic wind speed (Vb): 45m/s.
- Altitude factor (Sa): 1.
- Direction factor (Sd): 1.
- Seasonal factor (Ss): 1.
- Probability factor (Sp): 1.
- Terrain and building factor (Sb): 1.
- External and internal size effect factors (Ca): 1.
- External pressure coefficients (Cpe): As determined from BS 6399-2, clauses 2.4 and 2.5.
- Internal pressure coefficients (Cpi): As determined from BS 6399-2, clause 2.6.
- Dominant opening: n/a .
• Hard body impact loads to BS 8200:
- Location and category: category A.
• Soft body impact loads to BS EN 14019:
- Location and classification: class E1.
• Temporary imposed loads: bmu maintenance equipment.

325 PRELIMINARY TEST INFORMATION


• Stone type: As clauses 110 A/B/C.
- Petrographic examination to BS EN 12407.
- Water absorption coefficient by capillarity to BS EN 1925: less than 1.0%.
- Apparent density to BS EN 1936: supplier to provide results in kg/m3.
- Real density to BS EN 1936: supplier to provide results in kg/m3.
- Open porosity to BS EN 1936: to provide.
- Total porosity to BS EN 1936: to provide.
- Flexural strength: to BS EN 13161: 8 MPa.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ Page 87 of 367
features
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

330 ACCURACY OF ERECTION


• Elevation joint widths: Within joint lengths, including in-line continuations across transverse
joints, as follows:
- Tolerance: Greatest width not to exceed least width by more than 10% .
- Variations: Evenly distribute, with no sudden changes.
• Offset in elevation: Between nominally in-line edges across transverse joints not to exceed 10
% width of joint.
• Offset in plan or section: Between flat faces or adjacent panels across joints not to exceed 10
% width of joint.
• Sealant joints width limitations: To recommendations of sealant manufacturer.
• Finished work: Square, regular, true to line and plane with satisfactory fit at junctions.

TESTING

415 TESTING AUTHORITY


• Testing: Carried out by the stone supplier/ contractor and witnessed/ certified by the
architect,testing to be carried out in an accredited laboratory .

425 STONE PRODUCTION TESTS


• Frequency of tests: In accordance with the following schedule:
-block numbers test frequency
1-12 every third block
13-50 every fifth block
51-100 every tenth block .
• Procedures: water absoption coefficient by capillary to BS EN 1925 /Real and apparant density
to BS EN 1936 /flextural strength to BS EN 12372 .
• Results: Submit prior to fabrication.

445 SITE TESTING OF FIXINGS DURING INSTALLATION


• Number and location of test fixings: 10 fixings at the main entrance feature signage.
• Test method: To BS 5080-1 and Construction Fixings Association guidance note 'Procedure
for site testing construction fixings'.

FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

510 GENERALLY
• Location of joints: Joints must occur only at positions indicated on final detailed drawings.
• Electrolytic corrosion: Isolate dissimilar metals.
• Prefabrication: Machine cut and drill products in workshop wherever possible.
• Identification: Mark or tag products. Do not mark surfaces visible in the complete installation.
• Natural bed: Indicate on a non exposed surface of each stone.
• Cleanliness: Keep facework clean. Rubbing to remove marks and stains not permitted.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ Page 88 of 367
features
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

520 CUTTING OF STONE


• Standard: To BS 8298 and BS EN 1469 for production generally, including permissible
deviations.
• Bedding: Appropriate to position.
• Oversize stones: Leave selected stone units oversize, to accommodate deviations within
building structure. Cut to precise dimensions taken on site.
- Selected units: Clearly identify on shop drawings.

530 INSPECTION OF STONE UNITS


• Give notice:
- At appropriate stages of production.
- Before dispatch to site.

540 SUITABILITY OF STRUCTURE


• Contractor's survey:
- Programme: Not less than 2 weeks before commencement of cladding installation.
- Scope: Geometric survey of supporting structure, checking line, level and fixing points.
- Coordinate: With surveys for adjacent cladding.
- Give notice: If the structure will not allow the required accuracy or security of erection.
• Setting out: Establish erection datum points, lines and levels for a complete elevation at a time
unless otherwise agreed.

550 INSTALLATION OF INTERFACES


• General: Locate flashings, closers etc. correctly with neat overlaps to cladding to form
weatherproof junctions.

560 METALWORK
• Material standards and fabrication: As section Z11.

570 WELDING
• In situ welding: Not permitted.

580 FIXING
• Torque figures and shim dimensions: Do not exceed fixing manufacturer's recommendations.
• Grouting: Secure fixings in place in cladding and support structure/ background with
cement:sand, epoxy or modified polymer mix, as recommended by the stone supplier.
• External cladding: Do not use mortar spacer dabs. Keep cavity clear of debris.
• Give notice:
- Before covering up loadbearing fixings.
- Before proceeding with next course on completion of Not required .

Issue 0: Construction Documents H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ Page 89 of 367
features
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

590 CEMENT:LIME:CRUSHED STONE MORTAR JOINTING


• General: As section Z21.
• Mix: Cement:lime:crushed stone 1:2:8-9.
• Crushed stone: Colour matched and passing a 1.4 mm sieve.
- Colour matching: Submit samples.
• Preparation: Wet stones thoroughly.
• Laying: Full mortar bed with joints and voids filled.
- Cavities: Clear of mortar.
• Appearance: Neat and consistent.
• Temporary distance spacers: Remove.

620 SEALANT MOVEMENT/OTHER JOINTS


• Sealant: Silicone .
- Class to BS ISO 11600: F 25lm .
- Colour: to match stone to architects approval .
- Other requirements: None .
- Application: As section Z22.
• Joint widths: Where not specified, to be as small as practicable. Allow for shrinkage, thermal
and other movements in structure and cladding.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H51 Natural stone slab cladding/ lining/ Page 90 of 367
features
H72
Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ flashings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ flashings

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install aluminium strip roofing and flashings in accordance with
this specification. The scope of works includes but is not limited to the following:
- All aluminium flashings (solar shields)
- Associated support systems - fixing brackets , foam closure strips, sealants, etc.
- Any secondary support systems or structural systems to achieve intended design profile and
appearance, and design performance criteria.
- Fixings and method of alignment for the flashing system.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.

TYPES OF ALUMINIUM WORK

410 APRON FLASHINGS IN GENERAL


• Aluminium: Coated sheet/ strip.
- Alloy designation: EN AW-1050A.
- Temper: O.
- Finish: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating - Colour to match cladding to be flashed over
- to be confirmed with Architect prior to installation.
- Thickness: 0.9 mm .
• Dimensions:
- Lengths: Not more than 2 m, with end to end joints lapped not less than 100 mm.
- Upstand: Not less than 100 mm.
- Cover to abutment: Not less than 100 mm.
Bottom edge welted 15 mm.
• Fixing: Aluminium wedges into bed joint, clips to bottom edge, at laps and 450 mm centres.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ Page 92 of 367
flashings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

420 COVER FLASHINGS IN GENERAL


• Aluminium: Coated sheet/ strip.
- Alloy designation: EN AW-1050A.
- Temper: O.
- Finish: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating - colour to match cladding to be flashed over -
to be confirmed with architect prior to installation.
- Thickness: 0.9 mm .
• Dimensions:
- Lengths: Not more than 2 m, with end to end joints lapped not less than 100 mm.
- Cover to roofing upstand: Not less than 75 mm, with bottom edge welted 15 mm.
• Fixing: Submit proposals for Architect approval.

470 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHINGS SOLAR SHIELDS TO MEMBRANE ROOFING


• Aluminium: Natural sheet/ strip.
- Alloy designation: EN AW-1050A.
- Temper: H12.
- Finish: RAL 1013 to match external render.
- Thickness: 0.9 mm .
• Dimensions:
- Lengths: Not more than 2 m.
• Fixing: Welt top and bottom edges and secure with clips at 450 mm centres.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS/ PREPARATORY WORK

510 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY


• Standard: Generally to CP 143-15.
• Fabrication and fixing: To provide a secure, free draining and completely weathertight
installation.
• Operatives: Trained in the application of aluminium coverings/ flashings. Submit records of
experience on request.
• Measuring, marking, cutting and forming: Prior to assembly wherever possible.
• Marking out: With pencil, chalk or crayon. Do not use scribers or other sharp instruments
without approval.
• Folding: With mechanical or manual presses to give straight, regular and tight bends, leaving
panels free from ripples, kinks, buckling and cracks. Use hand tools only for folding details that
cannot be pressed.
• Surface protection: Fully coat surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar with high build
bitumen based paint, after folding.
• Sharp metal edges: Fold under or remove as work proceeds.
• Joints: Do not use sealants to attain waterproofing.
• Finished aluminium work: Fully supported, adequately fixed to resist wind uplift and able to
accommodate thermal movement without distortion or stress.
- Protection: Prevent staining, discolouration and damage by subsequent works.

515 WELDING
• In situ welding: Not permitted.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ Page 93 of 367
flashings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

520 ALUMINIUM STRIP/ SHEET


• Standard: To BS EN 485, BS EN 507, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573.
- Stamped or labelled with alloy designation, temper, finish and thickness.
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.

525 COATED ALUMINIUM STRIP/ SHEET


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approva.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approva.

535 INTEGRITY OF ALUMINIUM


• Requirement: Design coverings/ flashings and methods of attachment to prevent loss of
weathertightness and permanent deformation due to wind pressure or suction.
• Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2.

550A LIGHTNING PROTECTION


• For Lightning Protection refer to Mechanical Engineer's drawings and specifications.
• Electrical continuity: Provide between aluminium strips/ sheets via welting of joints.

555 LAYOUT
• Setting out of longitudinal and cross joints: Submit proposals.

560 CONTROL SAMPLES


• General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding:
• Size: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Location: Contractor to submit a proposed location for Architect approval.

610 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES


• Condition: Dry and free of dust, debris, grease and other deleterious matter.

FIXING

770 WEDGE FIXING INTO JOINTS/ CHASES


• Joint/ chase: Rake out to a depth of not less than 25 mm.
• Aluminium: Fold 25 mm into joint/ chase with a waterstop welted end.
• Fixing: Aluminium wedges at not more than 450 mm centres, at every change of direction, and
with at least two for each piece of aluminium.
• Sealant: As per clause Z22 / 310A or equal and approved by Architect.
Application: As section Z22.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ Page 94 of 367
flashings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

790 SCREW FIXING INTO JOINTS/ CHASES


• Joint/ chase: Rake out to a depth of not less than 25 mm.
• Aluminium: Fold into joint/ chase and up back face.
• Fixing: Into back face with sherardized, zinc plated steel or aluminium screws, washers and
plastics plugs at not more than 450 mm centres, at every change of direction, and with at least
two fixings for each piece of aluminium.
• Sealant: As per clause Z22 / 310A.
Application: As section Z22.

JOINTING

810 FORMING DETAILS


• Folds and welts: Form without thinning or splitting the strip/ sheet.
• Thermal movement: Form details with appropriate allowance for movement, without
impairment of security at full expansion or contraction.

860 DRIP/ STEP JOINTS


• Strip/ sheet from below step: Fold up full height of upstand and fix to top edge.
• Form aluminium underlap/ continuous clip:
- Cover to roof slope: Not less than 100 mm with anticapillary welt at top edge.
- Projection: 25 mm for forming into drip welt.
- Downstand: Not less than 40 mm with welt at bottom edge.
- Fixing: To roof slope at 100 mm centres, avoiding through fixings at longitudinal joint
positions.
• Strip/ sheet from above step: Fold around underlap projection and single welt to form a drip.

880 SINGLE LOCK WELT JOINTS


• Joint allowances: 100 mm overlap and 50 mm underlap.
• Underlap: Welt and secure with clips, two per bay.
• Overlap: Welt around underlap and clips and dress down.
• Forming: Fold welts lightly to allow freedom of movement.

Issue 0: Construction Documents H72 Aluminium strip/ sheet coverings/ Page 95 of 367
flashings
J10
Cementitious mortar tanking/ damp proofing
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

J10 Cementitious mortar tanking/ damp proofing

TO BE READ WITH PRELIMINARIES/ GENERAL CONDITIONS

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install cementitious tanking system to pool, pool terrace, water
features, water tanks, above pool pump room and water tanks, wet areas etc. in accordance
with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Cementitous tanking system, associated materials/ additives etc. required to comply with
manufacturers printed instructions
- Associated jointing materials etc.
- Reinforcement overlays to conduits etc.
- Strip reinforcements.
- All joints, crack induced grooves etc.
- All movement joints.
- All jointing interfaces with associated interface works.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- The preparation of documents sufficient to determine the location and form of all associated
details.
- All proof documentation that the Contractor is an approved manufacturer applicator.

TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

110A WATERPROOF MEMBRANE TO WET AREAS


• Substrate: Structural concrete and concrete blockwork .
• Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971
4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Thoroseal FX100 - Elastomeric Flexible Membrane .
• Coats (excluding dubbing out):
- Number (excluding keying mixes): As per coating manufacturer's recommendations .
- Thickness: As coating manufacturer's recommendations .
• Finish: Ceramic tiling, as section M40 - also refer to Architect's Finishes Schedule .
• Other requirements: Movement joints .

Issue 0: Construction Documents J10 Cementitious mortar tanking/ damp Page 97 of 367
proofing
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

PREPARING SUBSTRATES

410 SUITABLITY OF SUBSTRATES


• Preparation generally: To tanking mortar/ admixture manufacturer's recommendations.
• Stability and soundness: Free from movement, and loose or weak areas that will cause failure
of tanking.
• Key: To achieve firm adhesion of tanking.
• Contamination: Free from previous coatings and contaminants including dirt, dust,
efflorescence, mould, oil, paint and plaster.
• Cracks, porous patches and other defective areas subject to water pressure and liable to admit
water: Control and seal using waterproof mortar recommended by the tanking mortar
manufacturer.
• Holes/ Recesses for fixings (where permitted): Prepared to receive fasteners.
• Openings and chases: Prepared, including sleeves for pipe penetrations and chases to receive
waterproofing compounds/ sealants.

420 PREPARATION OF MORTAR JOINTS AND CAVITIES


• Mortar joints: Rake out to a depth of 12 mm (minimum). Remove debris and flush out with
water. Repoint using waterproof mortar recommended by the tanking mortar manufacturer.
• Blow holes, cavities, cracks, etc: Remove loose material and fill flush using waterproof mortar
recommended by the tanking mortar manufacturer.

430 TANKING INTEGRITY


• Penetrations for fixings, services, etc: Not permitted .

EXECUTION

510 APPLICATION GENERALLY


• Application methods and coating sequence: As recommended by the tanking mortar/
admixture manufacturer to achieve a water resistant structure.

520 JOINTS/ JUNCTIONS AND PENETRATIONS


• Abutments (wall-to-floor, etc.), joints and active cracks: Sealed and watertight.
- Movement joints: Centred over joints in substrate and extended through waterproof coating
and finishes.
- Daywork joints in successive coatings: Staggered and lapped. No joints at angles.
• Penetrations: Watertight.

530 APPEARANCE OF TANKING


• Render/ Screed coatings: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges, cracks and
crazing.
- Accuracy: A true plane, to correct line and level. Walls and reveals plumb and square with
neat arrises
• Thin slurry coatings: Consistent and free from hollows, cracks and crazing. Suitable to receive
specified finish.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J10 Cementitious mortar tanking/ damp Page 98 of 367
proofing
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

540 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF TANKING SCREEDS


• Measurement method: From the underside of a 3 m straightedge (between points of contact)
placed anywhere on surface and using a slip gauge to BS 8204-1 or -2 (or equivalent).
• Deviation of surface: Sudden irregularities not permitted.
- Maximum permissible deviation: 5 mm and 2 mm under 1 m straightedge .

550 CURING AND DRYING


• General: Prevent premature setting, uneven drying and cracking of each coat.
• Curing coatings: Prevent evaporation from surface.
- Curing period (minimum): As recommended by the tanking mortar/ admixture
manufacturer.

560 PROTECTION
• Mechanical damage: Prevent impact and abrasion.
• Application of protective coatings/ linings: After completion of curing.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J10 Cementitious mortar tanking/ damp Page 99 of 367
proofing
J30
Liquid applied tanking/ damp proofing
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

J30 Liquid applied tanking/ damp proofing

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions

TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

110A BITUMEN PAINT WATERPROOFING TO CONCRETE/BLOCKWORK WALLS


• Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971
4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Product Ref: MasterSeal 621.
- Type: A high build bitumen / rubber latex emulsion. Surface applied, flexible, damp and
vapour-proof liquid membrane.
• Substrate: Blockwork & Reinforced Concrete.
• Coats: All areas indicated shall receive 2 to 3 coats as recommended of a high build rubber /
bitumen emulsion. As per Manufacturer's Recommendations
• Application: All surfaces must be free from dirt, dust, loose debris, grease etc. MasterSeal 621
may be applied to damp but not waterlogged surfaces. Hot, very dry or porous surfaces should
be dampened with a priming coat before MasterSeal 621 is applied. Where subsequent coats
are to be applied, the first coat must be dry.
• Below Ground Protection: MasterSeal 621 be be applied to green concrete immediately after
shuttering has been removed. Blind the first coat with clean sharp sand to afford higher dry film
thickness and aid monitoring layer applications.

150A COLD APPLIED DAMP PROOF MEMBRANE


• Location: Kitchens / Pantries / Garbage Rooms / Store Rooms / Cleaners / Water Meter
Rooms / Pump Rooms / Open Shafts / Washrooms / Bathrooms / Powder Rooms / Ablution
Rooms / Goods Unloading Zones.
• Substrate: Insitu concrete.
• Primer: To coating manufacturer's recommendations.
• Coating material: Refer clause 150B.
• Corners: Alkali-resistant rubber tape with felt_ Mapeband.
• Application: Apply 2 coats each of minimum 1mm thickness, to achieve a minimum overall
coating thickness of 2mm, in accordance with manufacturers recommendation to the entire
floor area and 600mm up on walls from FFL and 2000mm up on Shower and Bath tub areas.
• Warranty: 10 years warranty against any form of Moisture penetration from the date of Taking
Over.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J30 Liquid applied tanking/ damp proofing Page 101 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

150B COATING MATERIAL


• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 W: www.mapei.ae
• Product reference: Mapelastic Smart.
• Type/ Standards: EN 1504-9 and minimum requirements claimed by EN1504-2 coating (C)
according to the PI, MC and IR principles
- Properties:
1. Bond strength to concrete to EN1542, of 1.3N/mm2 after 28 days at +200C and 50%
RH
2. Bond strength to concrete to EN1542 after immersion of 0.9N/mm2 after 7 days at
+200C and 50% RH
3. Static crack bridging according to EN1062-7 expressed as minimum width of crack
after 28 days at +200C and 50% RH (mm) class A5 (+200C) (>2.5mm)
4. Dynamic crack bridging according to EN1062-7 expressed as resistance to cracking
cycles: class B4.2 (+200C) no failure of the test piece after 20,000 crack cycles, with
movement of the crack from 0.2 to 0.5mm.
5. Flexibility to DIN 53504 expressed as elongation of 120% at 28 days.
6. Impermeability to water expressed as capillary absorption to EN1062-3 (kg/m2.h0.5):
<0.05
7. Impermeability to water under pressure (no penetration) to EN14891-A.7 of 1.5 bar at 7
days of positive lift
8. Exhibit an extremely low emission value in accordance with the requirements of GEV
EMICODE
• Blinding: As coating manufacturer's recommendations.
• Dampen substrate prior to application of coating to achieve a saturated surface dry condition
SSD.

EXECUTION

205 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATE


• Substrates generally:
- Smooth, even textured, clean, dry and frost free.
- Within tolerances for level and surface regularity.
- Vertical and horizontal surfaces: Correctly prepared and free from irregularities.
• Curing period for concrete substrates (minimum): 7 days.
• Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair integrity of finished tanking/ damp
proofing.
• Preliminary work: Complete including:
- Chases.
- External angles.
- Formation of upstands and kerbs.
- Movement joints.
- Penetrations/ Outlets.

206 ADHESION TESTING


• Tensile bond strength: Test in accordance with BS EN ISO 4624.
• Test results: Submit.

207 PRIMERS
• Application: Uniform, continuous coverage.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J30 Liquid applied tanking/ damp proofing Page 102 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

210 COATING APPLICATION


• Adjacent surfaces exposed to view in finished work: Protect.
• Coatings:
- Apply in dry atmospheric conditions when refer to Manufacturer's instructions.
- Uniform, continuous coverage. Do not allow to pool in hollows.
- Firmly adhered to substrate and free from imperfections.
- Prevent damage to finished coatings.
• Penetrations: Impervious.
• Final covering: Apply as soon as possible after coating has hardened.

220 COLD APPLIED COATINGS


• Thinning: Not permitted unless recommended by manufacturer.
• Successive coats:
- Allow to dry before applying next.
- Apply at right angles to previous.

230 BITUMINOUS COATINGS


• Air and surface temperatures (minimum): 5°C.
• Weather conditions: Do not apply if there is a risk of rain during application and drying unless
effective temporary cover is provided over working area.
- Unavoidable wetting of construction or coatings: Minimize and make good damage.

260 JUNCTIONS WITH DPCS


• DPCs: Clean, all edges fully exposed.
• Application: Fully coat dpc and overlap adjacent surfaces by (minimum) 75 mm.

COMPLETION

310 INSPECTION
• Interim and final inspections: Submit reports.

310A WATER LEAKAGE TEST


• Carry out a water leakage test by ponding water to a minimum depth of 50 mm and retain 24
hours. The leakage test should include the waterproofing termination on the slab of the drains
and the drain pipes.

340 BACKFILLING
• Timing: Carry out as soon as possible after tanking and protection are complete.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J30 Liquid applied tanking/ damp proofing Page 103 of 367
J40
Flexible sheet tanking/ damp proofing
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

J40 Flexible sheet tanking/ damp proofing

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

110 HARDCORE BEDS


• Preparation: Blind with soft sand or pulverized fuel ash.
- Thickness (minimum): 25 mm - Refer to Structural Engineer's Requirements.
• Finish on completion: Smooth, consolidated bed free of sharp projections.

TYPES OF TANKING/ DAMP PROOFING

297A LOOSE LAID PVC DAMP PROOFING MEMBRANE/ TANKING


• Substrate: Hardcore Beds, refer to clause 110.
• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 W: www.mapei.ae, or
equal and approved by Architect & Structural Engineer.
• Product reference: Mapeplan TUS, synthetic membrane based on PVC-P.
• Standard: EN13491 and SIA V 280 standards.
• Number of layers: One, or otherwise as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Width: 2.1m x 20m, whichever is most suitable for its purpose.
• Thickness: as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Colour: top layer: strategic orange warning layer /Bottom layer: black.
• Bonding:
- Horizontal: Loose laid
- Vertical: Heat weld to Mapei PVC fixing desk.
• Joints:
- Laps (minimum): Refer to manufacturers recommendations.
- Sealing: double seam heat weld.
• Horizontal Protection: Geotextile type protective separation sheet under and above membrane
and apply polyethylene slip sheet over Geotextile, as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Vertical Protection:Semi rigid board to withstand pressure loads and provide membrane
protection.
• Geotextile membrane protection board provided by the membrane manufacturer shall be >3
mm thick, compatible with the membrane and placed as shown on the drawings, subject to
Engineer's approval.
• Protection screed: 50mm of factory proportioned, pre-blended, ready to use, with normal
setting and controlled shrinkage, based on special hydraulic binder and graded fillers screed
Mapei Topcem, refer to division M10.
• The system is installed by an approved and certified applicator from waterproofing
manufacturer.
• Accessories: The waterproofing membrane system shall include compartmentalization using
Mapei Idrostop PVC waterstops and re-injectable hoses and meeting the requirements of
EN13491 and SIA V 280 standards.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J40 Flexible sheet tanking/ damp proofing Page 105 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

WORKMANSHIP

310 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY


• Condition of substrate:
- Clean and even textured, free from voids and sharp protrusions.
- Moisture content: Compatible with damp proofing/ tanking.
• Air and surface temperature: Do not apply sheets if below minimum recommended by
membrane manufacturer.
• Condition of membrane at completion:
- Neat, smooth and fully supported, dressed well into abutments and around intrusions.
- Completely impervious and continuous.
- Undamaged. Prevent puncturing during following work.
• Permanent overlying construction: Cover membrane as soon as possible.

320 INSPECTION
• Give notice: Before covering any part of membrane with overlying construction.

350 ANGLES IN BONDED DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING


• Preformed rot proof fillet to internal angles:
- Size (minimum): 50 x 50 mm, splay faced.
- Bedding: Bitumen mastic or bonding compound.
• Reinforcing strip to all angles:
- Material: As damp proofing tanking.
- Width (minimum): 300 mm.
- Timing: Apply before main sheeting.
• Dressing of main sheeting onto adjacent surfaces (minimum): 100 mm.

351 END LAPS IN FULLY BONDED CO-POLYMER TANKING MEMBRANE


• Sealing & reinforcing of end laps: Proofex LM and Proofex Detail Strip
- Size: overseal 75mm onto Proofex Engage
- Timing: apply during main sheeting
- Dressing of main sheeting onto Proofex Detail Strip (minimum): 80mm

360 JUNCTIONS WITH PROJECTING DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS


• Adjoining surfaces: Clean and dry.
• Dpcs/ Cavity trays: Lap and fully bond/ seal with sheeting.
- Laps (minimum): 150 mm.
- Bonding/ Sealing: Double-side tape.

365 JUNCTIONS WITH FLUSH DPCS/ CAVITY TRAYS


• Adjoining surfaces: Clean and dry.
• Dpcs/ Cavity trays:
- Expose edge where concealed.
- Lap and fully bond/ seal sheeting to wall.
- Dressing of sheeting beyond dpc/ cavity tray (minimum): 50 mm.
- Bonding/ Sealing: Bonding compound.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J40 Flexible sheet tanking/ damp proofing Page 106 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

370 PREFORMED COLLARS FOR PIPES, DUCTS, CABLES, ETC.


• Manufacturer: Contractor to submit proposals for Structural Engineer approval.
- Product reference: Contractor to submit proposals for Structural Engineer approval.
• Sealing: Fully bond to penetrations and sheeting using double-sided jointing tape.
• Completed junctions: Impervious.

380 PROTECTION BOARDS FOR DAMP PROOFING/ TANKING


• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 W: www.mapei.ae or
equal and approved by Architect & Structural Engineer.
- Product reference: Mapei Polydren.
• Thickness: 3mm - to be approved by structural engineer.
• Application: Membrane surface clean and free from contaminants.
- Bonding: As per Structural Engineer's Requirements.
- Board joints: As per Structural Engineer's Requirements.
- Board contact with membrane: Secure and continuous.
• Backfilling: Carry out when tanking, loading and protection are complete.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J40 Flexible sheet tanking/ damp proofing Page 107 of 367
J41
Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof coverings

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract.
• Where performance specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate
to the satisfaction of the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the
applicable performance specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install completed membrane roof system in accordance with
this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
- Inverted roofs and waterproofing, roof coverings, system to external balconies. Complete
with all materials, trims, fixtures, jointing etc. to provide a waterproof roof system in
accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• Preparation of documentation to determine the location and form of all relevant details
including, joints, fixings, clips, edge details, expression joints, service penetrations, abutments,
steps, and interface details to adjacent construction with associated flashings seals etc

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 109 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF COVERING

125A COLD DECK ROOF COVERING FOR BALLASTED SYSTEM GENERALLY


• Substrate: Concrete deck.
• Preparation: Rapid hydrating screed _ Topcem refer to M10, laid to falls.
• Roof covering system: Refer to clause J41/150.
• Lower protection layer (loose laid): not required, or otherwise as recommended by the
manufacturer.
• Insulation: Extruded polystryrene board, refer to clause J41/440.
• Separating/ Upper protection layer (loose laid): Polydren PP a needle punched non-woven
polypropylene geotextile as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Surface protection: Stone aggregate, refer to clause J41/460.
• The system is installed by an approved and certified applicator from waterproofing
manufacturer.
• Other requirements: Roof system to meet minimum U Value of 0.35W/m2k, contractor to
submit calculations and certification to the Architect for approval.
• Accessories: As required by manufacturer to complete the system.

125C COLD DECK ROOF COVERING TO LANDSCAPE AREAS AND ROOF GARDENS
GENERALLY
• Substrate: Concrete deck.
• Preparation: Rapid hydrating screed _ Topcem refer to M10, laid to falls.
• Roof covering system: Refer to clause J41/150.
• Lower protection layer (loose laid): Polydren PP a needle punched non-woven
polypropylene geotextile.
• Separating/ Upper protection layer (loose laid): Polythene sheet as recommended by the
manufacturer.
• Surface protection: Hard Landscaping - Refer to Landscape Architect's Specification and
Drawings.
• Accessories: As required by manufacturer to complete the system.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 110 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

150 WATERPROOFING SHEET GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 W: www.mapei.ae, or
equal and approved by Architect.
• Product reference: Mapeplan TM/TB, synthetic membrane in flexible polyolefin TPO/FPO.
• Width: 2.1m x 20m, whichever is most suitable for its purpose.
• Thickness: 1.5mm, or otherwise as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Colour: top layer: high reflectance smart white with SRI 102/ Bottom layer: black.
• TPO Sheet Membrane: Shall be a single layer 'smart white' synthetic waterproofing membrane
in flexible polyolefin TPO/FPO, produced in a single multi-extrusion process, suitable for full
exposure to UV, all weather conditions, resistant to ageing and reflects 50% heat away from
the roof.
• Membrane supplied by the manufacturer must include:
- 30% energy used in the cogeneration process
- 100% recycling of water in the production process
- 100% recycling of production waste
- Shall be capable of being credited with up to 6 ESTIDAMA points
- Single multi extrusion production process, no pre-lamination
- Qualifies for LEED and ESTIDAMA credits
- 70% reduction of packaging materials
- Environmentally friendly production system
- Reduced CO2 emissions

PERFORMANCE

210A ROOF PERFORMANCE


- Water tightness to EN1928 (= 400kPa/72h)
- Reaction to fire to EN13501-1 (Class E)
- Resistance to impact to EN12691 (= 800mm),
- Joint peel resistance to EN12316-2 (= 300 N/50mm)
- Joint shear resistance to EN12317-2 (= 650 N/50mm)
- Vapour diffusion resistance to EN1931 (150.000µ)
- Hail resistance to EN 13583 (=25 m/s)
- Tear resistance to EN12310-2 (>300N)
- Tensile strength to EN12311-2 (= 1100 N/50mm)
- Foldability at low temperature to EN495-5 (-350C)
- UV exposure to EN1297 (Grade 0 pass)
- SRI - Solar Reflectance Index 102 to ASTM E1980

225 AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION: WARM AND INVERTED ROOFS


• Determine: Interstitial condensation risk of roof construction as recommended in BS 5250,
annex D.
• Vapour control layer: If necessary, provide a suitable membrane so that damage and nuisance
from interstitial condensation do not occur.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 111 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

230 INSULATION
• Requirement: Determine type and thickness of insulation and integral or separate overlay to
satisfy the following criteria:
Thermal transmittance of roof (maximum): to meet minimum U Value of 0.35W/m²k .
- Compressive strength of insulation (minimum) at 10% compression: 300 kPa.
- Finished surface: Suitably even, stable and robust to receive the covering.
- Insulation compliance: To relevant British Standard, or Agrément certified.

240 ATTACHMENT OF ROOFING


• Requirement: Determine methods of attachment to resist wind loads. Provide for relative
movement of materials and effects of vapour pressure. Do not reduce performance of vapour
control layer.
• Wind loads: Calculate to BS 6399-2, Standard Method.
- Basic wind speed (Vb): Varies: minimum 45 m/s, exact wind speed criteria to meet Structural
Engineer's approval .
- Altitude factor (Sa): 1 .
- Direction factor (Sd): 1 .
- Seasonal factor (Ss): 1.
- Probability factor (Sp): 1.
- Terrain and building factor (Sb): 1 .
- Size effect factor (Ca): 1.
- External pressure coefficients (Cpe): -1.0 or +0.7 .
- Internal pressure coefficients (Cpi): -0.3 or +0.2 .

PRODUCTS

320 PRIMER
• Type:
- As recommended by bitumen sheet manufacturer, or
- Bitumen cut back with volatile solvent. Characteristics when tested to BS EN 13357:
Volatile solvent content (minimum): 40% by mass.
Viscosity (maximum) (STV at 25°C, 4 mm orifice): 10s.

325A ADHESIVE FOR REAR FACE OF PARAPETS


• Type: As membrane manufacturer's/ supplier's recommendations for conditions and surface.
• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 W: www.mapei.ae or
equal approved.
• Product reference: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

335 ANGLE FILLETS


• Material: Cement:sand screed.
- Size (minimum): 70 x 70 mm, triangular in section.
• Restriction: Fillets under torch-on bitumen sheets to be non-combustible.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 112 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

345 PERIMETER TRIMS


• Type: Aluminium. to BS EN 12020-1, grade EN-AW 6063T4 or EN-AW 6063T6.
• Manufacturer: As recommended by membrane manufacturer, to Architect's approval.
- Product reference: To Architect's approval.
• Colour: Generally: natural finish.
• Size: As shown on drawings.
- Lengths (maximum): 3 m.

375 MINOR MOVEMENT JOINTS IN SUBSTRATES


• Manufacturer: As recommended by membrane manufacturer, to Architect's approval .
- Product reference: To Architect's approval .

380 PROTECTION LAYER


• Type: Needle punched non woven polypropylene geotextile.
• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 W: www.mapei.ae, or
equal and approved.
• Product reference: Polydren PP.
• Grade: As recommended by manufacturer.

383 SEPARATING LAYER


• Type: Polythene sheet as membrane manufacturer's/ supplier's recommendations.
• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 W: www.mapei.ae
• Product reference: As recommended by manufacturer.
• Grade: As recommended by manufacturer.

440 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (XPS) INVERTED ROOF INSULATION


• Standard: To BS EN 13164.
• Manufacturer: Knauf LLC, PO Box 112871, Dubai, UAE, Tel: +971 4 337 7170, Fax: +971 4
3349 659 or equal approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Polyfoam ECO Roofboard Extra, or equal and approved by Architect.
• Grade: 300 kPa.
• Edges: Rebated.
• Thickness: 80 mm.
• Integral topping: Not required.

460 STONE BALLAST


• Type: Washed, lime stone aggregate 20-40mm.
• Supplier: Submit proposals, to Architect's approval.
• Size: Graded 16–32 mm, free from fines and sharps.
• Colour: Natural, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Contractor to provide a sample for
Architect's approval.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 113 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

465 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABS


• Standard: To BS 7263-1, hydraulically pressed.
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals, to Architect's approval.
- Product reference: To Architect's approval.
• Colour/ Finish: Natural with pimple surface.
• Size: 600 x 600 x 50 mm. Min. 110 kg/m³..
• Support system: Proprietary supports at corners. Contractor to provide a sample for Architects
approval.

480 PIPE COLLARS


• Manufacturer: As recommended by roofing contractor, to Architect's approval.
- Product reference: To Architect's approval.
• Size: To suit penetrations - coordinate with MEP design.

EXECUTION GENERALLY

515 ADVERSE WEATHER


• General: Do not lay coverings in high winds, wet or damp conditions or in extremes of
temperature unless effective temporary cover is provided over working area.
• Unfinished areas of roof: Keep dry.

520 INCOMPLETE WORK


• End of working day: Provide temporary seal to prevent water infiltration.
• On resumption of work: Cut away tail of membrane from completed area and remove from
roof.

SUBSTRATES/ VAPOUR CONTROL LAYERS/ WARM ROOF INSULATION

610 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES


• Substrates generally: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, free from frost, contaminants, voids and
protrusions.
• Preliminary work: Complete including:
- Formation of upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and expansion joints.
- Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/ strips.
• Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair roof integrity.

670 LAYING VAPOUR CONTROL LAYER


• Attachment: Securely bond or nail to substrate.
• Side and end laps: 50mm and 75mm respectively. Seal using materials and method as
bitumen membrane manufacturer's recommendations.
• Joints in second layer (if any): Stagger by half a sheet.
• Penetrations: Fully seal using bonding or taping methods recommended by manufacturer.
• Edges of insulation at roof edges, abutments, upstands, kerbs, penetrations and the like:
Enclose, with vapour control layer:
- Dressed up sufficiently, providing 50 mm (minimum) seal when overlapped by the roof
covering; or
- Turned back 150 mm (minimum) over the insulation and sealed down.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 114 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

WATERPROOF COVERINGS/ ACCESSORIES

710 LAYING REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES GENERALLY


• Direction of laying: Unrolled up the slope.
- Where practicable, install so that water drains over and not into laps.
• Side and end laps: 100 mm and 150 mm respectively. Seal using materials and method
recommended by bitumen membrane manufacturer.
• Head and side laps: Offset.
• Intermediate and top layer/ capsheet: Fully bond.
• Successive layers: Apply without delay. Do not trap moisture.
• Strips of bitumen membrane for 'linear' details: Cut from length of roll.
• Completed coverings: Firmly attached, fully sealed, smooth, weatherproof and free draining.

740A TORCH-ON BONDING OF REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANE


• Bond: Loose laid and bonded by torching to upstands and and edges only.

750 LAYING MINERAL FACED REINFORNCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES


• Lap positions and detailing of ridges, eaves, verges, hips, abutments, etc: Submit proposals.
• Setting out: Neat, with carefully formed junctions.
• Lap bonding: Carry out only at prefinished margins or prepared 'black to black' edges.
• Excess bonding compound at laps: Remove whilst still warm.

765 WELDED JOINTING OF SINGLE LAYER REINFORCED BITUMEN MEMBRANES


• Side and end joints:
- Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces for full width of joint.
- Sealing: Hot air welded.

775A SKIRTINGS AND UPSTANDS


• Angle fillets: Cement: sand screed.
• Upstand to receive a surfacing strip of mineralised membrane retained to wall by a direct fixed
aluminium flashing and sealed to the structure with sealant, all as recommended by membrane
manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 115 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

785 FIXING PERIMETER TRIMS


• First/ Intermediate layers bitumen membrane: Lay over roof edge upstand. Project free edge
25 mm from wall or fascia.
• Trim:
- Setting out: 3 mm (minimum) clear from wall or fascia.
- Fasteners: Aluminium.
- Fixing: 30 mm from ends and at 300 mm (maximum) centres.
- Jointing sleeves: Fix one side only.
- Corner pieces: Purpose made.
• Completion:
- Contact surfaces: Prime.
- Joints: Cover with 150 mm long pads of bitumen membrane, bonded to trim.
• Completion of bitumen membrane:
- Top layer/ Capsheet: Butt joint to rear edge of trim.
- Cover strip: Fully bond to trim and top layer/ capsheet of bitumen membrane. Carry over roof
edge upstand and lap 75 mm onto roof.
Cover strip material: As top layer/ capsheet bitumen membrane.

SURFACING

810 LAYING INVERTED ROOF INSULATION


• Condition of substrate: Clean.
• Setting out: Loose lay with staggered joints. Minimize cutting and avoid small cut pieces at
perimeters and penetrations.
- Joints: Butt together.
• Projections, upstands, rainwater outlets, etc: Cut insulation cleanly and fit closely around.
• Completion:
- Boards must be in good condition, well fitting and stable.
- Cover as soon as practicable to prevent wind uplift and flotation.

820 LAYING STONE BALLAST


• Condition of substrate: Clean.
• Gravel guards: Fit to outlets.
• Laying: Spread evenly. Do not pile to excessive heights.
- Depth (minimum): 50 mm.
• Previously laid materials: Protect during laying of ballast.

840 LAYING PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABS


• Condition of substrate: Clean.
• Setting out: Minimize cutting.
• Joints: Open.
- Width: Determined by support system.
- Perimeter upstands: 75 mm wide, filled with ballast or chippings.
• Completion: Slabs must be level and stable.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 116 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

860 LAYING PAVING TILES


• Condition of substrate: Clean.
• Setting out: Minimize cutting.
• Primer: Not required.
• Bonding compound: Fully bed tiles. Avoid excess compound being squeezed over tile face.
• Joints: 3 mm generally, 25 mm between bays.
• Bays:
- Bay area (approximate): 9 m².
- Bay joint locations: Submit proposals.
• Tiles at upstands and perimeters: Stop short of angle fillets by 50 mm .

COMPLETION

910A INSPECTION
• Interim and final roof and balcony inspections: Submit roof covering manufacturer's reports.

920 ELECTRONIC ROOF INTEGRITY TEST


• Testing authority: The roofing contractor.
• Timing of test: Before laying insulation and ballasting.
• Condition of roof prior to testing:
- Complete to a stage where integrity can be tested.
- Surface: Clean.
• Test results and waterproof integrity certificate: Submit on completion of testing.

930A FLOOD TEST


• Condition of roof and balconies before testing: Complete to a stage where integrity of bitumen
membrane covering can be tested.
• Outlets: Externally cover and seal. Protect against damage from water pressure using
temporary kerbs. Do not use plugs to seal outlets.
• Flood levels: Submit proposals. In no case higher than kerbs.
• Flood duration: 24 hours.
• Inspection to detect leaks: Regular.
• Completion of test: Slowly drain roof. Do not overload or flood outlets.
• Test results: Submit.

940A COMPLETION
• Roof and balcony areas: Clean.
• Outlets: Clear.
• Work necessary to provide a weathertight finish: Complete.
• Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.
• Completed membrane: Do not damage. Protect from chemicals, traffic and adjacent or high
level working.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J41 Reinforced bitumen membrane roof Page 117 of 367
coverings
J42
Single layer polymeric sheet roof coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof coverings

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

TYPES OF ROOF COVERING

110A POLYMERIC MEMBRANE ROOF WATERPROOFING TO CANOPIES


• Manufacturer: SIKA U.A.E L.LC,Suite 3201, Level 32 Fortune Tower, Jumeirah Lake Towers,
Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 4 439 8200, Fax: +971 4 439 3606 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Product Ref: Sarnafil TG 76-15 Felt.
- Colour: Beige.
• Substrate: Must be unifrom, smooth and free from any sharp protrusions or burrs, etc. The
supporting layer must be compatible to the membrane and free of oil and grease. Cut open
any blisters in the old waterproofing and repair.
- Preparation: As per manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to architectural drawings for
detailing.
• Roof covering system: Multi-layer, synthetic roof waterproofing sheet based on premium
qulaity flexible polyolefins (FPO), containing stablisers, with inlay of glass non-woven and
polyester fleece backing according to EN 13956.
• Product Standards: EN 13956.
Additional Requirements: Waterproof membrane must be UV-resistant.

PERFORMANCE

202 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN OF ROOF COVERINGS


• Design responsibility: Determine types and locations of fixings and joints in sheets.
• Structural and fire requirements:
- Generally: As section B50.
- Modifications: None.
- Design: Complete the design in accordance with the designated code of practice to satisfy
specified performance criteria.
• Functional requirements:
- Performance: As specified in this section.
• Additional requirements: None.
• Design and production information: As per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Timing of submissions: As Preliminaries section A31.

210 ROOF PERFORMANCE


• Roof covering: Secure, free draining and weathertight.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof Page 119 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

220 AVOIDANCE OF INTERSTITIAL CONDENSATION: WARM AND INVERTED ROOFS


• Determine: Interstitial condensation risk of roof construction as recommended in BS 6229.
• Basic design data:
- Outdoor notional psychrometric conditions, winter:
Temperature: -5°C.
Relative humidity: 90%.
Vapour pressure: 0.36 kPa.
Duration: 60 days.
- Outdoor notional psychrometric conditions, summer:
Temperature: 18°C.
Relative humidity: 65%.
Vapour pressure: 1.34 kPa.
Duration: 60 days.
- Indoor notional psychrometric conditions:
Temperature: 20 °C.
Relative humidity: 55 %.
Vapour pressure: 1.28 kPa.
• Winter interstitial condensate (warm roof):
- Calculated amount (maximum): 0.35 kg/m².
- Calculated annual net retention: Nil.
• Vapour control layer: If necessary, provide a suitable membrane or sealed deck so that
damage and nuisance from interstitial condensation do not occur.

230 INSULATION
• Requirement: Determine type and thickness of insulation and integral or separate overlay to
satisfy the following criteria:
- Thermal transmittance of the roof (maximum): 0.25 W/m²K.
- Compressive strength of insulation (minimum) at 10% compression: 125 kPa.
- Finished surface: Suitably even, stable and robust to receive roof covering.
- Insulation compliance: To a relevant British Standard, or Agrément certified.

PRODUCTS

330 TIMBER TRIMS, ETC


• Quality: Planed. Free from wane, pitch pockets, decay and insect attack except ambrosia
beetle damage.
• Moisture content at time of covering (maximum): 22%.
• Preservative treatment: As recommended for purpose by waterproof covering manufacturer.

360 PLYWOOD OVERLAY TO METAL DECK


• Standard: To BS EN 636, section 8 (plywood for use in humid conditions).
- Quality: Naturally durable timber, free from preservatives.
• Thickness: 18 mm.

370 COVER STRIPS TO JOINTS IN RIGID BOARD SUBSTRATES


• Bitumen membrane: To BS 8747 class S2P3.
• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice.
- Product reference: Contractor's choice.
• Width: 150 mm.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof Page 120 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

EXECUTION GENERALLY

510 ADVERSE WEATHER


• General: Do not lay membrane at temperatures below 5°C or in wet or damp conditions unless
effective temporary cover is provided over working area.
• Unfinished areas of roof: Keep dry and protect edges of laid membrane from wind action.

520 INCOMPLETE WORK


• End of working day: Provide temporary seal to prevent water infiltration.
• On resumption of work: Cut away tail of membrane from completed area and remove from
roof.

530 APPLYING PRIMERS


• Coverage per coat (minimum): as per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Surface coverage: Even and full.
• Coats: Fully bonded. Allow volatiles to dry off thoroughly between coats.

SUBSTRATES/ VAPOUR CONTROL LAYERS/ WARM DECK ROOF INSULATION

610 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES


• Surfaces to be covered: Secure, clean, dry, smooth, free from frost, contaminants, voids and
protrusions.
• Preliminary work: Complete, including
- Grading to correct falls.
- Formation of upstands, kerbs, box gutters, sumps, grooves, chases and expansion joints.
- Fixing of battens, fillets and anchoring plugs/ strips.
• Moisture content and stability of substrate: Must not impair integrity of roof.

620 RENEWING EXISTING COVERINGS


• Areas to be renewed: Submit proposals.
• Substrate: Do not damage.
• Timing: Remove only sufficient coverings as will be renewed and made weathertight on same
day.

660 JOINTS IN RIGID BOARD SUBSTRATES


• Cover strip: Lay centrally over substrate joints before laying vapour control layers or coverings.
Adhere to substrate with bonding compound along edges only.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof Page 121 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

WATERPROOF MEMBRANES/ ACCESSORIES

710 MECHANICAL FIXING OF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE


• Setting out: Perpendicular to the deck direction.
• Laying: Loose, do not wrinkle or stretch.
• Installing fasteners:
- Use manufacturer's/ supplier's recommended methods and equipment.
- Insertion: Correct and consistent.
• Washers/ Pressure plates/ Bars:
- Distance from fixed edge (minimum): 10 mm.
- Fixing: Flush with membrane.
• Sheet overlaps: Extend beyond washers/ pressure plates by minimum 50 mm.
• Surface condition at completion: Fully sealed, smooth, weatherproof and free draining.

720 ADHESIVE BONDING OF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE


• Setting out: Perpendicular to the deck direction.
• Attachment: Fully adhered on a continuous even coating of adhesive.
- Do not wrinkle or stretch.
• Surface condition at completion: Fully sealed, smooth, weatherproof and free draining.

760 PERIMETER OF MEMBRANE


• General: Secure membrane at roof edge conditions, changes of plane, curb flashings,
upstands to roof lights, etc. with mechanical fasteners.

SURFACING

810 LAYING INVERTED ROOF INSULATION


• Condition of substrate: Clean.
• Setting out: Loose lay with staggered joints.
- Cutting: Minimize.
- Small cut pieces: Avoid at perimeters and penetrations.
- Joints: Butt together.
• Projections, upstands, rainwater outlets, etc: Cut insulation cleanly and fit closely around.
• Completion:
- Insulation boards to be in good condition, well fitting and stable.
- Cover to prevent wind uplift and flotation as soon as practicable.

820 LAYING STONE BALLAST


• Condition of substrate: Clean.
• Gravel guards: Fit to outlets.
• Previously laid materials: Protect whilst laying ballast.
• Laying: Spread evenly. Do not pile to excessive heights.
- Depth (minimum): 50 mm.

COMPLETION

910 INSPECTION
• Interim and final roof inspections: Submit reports.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof Page 122 of 367
coverings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

940 COMPLETION
• Roof areas: Clean.
- Outlets: Clear.
• Work necessary to provide a weathertight finish: Complete.
• Storage of materials on finished surface: Not permitted.
• Completed membrane: Do not damage. Protect from traffic and adjacent or high level working.

Issue 0: Construction Documents J42 Single layer polymeric sheet roof Page 123 of 367
coverings
K10
Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ ceilings

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install completed partitioning works in accordance with this
specification. The scope of works includes but is not limited to the following:
- All gypsum partitions.
- Associated support systems insulation, acoustic jointing, fire barriers, sealants etc.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Any secondary support systems to achieve intended design profile and appearance, and
design performance criteria.
- Fixings and method of alignment for the partitioning system.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details including, joints, fixings, clips, edge/ ceiling details, expansion joints, service
penetrations, abutments, steps, brackets and interfaces to adjacent construction with
associated flushings seals etc.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 125 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF DRY LINING

115A METAL STUD PARTITION SYSTEM TO BACK OF HOUSE AREAS AS INDICATED


• Manufacturer: [Knauf LLC or equal and approved by Architect]
- Address: P.O.Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E
- Tel: +971 4 337 7170
• Partition thickness: To suit height - refer to Architect's drawings.
• Partition height: Maximum 3200 mm floor to underside of floor above.
• Head condition: Head Channel fixed to underside of insitu concrete slab.
- Deflection allowance: 15 mm maximum.
• Structural performance:
- Strength grade to BS 5234-2: Medium.
Additional tests: Wall cupboard (Annex L).
- Air pressure and deflection: Not applicable.
- Other requirements: None.
• Fire resistance of complete partition assembly: Refer to Architect's Fire Strategy drawings for
fire ratings. Fire rated partitions to comply with Local Authority requirements.
• Airborne sound insulation
- Laboratory measurement of complete partition assembly:
- Weighted sound reduction index Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: Not less than 58 dB.
• Metal framing: Type recommended by board manufacturer to complete the partition assembly
and achieve specified performance.
• Insulation: As recommended by board manufacturer to meet and acheive specified
performance.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
- Thickness: thickness to suit height of stud span - refer to manufacturers printed
recommendations for stud type.
• Linings: 12.5 mm plasterboard as clause 401.
• Finishing: Jointing as clause 670.
- Primer/ Sealer: Primer to painted areas.
- Accessories: Beads/ stops as recommended by board manufacturer.
• Other requirements: provide all fixings / materials etc to complete installation in accordance
with manufacturers printed instructions..

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 126 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

175A ACOUSTIC WALL LINING SYSTEM AS INDICATED


• Location: as inidicated on Architect's drawings - to walls separating MEP areas with adjacent
occupied rooms.
• Manufacturer: Knauf LLC or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O.Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 337 7170.
- Product reference: Knauf Dry Lining System.
• Wall: Concrete blockwork.
• Overall Dry Lining Zone Thickness: 135mm approx.
• Cavity: 25mm - Dry lining to be installed at least 25mm away from the blockwork wall/partition.
• Studs/Furrings: Knauf CW Studs fixed at head and base only
• Stud/Furring centres: 400mm.
• Linings: 2 x 15mm Knauf Regular Gypsum Board as per K10/401, boards to be staggered for
increased acoustic performance.
• Insulation: 100mm thick mineral wool insulation to be planted between the studs.
• Finishing: Seamless jointing and skim coat of plaster as per K10/670.
- Primer/ Sealer: Primer to painted areas.
- Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board manufacturer.
• Other requirements: Provide all fixings / materials etc to complete installation in accordance
with manufacturers printed instructions. Acoustic caulking should be used to close gaps
between service outlets (electrical, telephone, data, etc.) and drywall. Gaps around
penetrations to be no more than 50mm, and must be filled with heavy density putty such as
Nelson FSP or CLK Sealant.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 127 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

215A GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM GENERALLY


• Location: To back of house areas as indicated on Architect's Reflected Ceiling Plans.
• Structural soffits: In situ concrete.
• Board Manufacturer: Knauf LLC or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O.Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 337 7170.
Product Ref: D112 - Knauf Suspended Ceiling
• Board Thickness: 12.5mm
• Grid type: Single.
• Structural performance: The ceiling system must safely support loads including services
fittings.
- Subject to wind/ upward pressure: To be determined by manufacturer based on location.
- Uniformly distributed loads (maximum): 0.6 kN/m².
- Additional loads/ pressures: Lighting as drawings and schedules. Refer to building services
and drawings and schedules.
- Deflection (maximum) of grid between points of support: Span ÷ 400 mm.
Test standard: To BS EN 13964.
• Fire performance:
- Fire resistance of complete floor and ceiling assembly: Refer to Fire Engineers Fire Report if
applicable.
- Ceiling resistance: Not required.
- Protection to structural beams: To be confirmed by Structural Engineer.
• Airborne sound insulation performance:
- Sound insulation of complete floor and ceiling assembly: Weighted sound reduction index,
Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: Not less than 40 dB.
- Other requirements: None.
• Suspension system: As recommended by the board manufacturer to complete the ceiling
system and achieve specified performance.
• Linings: Refer to clause K10/401.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
• Insulation: Not required.
• Access units: Refer to clause K10/430A.
• Finishing: Seamless jointing as per clause K10/670.
- Primer/ Sealer: Primer to painted areas.
- Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board manufacturer.
• Integrated services fittings: Hangers and housings for linear luminaires.
• Other requirements: Fire stopping around service penetrations as section P12. Additional
timber support backing to blind recesses etc and provide all fixings / materials etc to complete
installation in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 128 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

215B GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM WITH INSULATION


• Location: To back of house areas as indicated on Architect's Reflected Ceiling Plans
• Structural soffits: In situ concrete.
• Board Manufacturer: Knauf LLC or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O.Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 337 7170.
Product Ref: D112 - Knauf Suspended Ceiling
• Board Thickness: 12.5mm
• Grid type: Single.
• Structural performance: The ceiling system must safely support loads including services
fittings.
- Subject to wind/ upward pressure: To be determined by manufacturer based on location.
- Uniformly distributed loads (maximum): 0.6 kN/m².
- Additional loads/ pressures: Lighting as drawings and schedules. Refer to building services
and drawings and schedules.
- Deflection (maximum) of grid between points of support: Span ÷ 400 mm.
Test standard: To BS EN 13964.
• Fire performance:
- Fire resistance of complete floor and ceiling assembly: Refer to Fire Engineers Fire Report if
applicable.
- Ceiling resistance: Not required.
- Protection to structural beams: To be confirmed by Structural Engineer.
• Airborne sound insulation performance:
- Sound insulation of complete floor and ceiling assembly: Weighted sound reduction index,
Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: Not less than 40 dB.
- Other requirements: None.
• Suspension system: As recommended by the board manufacturer to complete the ceiling
system and achieve specified performance.
• Linings: Refer to clause 401.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
• Insulation: loose laid lightweight mineral wool.
- Thickness: 100 mm.
• Access units: Refer to clause K10/430.
• Finishing: Seamless jointing as per clause K10/670.
- Primer/ Sealer: Primer to painted areas.
- Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board manufacturer .
• Integrated services fittings: Hangers and housings for linear luminaires.
• Other requirements: Fire stopping around service penetrations as section P12. Additional
timber support backing to blind recesses etc and provide all fixings / materials etc to complete
installation in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 129 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

215C GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM 2 HOUR FIRE RATED


• Location: To bulkhead within escape route adjacent the generator room on ground floor.
Bulkhead to fully enclose generator chimney exhausts.
• Structural soffits: In situ concrete.
• Board Manufacturer: Knauf LLC or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O.Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 337 7170.
Product Ref: D112 - Knauf Suspended Ceiling
• Board Thickness: 2 x 15mm
• Grid type: Single.
• Structural performance: The ceiling system must safely support loads including services
fittings.
- Subject to wind/ upward pressure: To be determined by manufacturer based on location.
- Uniformly distributed loads (maximum): 0.6 kN/m².
- Additional loads/ pressures: Lighting as drawings and schedules. Refer to building services
and drawings and schedules.
- Deflection (maximum) of grid between points of support: Span ÷ 400 mm.
Test standard: To BS EN 13964.
• Fire performance:
- Fire resistance of complete ceiling assembly: 2 hours.
- Ceiling resistance: To BS 476-22, 120/120 minutes (Integrity/ Insulation).
- Protection to structural beams: To be confirmed by Structural Engineer.
• Airborne sound insulation performance:
- Sound insulation of complete floor and ceiling assembly: Weighted sound reduction index,
Rw (minimum) to BS EN ISO 717-1: Not less than 40 dB.
- Other requirements: None.
• Suspension system: As recommended by the board manufacturer to complete the ceiling
system and achieve specified performance.
• Linings: Fire Resistant Boards as per clause 404.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
• Insulation: Type recommended by board manufacturer to meet specified.
- Thickness: to suit fire rating performance.
• Access units: Not required.
• Finishing: Seamless jointing as per clause K10/670.
- Primer/ Sealer: Primer to painted areas.
- Accessories: Metal beads/ stops recommended by board manufacturer .
• Integrated services fittings: Hangers and housings for linear luminaires.
• Other requirements: Fire stopping around service penetrations as section P12. Additional
timber support backing to blind recesses etc and provide all fixings / materials etc to complete
installation in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

GENERAL/ PREPARATION

305 COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


• Testing/ Assessment: Submit UKAS accredited laboratory reports for the following: Fire
resistance: Partitions (including deflection heads and doorsets) and suspended ceilings
(including access units). and Maximum air pressure and corresponding deflection limits: Dry
Lining type K10/ 175A as specified.
• Materials, components and details: As used in testing/ assessment reports. If discrepancies
arise, give notice.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 130 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

325 PREPARATION OF MASONRY TO RECEIVE WALL LININGS


• General: Suitable to receive lining system. Redundant fixtures and services removed. Cutting,
chasing and making good completed.
• Holes, gaps, service penetrations, perimeter junctions and around openings: Seal.
• Adhesive fixings: Prepare substrate to achieve effective bonding.
- Contaminants: Remove loose material, dirt, grease, oil, paper, etc.
- Absorption: Control by dampening, priming or applying bonding agents as necessary.

335 ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS


• Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to:
- Partition heads running parallel with, but offset from main structural supports.
- Fixtures, fittings and service outlets. Mark framing positions clearly and accurately on linings.
- Board edges and lining perimeters, as recommended by board manufacturer to suit type and
performance of lining.

375 NEW WET LAID BASES


• Dpcs: Install under full width of partitions/ freestanding wall linings.
- Material: Bituminous sheet or plastics.

395 CONTROL SAMPLES


• General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
• Type of dry lining: Walls K10/115A & Ceiling K10/ 225A.
- Location/ Size: Submit proposals.

COMPONENTS

401 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD


• Type: Knauf Regular Gypsum Board (RG). Knauf LLC, PO Box 112871, Dubai, UAE. Tel:
+971 4 3377 170, Fax: +971 4 3349 659.
- Core density (minimum): 650 kg/m³.
• Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

403 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (MOISTURE RESISTANT)


• Type: Knauf Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board (MR). Knauf LLC, PO Box 112871, Dubai,
UAE. Tel: +971 4 3377 170, Fax: +971 4 3349 659.
- Core density (minimum): 710 kg/m³.
- Core: Moisture resistant.
- Paper facings: Moisture resistant.
• Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

404 GYPSUM PLASTERBOARD (IMPROVED FIRE PROTECTION)


• Type: Knauf Fire Resistant Gypsum Board (FR). Knauf LLC, PO Box 112871, Dubai, UAE. Tel:
+971 4 3377 170, Fax: +971 4 3349 659.
- Core density (minimum): 800 kg/m³.
- Core: Including fibres for improved cohesion.
• Exposed surface and edge profiles: Suitable to receive specified finish.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 131 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

430A ACCESS PANELS TO NON-FIRE RATED PARTITIONS & CEILINGS


Manufacturer: Knauf LLC, Address: P.O.Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 337 7170 or
equal and approved by Architect.
• Type: Knauf Alustar Access Panel .
- Sizes: 300 x 300, 400 x 400, 600 x 600, 600 x 1200mm - sizes to be proposed by contractor
and submitted to the Architect for approval for all areas that require an access hatch .
• Frame: Proprietary system - aluminium profile .
• Panel: Plasterboard infill .
• Lock: Tamper proof and operated by castellated key .

430B ACCESS PANELS TO FIRE RATED PARTITIONS & CEILINGS


Manufacturer: Knauf LLC, Address: P.O.Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 337 7170 or
equal and approved by Architect.
• Type: Knauf Fire Rated Series Access Panel .
- Sizes: 300 x 300, 400 x 400, 400 x 600, 500 x 500, 600 x 600mm - sizes to be proposed by
contractor and submitted to the Architect for approval for all areas that require an access
hatch .
• Fire Rating: For partitions and ceilings rated 30 minutes up to 90 minutes - (DN 4102)
• Frame: Proprietary system - aluminium profile .
• Panel: Plasterboard infill .
• Lock: Tamper proof and operated by castellated key .

432 METAL STUDS


• Manufacturer: Knauf LLC, Address: P.O.Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 337 7170 or
equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Knauf CW Studs .

INSTALLATION

435 DRY LININGS GENERALLY


• General: Use fixing, jointing, sealing and finishing materials, components and installation
methods recommended by board manufacturer.
• Cutting plasterboards: Neatly and accurately without damaging core or tearing paper facing.
- Cut edges: Minimize and position at internal angles wherever possible. Mask with bound
edges of adjacent boards at external corners.
• Fixings boards: Securely and firmly to suitably prepared and accurately levelled backgrounds.
• Finishing: Neatly to give flush, smooth, flat surfaces free from bowing and abrupt changes of
level.

445 CEILINGS
• Sequence: Fix boards to ceilings before installing dry lined walls and partitions.
• Orientation of boards: Fix with bound edges at right angles to supports and with ends
staggered in adjacent rows.
• Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 132 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

455 METAL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS/ WALL LININGS


• Setting out: Accurately aligned and plumb.
- Frame/ Stud positions: Equal centres to suit specified linings, maintaining sequence across
openings.
- Additional studs: To support vertical edges of boards.
• Fixing centres at perimeters (maximum): 600 mm.
• Openings: Form accurately.
- Doorsets: Use sleeved or boxed metal studs and/ or suitable timber framing to achieve
strength grade requirements for framing assembly and adequately support weight of door.
- Services penetrations: Allow for associated fire stopping.

485 SUSPENDED CEILING GRIDS


• Setting out: Accurately aligned and level.
- Grid members and hangers: Centres to suit specified linings and imposed loads.
- Additional grid members: Provide bracing and stiffening at upstands, partition heads, access
hatches, etc.
• Fixing: Securely at perimeters, grid joints, top and bottom hanger fixings.

505 INSTALLING MINERAL WOOL INSULATION


• Fitting insulation: Closely butted joints and no gaps. Use fasteners to prevent slumping or
displacement.
• Services:
- Electrical cables overlaid by insulation: Sized accordingly.
- Ceilings: Cut insulation around electrical fittings, etc.

510 SEALING GAPS AND AIR PATHS


• Location of sealant: To perimeter abutments and around openings.
- Pressurized shafts and ducts: At board-to-board and board-to-metal frame junctions.
• Application: To clean, dry and dust free surfaces as a continuous bead with no gaps.
- Gaps greater than 6 mm between floor and underside of plasterboard: After sealing, fill with
jointing compound.

545A CAVITY BARRIERS WITHIN SUSPENDED CEILINGS


• Type: 2 x 12.5mm Knauf Gypsum Board either side of metal studs.
• Ceiling void subdivision: Not more than 20 metres apart in any direction.
• Fixing at perimeters and joints: Secure, stable and continuous with no gaps, to provide a
complete barrier to smoke and flame.
• Service penetrations: Cut and pack to maintain barrier integrity. Sleeve flexible materials.
Adequately support services passing through barrier.
• Ceiling systems for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting performance of ceiling system.

555 FIRE STOPPING AT PERIMETERS OF DRY LINING SYSTEMS


• Material: Tightly packed mineral wool or intumescent mastic/ sealant.
• Application: To perimeter abutments to provide a complete barrier to smoke and flame.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 133 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

560 JOINTS BETWEEN BOARDS


• Tapered edged plasterboards:
- Bound edges: Lightly butted.
- Cut/ unbound edges: 3 mm gap.
• Square edged plasterboards: 3 mm gap.
• Square edged fibre reinforced gypsum boards: 5 mm gap.

565 VERTICAL JOINTS


• Joints: Centre on studs.
- Partitions: Stagger joints on opposite sides of studs.
- Two layer boarding: Stagger joints between layers.

610 FIXING PLASTERBOARD TO TIMBER


• Fixing to timber: Securely at the following centres (maximum):
- Nails: 150 mm.
- Screws to partitions/ wall linings: 300 mm. Reduce to 200 mm at external angles.
- Screws to ceilings: 230 mm.
• Position of nails/ screws from edges of boards (minimum):
- Bound edges: 10 mm.
- Cut/ unbound edges: 13 mm.
• Position of nails/ screws from edges of timber supports (minimum): 6 mm.

FINISHING

650 LEVEL OF DRY LINING ACROSS JOINTS


• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Joint deviations: Measure from faces of adjacent boards using methods and straightedges
(450 mm long with feet/ pads) to BS 8212, clause 3.3.5.
- Tapered edge joints:
Permissible deviation (maximum) across joints when measured with feet resting on boards:
3 mm.
- External angles:
Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 4 mm.
- Internal angles:
Permissible deviation (maximum) for both faces: 5 mm.

670 SEAMLESS JOINTING TO PLASTERBOARDS


• Cut edges of boards: Lightly sand to remove paper burrs.
• Filling and taping: Fill joints, gaps and internal angles with jointing compound and cover with
continuous lengths of paper tape, fully bedded.
• Protection of edges/ corners: Reinforce external angles, stop ends, etc. with specified edge/
angle bead.
• Finishing: Apply jointing compound. Feather out each application beyond previous application
to give a flush, smooth, seamless surface.
• Nail/ screw depressions: Fill with jointing compound to give a flush surface.
• Minor imperfections: Remove by light sanding.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 134 of 367
ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

680 SKIM COAT PLASTER FINISH


• Plaster type As recommended by board manufacturer..
- Thickness: 2-3 mm.
• Joints: Fill and tape except where coincident with metal beads.
• Finish: Tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel marks.

692 RIGID BEADS/STOPS


• Internal: To BS EN 13658-1.
• External: To BS EN 13658-2.

695 INSTALLING BEADS/ STOPS


• Cutting: Neatly using mitres at return angles.
• Fixing: Securely using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and level,
ensuring full contact of wings with substrate.
• Finishing: After joint compounds/ plasters have been applied, remove surplus material while
still wet from surfaces of beads exposed to view.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K10 Plasterboard dry linings/ partitions/ Page 135 of 367
ceilings
K40
Demountable suspended ceilings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

K40 Demountable suspended ceilings

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install completed demountable suspended ceiling works in
accordance with this specification. The scope of works includes but is not limited to the
following:
- All demountable suspended ceilings.
- Associated support systems insulation, electrical bonding, fire barriers, sealants etc, etc.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Any secondary support systems to achieve intended design profile and appearance, and
design performance criteria.
- Fixings and method of alignment for the suspended ceiling system.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details including, joints, fixings, clips, edge/ ceiling details, expansion joints, service
penetrations, abutments, steps, brackets and interfaces to adjacent construction with
associated flushings seals etc.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K40 Demountable suspended ceilings Page 137 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF CEILING SYSTEM

105A SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS 8290.
• Manufacturer: Armstrong Ceilings - or equal and approved by Architect
• Ceiling:
- Type: Armstrong Minaboard 'Fine fissured' ceiling tiles.
- Module: 600 x 600 mm.
- Soffit height above finished floor level: refer to drawings.
• Grid:
- Form: Interlocking.
- Exposure: Armstrong Prelude 24 TL - Exposed 24mm grid system .
• Access: Infill units fully demountable.
• Ancillary system components:
- Suspension system: to K40 / 250.
- Perimeter trim: Required.
• Accessories: Proprietary metal perimeter channel as per manufacturer's literature and
recommendations - refer to Architect's drawings. Cavity fire barriers as required as per P12 /
128.
• Integrated services fittings: Refer to MEP design drawings for numbers, type and location.
• Other requirements: Provide all fixings / materials etc to complete installation in accordance
with manufacturer's printed instructions. Powdercoated finish to grid to be RAL 9010 colour..

105B SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM TO KITCHEN, FOOD PREPARATION, STAFF TOILETS


AND CHANGING ROOMS ETC
• Standard: To BS 8290.
• Manufacturer: Burgess Architectural Products - or equal and approved by Architect
- Brookfield Road, Hinkley, Leicestershire, LE10 2LL, Tel: +44 1455 618 787
• Ceiling:
- Type: Metal Ceiling Tile.
- Finish: Polyester powder coating with proprietary Bicote Antimicrobial coating
- Module: 600 x 600 mm.
- Soffit height above finished floor level: refer to drawings.
• Grid:
- System: Burgess H4 concealed grid stem comprising primary grid section ref GT 112
- Form: Interlocking.
- Exposure: Concealed.
- Centres: 1500mm maximum
• Access: Infill units fully demountable.
• Ancillary system components:
- Suspension system: to K40 / 250.
- Perimeter trim: Required - must be stainless steel.
• Accessories: Proprietary metal perimeter channel as per manufacturer's literature and
recommendations - refer to Architect's drawings. Cavity fire barriers as required as per P12 /
128.
• Integrated services fittings: Refer to MEP and Kitchen Consultant design.
• Other requirements: Provide all fixings / materials etc to complete installation in accordance
with manufacturer's printed instructions.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K40 Demountable suspended ceilings Page 138 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

GENERAL/ PERFORMANCE

205 COMPLIANCE WITH PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


• Testing/ assessment: Submit UKAS accredited laboratory reports for the following: Electrical
continuity and earth bonding .
• Materials, components and details: Use those used in the test and identified in the assessment
reports. If discrepancies arise, give notice.

210 ENVIRONMENT
• Environmental classification to BS 8290-1: Offices: Normal. Kitchen, toilets, locker rooms etc:
Severe .

COMPONENTS

240 SAMPLES
• General: Submit representative samples of the following: Panels for ceiling K40 / 105A and
K40 / 105B .

245 STANDARDS
• Components: To BS 8290-2.
- Aluminium sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 485.
- Aluminium bars, tubes and sections: To relevant parts of BS EN 515, BS EN 573, BS EN
755 and BS EN 12020.

250 SUSPENSION SYSTEM GENERALLY


• Extent of system: Include all hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members, primary channels,
perimeter trims, splines, noggings, clips, bracing, bridging, etc. necessary to complete the
ceiling system and achieve specified performance.
• Top fixings: Flexible wire for office. Rigid angles for kitchen, toilets etc.
• Hangers: Flexible wire for office. Rigid angles for kitchen, toilets etc.
• Grid type: Exposed grid with 15mm wide steel T sections.
- Finish: Powder coating as section Z31, at least 60µ thick.
- Colour: White RAL 9010.

260 PERIMETER TRIMS TO EXPOSED GRID TILES


• Type: 32 x 19 mm steel angle trim, colour and finish to match exposed grid.
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Product reference: n/a.
• Fixings:
- Fasteners: raised head screws.
- Fixing centres (maximum): 300 mm.

EXECUTION

302 CONTROL SAMPLES


• General: Complete areas as part of the finished work in the following locations: location to be
agreed with Architect & Contractor.
• Approval: Obtain before completing areas of similar work.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K40 Demountable suspended ceilings Page 139 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

305 SETTING OUT


• General: Completed ceiling should present, over the whole of its surface exposed to the room
below, a continuous and even surface, jointed (where applicable) at regular intervals.
• Infill and access units, integrated services: Fitted correctly and aligned.
• Edge/ perimeter infill units size (minimum): Half standard width or length.
• Corner infill units size (minimum): Half standard width and length.
• Grid: Position to suit infill unit sizes. Allow for permitted deviations from nominal sizes of infill
unit.
• Infill joints and exposed suspension members: Straight, aligned and parallel to walls, unless
specified otherwise.
• Suitability of construction: Give notice where building elements and features to which the
ceiling systems relate are not square, straight or level.

310 BRACING
• General: Secure, with additional bracing and stiffening to give a stable ceiling system resistant
to design loads and pressures.

315 PROTECTION
• Loading: Do not apply loads for which the suspension system is not designed.
• Ceiling materials: When necessary, remove and replace correctly using special tools and clean
gloves, etc. as appropriate.

320 TOP FIXING


• Building structure: Verify suitability.
• Structural soffit: Concrete slab.
- Suitability to receive specified fixings: Evaluate and confirm.
• Fixing to:
- Concrete: Drill and insert suitable expanding anchors.
- Aerated concrete: Fix through from the top of concrete units and provide a system of
primary support channels.
- Structural steel: Drill, or use suitable proprietary clips/ adaptors.
- Metal roof decking: Fix to sides of liner tray corrugations.
- Timber: Fix to side of joists at least 50 mm from bottom edge. If ceiling system is intended
for fire protection, fix into top third of joists.
- Hollow structural members: Submit fixing proposals.
• Cartridge or powder activated methods: Do not use.

325 INSTALLING HANGERS


• Wire hangers: Straighten and tension before use.
• Installation: Install vertical or near vertical, without bends or kinks. Do not allow hangers to
press against fittings, services, or insulation covering ducts/ pipes.
• Obstructions: Where obstructions prevent vertical installation, either brace diagonal hangers
against lateral movement, or hang ceiling system on an appropriate rigid sub-grid bridging
across obstructions and supported to prevent lateral movement.
• Extra hangers: Provide as necessary to carry additional loads.
• Fixing:
- Wire hangers: Tie securely at top with tight bends to loops to prevent vertical movement.
- Angle/ strap hangers: Do not use rivets for top fixing.
• Spacings: max 1200 crs.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K40 Demountable suspended ceilings Page 140 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

335 INSTALLING PERIMETER TRIMS


• Jointing: Neat and accurate, without lipping or twisting.
- External and internal corners: Mitre joints generally. Overlap joints at internal corners are not
acceptable.
- Intermediate butt joints: Minimize. Use longest available lengths of trim. Align adjacent
lengths.
• Fixing: Fix firmly to perimeter wall, edge battens or other building structure.
- Fasteners: raised head screws.
- Fixing centres: 300mm.

340 EXPOSED GRIDS


• Grid fixings: As clause 250.
• Main runners: Install level. Do not kink or bend hangers.
- Spliced joints: Stagger.
- Wire hangers passing through main runners: Use sharp bends and tightly wrapped loops.
- Angle/ strap hangers: Do not use rivets for bottom fixing.
- Angular displacement of long axis of one runner in relation to next runner in line with it: Not
visually apparent.
• Cross members supported by main runners or other cross members: Install perpendicular to
intersecting runners.
• Cross tees: Flat and coplanar with flanges of main runners after panel insertion.
- Cross tees over 600 mm long, cut and resting on perimeter trim: Provide an additional
hanger.
• Holding down clips: Locate to manufacturer's recommendations.
- Fire protecting/ resisting ceiling systems: Use clip type featured in the fire test/ assessment.

345 CONCEALED GRIDS


• Grid fixings: As clause 250.
• Primary support channels: Install level. Do not kink or bend hangers.
- Wire hangers wrapped around primary channels: Twice wrapped. Loops tightly formed.
- Angle/ Strap hangers: Do not use rivets for bottom fixing.
• Splines: Locate between infill units to assist levelling of adjacent units and to resist air
movement at joints.
• Spring-tee grids: Do not omit primary channel.

355 INSTALLING INFILL UNITS


• General:
- Perimeter infill units: Trimmed, as necessary, to fully fill space between last grid member
and perimeter trim. Prevent subsequent movement.
- Deeply textured infill units: Minimize variations in apparent texture and colour. In particular,
avoid patchiness.
• Concealed grids: Install infill units uniformly, straight and aligned. Avoid dimension creep.
- Infill units around recessed luminaires and similar openings: Prevent movement and
displacement.

365 INSTALLING METAL INFILL UNITS


• Sound absorbing pads: Fit to prevent upward air movement through infill units. Cut or fold pads
in cut perimeter infill units to full unit size. Reseal cut pads.
• Perimeter infill units: Firmly wedge cut units into perimeter trim, or clip down.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K40 Demountable suspended ceilings Page 141 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

385 UPSTANDS AND BULKHEADS


• Vertical ceiling systems: Support and brace to provide alignment and stability.
• High upstands: Provide support at base of upstand.

390 OPENINGS IN CEILING MATERIALS


• General: Neat and accurate. To suit sizes and edge details of fittings. Do not distort ceiling
system.

395 INTEGRATED SERVICES


• General: Position services accurately, support adequately. Align and level in relation to the
ceiling and suspension system. Do not diminish performance of ceiling system.
• Small fittings: Support with rigid backing boards or other suitable means. Do not damage or
distort the ceiling.
- Surface spread of flame rating of additional supporting material: Not less than ceiling
material.
• Services outlets:
- Supported by ceiling system: Provide additional hangers.
- Independently supported: Provide flanges to support ceiling system.

401 CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRES


• Support: by ceiling system.
- Independently supported luminaires: Suspension adjusted to line and level of ceiling.
- Ceiling supported luminaires: Modifications and/ or extra support required: To each luminaire

• Surface mounted luminaires: Units installed so that in event of a fire the designed grid
expansion provision is not affected.
• Modular fluorescent recessed luminaires: Compatible with ceiling module. Extension boxes
must not foul ceiling system.
• Recessed rows of luminaires: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unless
mounted above grid flanges. Retain in position with lateral restraint.
• Fire protecting/ resisting ceiling systems: Luminaires must not diminish protection integrity of
ceiling system.
• Access: Provide access for maintenance of luminaires.

406 TRUNKING
• Recessed trunking: Provide flanges for support of grid and infill units, unless mounted above
grid flanges. Retain in position with lateral restraint.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K40 Demountable suspended ceilings Page 142 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

411 MECHANICAL SERVICES


• Fan coil units:
- Inlet/ Outlet grilles: Trim ceiling grid and infill units to suit.
- Space beneath: Sufficient for ceiling system components.
- Suspension and connections: Permit accurate setting out and levelling of fan coil units.
• Air grilles and diffusers:
- Setting out: Accurate and level.
- Linear air diffusers: Retain in place with lateral restraint. Provide flanges for support of grid
and infill units.
- Grille/ Diffuser ceiling joints: Provide smudge rings and edge seals.
• Smoke detectors and PA speakers:
- Ceiling infill units: Scribe and trim to suit.
- Independent suspension: Not required.
- Flexible connections: Required.
• Sprinkler heads: Carefully set out and level.

415 INSTALLING INSULATION


• Fitting: Fit accurately and firmly with butted joints and no gaps.
• Insulation within individual infill units: Fit closely. Secure to prevent displacement when infill
units are installed or subsequently lifted.
- Dustproof sleeving: Reseal, if cut.
• Width: Lay insulation in the widest practical widths to suit grid member spacings.
• Services: Do not cover electrical cables that have not been sized accordingly. Cut insulation
carefully around electrical fittings, etc. Do not lay insulation over luminaires.
• Sloping and vertical areas of ceiling system: Fasten insulation, to prevent displacement.

425A INSTALLING CAVITY FIRE BARRIERS


• Maximum ceiling void dimension in any direction: The space between the ceiling and floor or
roof above shall be draftstopped for the full depth of the space along the line of support for the
floor or roof structural members and if necessary, at other locations to form areas not to
exceed 93m² for areas between ceiling and floor, and 280m² for any space between the
ceiling and roof .
• Fixing: Secure barrier at head and base using proprietary angle support system.
- General: Fix barriers securely to channels or angles at abutments to building structure.
- At perimeters and joints: Provide permanent stability and continuity with no gaps to form a
complete barrier to smoke and flame.
• Joints: Form to preserve integrity in fire.
• Service penetrations: Cut barriers neatly to accommodate services. Fit fire resistant sleeves
around flexible materials. Fill gaps around services to fire barrier manufacturer's
recommendations to maintain barrier integrity. Adequately support services passing through
the barrier.
• Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Do not impair fire resisting performance of ceiling
system.
• Ceiling systems not intended for fire protection: Do not mechanically interlink barriers with
ceiling system.
• Other Requirements: Main Contractor to produce drawings showing all the proposed fire
barrier locations and submit to the Architect and Fire Consultant for approval prior to
installation.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K40 Demountable suspended ceilings Page 143 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

431 INSTALLING SOUND BARRIERS


• Material: Mineral wool.
• Setting out: Align accurately with partition heads.
• Fixing: Fix tightly at perimeters and joints using methods recommended by barrier
manufacturer, including steel support sections as appropriate. Completed installation to be
stable, secure and continuous, with no gaps.
• Gaps at junctions with partition heads, ceiling system, structural soffit, walls, ducts, pipes, etc:
Seal with mineral wool or suitable sealant.

500 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY AND EARTH BONDING


• Substantial conductive parts of the ceiling system: Electrically continuous and fully earth
bonded to carry prospective earth fault currents.
- Standard: To BS 7671.
• Sequence: Complete earth bonding as soon as possible after completion of each independent
area of suspension system.
• Testing: After completion of the ceiling system, associated services and fittings, test
conductive parts of suspension system required to carry earth fault current, or used as bonding
connections. Give notice before testing.
- Electrical continuity: Measure from various distant conductive points of ceiling system and to
earth bar in distribution board serving the area.
- Test current: Sufficient to indicate probable electrical performance under fault conditions.
- Test instrument: Type providing a pulse of about 25 A at safe voltage for safe duration, and
indicating resistance in ranges 0-2 ohms and 0-20 ohms.
- Resistance of measuring conductors: Deduce from test instrument readings.
- Test readings: Record and certify. Add results to resistance of other parts of the path
forming the earth fault loop.

COMPLETION

505 TOOLS
• Access tools: At Completion, supply one set of the following: Suction pad lifters for ceiling
K40 / 105A and 105B .

520 USER INSTRUCTIONS


• Contents: Include the following:
- Correct methods for removing and replacing infill units and other components.
- Cleaning methods and materials.
- Recommendations for redecoration.
- Ceiling systems intended for fire protection: Limitations placed on subsequent alterations
and maintenance procedures, to ensure that their fire performance is not impaired.
- Maximum number, position and value of point loads that can be applied to ceiling system
after installation.

530 SPARES
• General: At Completion supply the following: 5% of quantity of tiles for each ceiling type.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K40 Demountable suspended ceilings Page 144 of 367
K41
Raised access floors
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

K41 Raised access floors

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install completed raised access floor works in accordance with
this specification. The scope of works includes but is not limited to the following:
- All raised access floor systems.
- Associated support systems, electrical bonding, fire barriers, sealants etc, etc.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Any secondary support systems to achieve intended design profile and appearance, and
design performance criteria.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details including, joints, fixings, edge details, service penetrations, abutments, steps, ramps,
brackets and interfaces to adjacent construction with associated seals etc.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K41 Raised access floors Page 146 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF RAISED ACCESS FLOOR

130A RAISED ACCESS FLOOR [AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS]


• Manufacturer: Kingspan Access Floors Ltd or equal and approved by Architect.
- Web: www.kingspanaccessfloors.co.uk.
- Product reference: FDEB 6.
- Integral floor finish: Factory bonded Heavy duty Anti-Static Vinyl.
Colour: Refer to Architect's Finishes Scedule - submit proposals to Architect for approval.
• Subfloor: [concrete floor slab]
- Preparation: [Apply dustproofing sealer as K41 / 431]
• Floor Panels: [as per clause K41 / 315)
• Accessibility: Full
• Pedestals: Alpha V.
- Fixing: Adhesive and mechanical.
• Pedestal Height: 200mm clear void
• Structural Performance: [refer to clause K41 / 223]
• Fire Performance: [refer to clause K41 / 224]
• Height:
- Finished raised access floor height above sub-floor: Refer to Architect's drawings.
- Under-floor void height: Refer to Architect's drawings.
• Service Cut-outs: [refer to service engineer's drawings for location, number and size for
service boxes and grilles]
• Accessories: Aluminium foil tape to seal edges of cut panels. 20 x 9mm foam tape applied to
the panel edge between wall and floor. Pedestal Earth clamps in accordance with BS 7671-
2001. Bridging sections as required.

GENERAL/ PERFORMANCE

219 GENERAL PERFORMANCE


• Completed installation: Clean and stable. Free from bounce and vibration. No lipping between
floor panels.

223 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE


• Static Loads:
- Uniformly distributed load; 25kN/m2
- Point load; 4kN based on an Ultimate load greater than 12kN which is a class 6 when tested
in-line with BS EN 12825.
- Area of load; 25 x 25mm
- Deflection (maximum); Class A, 2.5mm
- Safety Factor; 3
• Dynamic Loading
- Absorption of hard body impacts; required to BS EN 12825
- Absorption of soft body impacts; required to BS EN 12825
- Rolling loads; not required.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K41 Raised access floors Page 147 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

224 FIRE PERFORMANCE


• Reaction to fire;
- Standard: BS 476-7
- Class 0
• Resistance to fire;
- Standard: BS 476-6
- Period of resistance: Fire propagation index less than 12 and sub index less than 6.

COMPONENTS

310 SAMPLES
• General: Submit representative samples of the following: Floor panels with integral finishes
and 4 pedestals .
- Purpose: Client & Architect's Approval .

315 FLOOR PANELS TO COMPUTER/SERVER ROOM


• Panel size: 600 x 600 mm and 40mm thick excluding finish .
• Tolerances:
- Deviation: To BS EN 12825 Class 1 .
• Life expectancy, excluding coverings (minimum): 25 years .
• Casing material: Steel .
- Casing finish: Galvanized .
• Core material: HD particleboard .
• Perimeter edging material: Pressure-bonded PVC strip .
• Weight of removable panels: 20 kg .
• Floor panel fixing: Drop-in .
• Floor panel location method: Positive.
• Labelling:
- Nonstandard panels: Identify for relocation purposes.
- Service identification labels: Provide self-adhesive labels to identify under-floor services and
their direction. Fix to the visible surface of the floor panel, and under carpet finish if any.

INSTALLATION

421 PREPARATION
• Cleanliness: Clean before installation and keep clean during installation.
• Setting out: Before installation of services, indelibly mark pedestal positions.
• Fixtures: Before installation, complete the fixtures which floor panels are to be cut around or
which supports are to bridge.
• Bridging structures - supplementary supports: none .

Issue 0: Construction Documents K41 Raised access floors Page 148 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

425 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS


• General:
- Dry, well ventilated, not subject to extremes of temperature or humidity, and free from rapid
variations of temperature or humidity.
- RH of air (maximum): 75%.
- RH of surrounding walls (maximum): 75%.
• Subfloors:
- RH (maximum): 75%. Test to BS 8201 using an accurately calibrated hygrometer.
- Temperature (minimum): 5°C.

431 DUSTPROOFING
• Sealer: Colour tinted. Recommended by raised access floor manufacturer. Compatible with
materials used to pack and/ or fix pedestals.
• Sealing:
- Extent: Concrete and masonry surfaces within raised access floor void .
- Preparation: Surfaces to be sealed must be clean, dry and free from dust, grease and other
contaminants.
- Number of coats: Two.
- First coat: Apply before pedestals are erected.
- Second coat: Different tint to first coat. Apply after completion of services and other
associated work.

435 CUT FLOOR PANELS


• Size (minimum): Half full width x half full length.
• Burrs and rough edges: Make smooth.
• Edge sealer: Class 0 spread of flame rated aluminium foil self adhesive tape.
• Edge sealing: Seal exposed cut edges of floor panels that have moisture sensitive or
combustible cores.

445 PERIMETERS
• Expansion gaps:
- Size: 10 mm.
- Location: At abutments.
• Expansion gap filling:
- Filler type: Resilient closed cell.
- Filling: Before fixing skirtings and cover strips.

455 LEVEL CHANGES


• Ramps and steps:
- Performance: Match performance of associated raised access floor.
- Proposals: Submit details.
• Balustrade structural and safety requirements: To BS 6180.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K41 Raised access floors Page 149 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

465 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY AND EARTH BONDING


• Substantial metal parts of raised access floor: Electrically continuous and fully earth bonded.
- Standard: To BS 7671.
- Bonding methods: Submit proposals.
- Earthing methods: Submit proposals.
• Rooms used for electronic data processing equipment: yes .
• Earth bonding connection points: Determine number and location. Provide connectors.
• Total resistance of earth fault loop (maximum): Resistance required to operate earth fault
protection devices to BS 7671.
• Electrical continuity and earth bonding tests:
- General: Test complete raised access floor.
- Points for testing: Randomly selected pedestals, stringers, tops and bottoms of floor panels.

470 INTEGRAL FINISHES ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE TESTS


• General: Test complete raised access floor.
- Location: Back of House I.T Room .
• Testing agent: Qualified electrician.

COMPLETION

510 TOOLS
• Floor panel lifting devices: At completion, supply one set of suitable devices for each type of
raised access floor finish installed. Train designated personnel in their use.
• Pedestal locking: At completion, supply one set of tools for releasing pedestal locking.

515 USER INSTRUCTIONS


• Manual contents: Include the following:
- Correct method for lifting and replacing floor panels and stringers.
- Servicing: Limitations on sequence, number and positions of floor panels and stringers that
can be removed safely at one time.
- Permissible loads: With guidance on use of spreader plates when shifting heavy equipment
and subsequent maintenance.
- Methods for installing cabling and ducts, to prevent damage to supporting structure.
- Cleaning methods: For floor panels and integral finishes.
- Floor panel covering renewal: Method for replacement of integral floor panel coverings.
- Pedestal adjustment and locking.
- Maintenance: Recommended methods and frequency. Minimum maintenance-free life of
raised access floor system. Minimum maintenance-free life of replaceable parts where this
differs from that of the whole system. Minimum period during which replaceable components
will be available.
- Installation instructions, including COSHH Assessment.

520 SPARES
• General: At completion, supply the following: 10 x floor panels for raised access floor type
K41/130A.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K41 Raised access floors Page 150 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

525 CLEANING
• Subfloors: At completion, thoroughly clean accessible areas of subfloors and leave free of dust
and debris.
• Raised access floor: Before delivery of items carried by floor, clean thoroughly.

Issue 0: Construction Documents K41 Raised access floors Page 151 of 367
L10
Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Louvres

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• Design Requirements
The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance
specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance
specification.

20 DESIGN STANDARDS
• The Contractor shall ensure that the Works designed by him comply with all statutory
requirements and in particular, with the requirements of the current Local Authority
Regulations. The Contractor shall ensure that the Works comply with the British Standard
Specifications or shall be interpreted permitting the use of an equivalent alternative
international technical specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 153 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to complete the design and documents for the Window systems and
assemblies. The scope of works includes but is not limited to the following:
- Internal window systems and associated fixings.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Secondary steel required to achieve intended design profile and appearance and design
performance criteria.
- All flushings and weathering details associated with above.
- Interfaces with associated works.
- Fixings and methods of alignment for the above.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed applications.
• The completion of the design where required and the preparation of the documents are to be
sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant details including joints, fixings, clips,
edge, details, expansion joints, service penetrations, abutments, steps, brackets, and
interfaces to adjacent construction with associated fixings, flushings and seals.

GENERAL

110 EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE


• Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that all incorporated components
comply with specified performance requirements.

111 INTEGRITY
• The specified louvre systems within this section must resist winds loads, dead loads and
accommodate deflections and movements without damage. Design & Wind Pressure:
Calculate in accordnace with BS6399-2 or an equal international standard.

120 SITE DIMENSIONS


• Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shop
drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
• Designated items:
All windows.

140 CONTROL SAMPLES


• Procedure:
- Finalise component details.
- Fabricate one of each of the following designated items as part of the quantity required for
the project.
- Obtain approval of appearance and quality before proceeding with manufacturer of the
remaining quantity.
• Designated items:
All window types.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 154 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

PRODUCTS

330A ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS WITH CLEAR GLASS


• Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A, Dubai
Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4 204 5642 or
equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: AWS 50.
• Frame Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to
Qualicoat Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Inner pane: [6mm thick clear glass] .
- Air space: 12mm
- Outer pane: 6mm thick Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
• Ironmongery/ Accessories: as per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Fixing: As per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and gaskets, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Acoustic Performance: Contractor to provide a written certificate stating that the aluminium
profiles achieve a minimum acoustic rating of 27 decibels.
• Other requirements: Glazing supplier / specialist to confirm glass thickness is suitable for
relevant maintenance, wind and impact loads. Calculations to be submitted to Architect for
approval prior to fabrication.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 155 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

330B ALUMINIUM FRAMED WINDOWS WITH BACK PAINTED GLASS


• Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A, Dubai
Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4 204 5642 or
equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: AWS 50.
• Frame Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to
Qualicoat Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Inner pane: [6mm thick clear glass] .
- Air space: 12mm
- Outer pane: 6mm thick Cool Lite Pure SKN 144..
• Insulation: Insulation to be inserted between inner pane of glass and powdercoated aluminium
sheet to back of window panel - as per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Backing Sheet: Powdercoated aluminium sheet to be placed at the back of the window panel -
colour to match internal window frames.
• Ironmongery/ Accessories: as per manufacturer's standard range and recommendations.
• Fixing: As per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and gaskets, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Acoustic Performance: Contractor to provide a written certificate stating that the aluminium
profiles achieve a minimum acoustic rating of 27 decibels.
• Other requirements: Glazing supplier / specialist to confirm glass thickness is suitable for
relevant maintenance, wind and impact loads. Calculations to be submitted to Architect for
approval prior to fabrication.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 156 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

460A ALUMINIUM FRAMED SKYLIGHT WITH CLEAR GLASS


• Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A, Dubai
Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4 204 5642 or
equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: FW 60+.
• Type: Fixed Flat Glazed Rooflight - refer to Architect's drawings for size and details.
• Frame Finish as delivered: [Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to
Qualicoat Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25].
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Inner pane: [6mm thick clear glass] .
- Air space: 12mm
- Outer pane: 6mm thick Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
• Kerb: Refer to Architect details - minimum 3 degree fall to glass.
• Other requirements: Insulating Glass Unit as H11 / 745. Glass Units to be confirmed by
calculation for relevant maintenance, wind and impact loads. Submit calculations and relevant
shop drawings to Architect for approval prior to fabrication. Allow for a ceramic fritt pattern -
pattern and colour to be approved by Architect. Glazing units to have no flashings, water
ponding obstructions or dirt traps on glass surface.
• Fixing: All exposed fixings to be stainless steel, grade 316. All fixings as per manufacturer's
literature and recommendations.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and gaskets, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Acoustic Performance: Contractor to provide a written certificate stating that the aluminium
profiles achieve a minimum acoustic rating of 27 decibels.
• Accessories: Water and airtight seals at all perimeters.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 157 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

480A FEATURE GLASS CANOPY TO BANQUET DROP-OFF


• Manufacturer: Contractor to submit proposals to the Architect for Approval.
- Product reference: Purpose-made to Architect's drawings.
• Type: Fixed Glass Panels fixed to Steel Support Framing.
• Support: Steel Supports to be galvanised and painted. Size of steel members to be confirmed
by Structural Engineer to suit loadings.
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Clear Glass with fritted pattern to Architect's drawings.
- Thickness: minimum 19mm - to be confirmed by Glass Supplier and Structural Engineer.
• Fixings: All fixings to be stainless steel grade 316.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all profiles and fixings,
and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Other requirements: Glass Panels to be confirmed by calculation for relevant maintenance,
wind and impact loads. Submit calculations and relevant shop drawings to Architect and
Structural Engineer for approval prior to fabrication. Allow for a ceramic fritt pattern - pattern
and colour to be approved by Architect.

550A FEATURE GLASS SCREEN TO DRUM


• Manufacturer: Contractor to submit proposals to the Architect for Approval.
- Product reference: Purpose-made to Architect's drawings.
• Type: Fixed Vertical Facetted Glass Panels fixed to Steel Support Framing.
• Support: Steel Supports to be galvanised and painted. Size of steel members to be confirmed
by Structural Engineer to suit loadings.
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Clear Glass with fritted pattern to Architect's drawings.
- Thickness: minimum 19mm - to be confirmed by Glass Supplier and Structural Engineer.
• Fixings: All fixings to be stainless steel grade 316.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and fixings, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Other requirements: Glass Panels to be confirmed by calculation for relevant maintenance,
wind and impact loads. Submit calculations and relevant shop drawings to Architect and
Structural Engineer for approval prior to fabrication. Allow for a ceramic fritt pattern - pattern
and colour to be approved by Architect.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 158 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

560A FIXED INTERNAL GLAZED SCREEN TO B.O.H OFFICES


• Location: B.o.H Office Areas as indicated on Architect's drawings.
• Manufacturer: Submit Proposals for Architect Approval.
- Product reference: Purpose Made - Refer to Architect's drawings.
• Screen height: refer to Architect drawings.
• Timber:
- Standard: to BS EN 942
- Species: Miranti or similar and approved by architect.
- Appearance Class: J10
- Moisture Content on Delivery: 9 - 13%
• Frames: Timber frame fixed through to blockwork wall.
- Joinery Workmanship: As section Z10.
- Finish: primed and painted, colour to be RAL 9010 - Pure White.
- Glazing bead fixing: Pinned using 40mm steel pins at 150mm nominal centres.
- Glass: by MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain) or equal and approved by Architect. Single glazed
clear float laminated glass, thickness to be a minimum of 12mm.
• Fixing of Frames:
- Standard: As per section Z20
- Fasteners: Stainless Steel Wood screws as per L10 / 780.
- Spacings: When not predrilled or specified otherwise, position fasteners not more than
150mm from ends of jamb and at max 450mm centres.
• Other Requirements: none.

560B INTERNAL GLAZED SCREEN WITH INTEGRATED DOOR


• Location: Back of House Offices as indicated.
• Manufacturer: GIBCA Furniture Industry Co. Ltd. (LLC), P.O. Box 20923, AJMAN - UAE. Tel :
+971-6-7436888, Fax : +971-6-7436903 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: H5T.
• Screen height: refer to Architect's drawings.
• Frames: Top & bottom extruded aluminium profile in powder coated finish with aesthetic Jolia
profile for glass to glass joint.
- Glass: Single glazed clear float laminated glass, thickness to be a minimum of 12mm.
• Fixings: all fixings as per manufacturer's literature and recommendations.
• Ironmongery: refer to Ironmongery Schedule.
• Other Requirements: Glass doors as section L20.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 159 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

562 SECURITY WINDOW TO CASH OFFICE


• Manufacturer: Safetell Limited, Unit 46, Fawkes Avenue, Dartford, Kent, DA1 1JQ or equal and
approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Flexiglaze - Type UJ System.
• Standards: Glass to conform to BS EN 356 and installation design to conform to BS 5357
• Screen Size: Refer to Architect's drawings.
• Frame: Steel - rectangular sections.
Finish: Polyester powder coated - colour white.
• Glazing details: 11.5mm thick, low spall, 5-ply, laminated glass as per manufacturer's literature.

- Colour: Clear
• Incorporated features: Horizontal transaction gap at counter - refer to architect drawings.
• Accessories/ Other requirements: As per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Fixing: Glazing panel siliconed into top and bottom channels, held rigidly between the vertical
posts. All fixings of frame to be as per manufacturer's literature and recommendations.

650A FEATURE METAL SCREENS TO FACADE


• Manufacturer: Contractor to submit proposals to the Architect for approval.
- Product reference: Purpose-made as per Architect's drawings.
• Material: Aluminium.
- Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat
Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Fire resistance rating: Not applicable.
• Accessories/ Other requirements: N/A.
• Fixing: Proprietary support system by manufacturer to be submitted to Architect and Structural
Engineer for review prior to fabrication. Note; prefixing of primary support members shall be
installed prior to installation of external render.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 160 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

650B METAL FACADE LOUVRES TO MEP ROOMS


• Manufacturer: GMAMCO LLC, Jebel Ali Industrial Area, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: or +971 (4)
8802334, Fax: +971 (4) 8802585 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Model 1602SB Standard Channel Frame.
• Frame: 51mm deep, type 6063-T5 extruded Aluminium, 1.5mm nominal wall thickness.
Integral caulking slot provided.
- Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat
Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Supe Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Fire resistance rating: Not applicable.
• Number of louvre banks: Refer to drawings for location and size.
• Blade Angle: fixed at 30°.
• Blade Spacing: Approx 51mm on centers.
• Blade Support Brackets: Concealed type, factory installed on rear of louver on maximum
1219mm centers. Reinforced with 25 x 25mm angle.
• Mullions: Concealed Architectural type.
• Screen: Galvanised bird screen.
• Fixings: Bolted to blockwork wall to allow for louver panels to be removed for maintenance.

650C M.E.P LOUVRE SCREEN TO ROOF PLANT


• Manufacturer: Contractor to submit proposals to Architect for approval.
- Product reference: Purpose-made louvre screen.
• Overall Size: refer to Architect's drawings.
• Material: Aluminium
- Finish to all components: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to
Qualicoat Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Supe Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: Refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Specification.
• Posts: 100 x 100mm at 1200mm centres.
• Profile: refer to Architect's drawings for exact size.
• Post Fixings: Bolted to concrete roof upstand.
• Other Requirements: Stone ballast to cover base of post. Hinged door panel to be incorporated
for maintenance access.

EXECUTION

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS


• General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately or placed in
clean, dry floored and covered storage.
• Stored components: Stack vertical or near vertical on level bearers, separated with spacers to
prevent damage by and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 161 of 367
Louvres
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

730 PRIMING/ SEALING


• Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Prime or seal as specified before fixing
components.

750 BUILDING IN
• General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings.
- Brace and protect components to prevent distortion and damage during construction of
adjacent structure.

760 REPLACEMENT WINDOW INSTALLATION


• Standard: To BS 8213-4.

765 WINDOW INSTALLATION GENERALLY


• Installation: Into prepared openings.
• Gap between frame edge and surrounding construction:
- Minimum: 5mm.
- Maximum: 10mm.
• Distortion: Install windows without twist or diagonal racking.

770 DAMP PROOF COURSES IN PREPARED OPENINGS


• Location: Ensure correct positioning in relation to window frames. Do not displace during fixing
operations.

782 FIXING OF ALUMINIUM FRAMES


• Standard: As section Z20.
• Fasteners: Stainless steel wood screws.
- Spacing: When not predrilled or specified otherwise, position fasteners not more than 250
mm from ends of each jamb, adjacent to each hanging point of opening lights, and at
maximum 600 mm centres.

790 FIRE RESISTING FRAMES


• Gap between back of frame and reveal: Completely fill with intumescent mastic or tape.

810 SEALANT JOINTS


• Sealant:
- Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect Approval.
Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect Approval.
- Colour: Submit Proposals for Architect Approval.
- Application: As section Z22 to prepared joints. Finish triangular fillets to a flat or slightly
convex profile.

820 IRONMONGERY
• Fixing: Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fasteners with matching finish supplied
by ironmongery manufacturer. Do not damage ironmongery and adjacent surfaces.
• Checking/ Adjusting/ Lubricating: Carry out at Completion and ensure correct functioning.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L10 Windows/ Rooflights/ Screens/ Page 162 of 367
Louvres
L20
Doors/ shutters/ hatches
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• Design Requirements
The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent.
Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be responsible for the
completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's Requirements and shall
prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for the efficient execution of
the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance specification is defined the
Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Designer and the
Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance specification.

20 DESIGN STANDARDS
• The Contractor shall ensure that the Works designed by him comply with all statutory
requirements and in particular, with the requirements of the current Local Authority
Regulations. The Contractor shall ensure that the Works comply with the British Standard
Specifications or shall be interpreted permitting the use of an equivalent alternative
international technical specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 164 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to complete the design and documents for the Fire resisting doors/ doorsets
and assemblies. Also, the contractor is to complete the design and documents for the
Frameless sliding glass entrance doors and assembles and supply and install completed
works for other doorsets in accordance with this specification. The scope of works includes but
is not limited to the following:
- Fire resisting doorsets and associated fixings.
- Internal doorsets and associated fixings.
- Internal fire rated doorsets and associated fixings.
- Frameless glass entrance door/ screen and associated fixings.
- Miscellaneous hatches.
- Associated support systems, membranes and insulation.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Secondary steel required to achieve intended design profile and appearance and design
performance criteria.
- All flushings and weathering details associated with above.
- Interfaces with associated works.
- Fixings and methods of alignment for the above.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed applications.
• The completion of the design where required and the preparation of the documents are to be
sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant details including joints, fixings, clips,
edge, details, expansion joints, service penetrations, abutments, steps, brackets, and
interfaces to adjacent construction with associated fixings, flushings and seals.

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS

110 EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE


• Certification: Provide independently certified evidence that all incorporated components
comply with specified performance requirements.

115 FIRE RESISTING DOORS/ DOORSETS/ ASSEMBLIES


• Evidence of fire performance: Provide certified evidence, in the form of a product conformity
certificate, directly relevant fire test report or engineering assessment, that each door/ doorset/
assembly supplied will comply with the specified requirements for fire resistance if tested to BS
476-22, BS EN 1634-1 or BS EN 1634-3. Such certification must cover door and frame
materials, glass and glazing materials and their installation, essential and ancillary
ironmongery, hinges and seals.

150 SITE DIMENSIONS


• Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shop
drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
• Designated items:
All door types .

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 165 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

170 CONTROL SAMPLES


• Procedure:
- Finalize component details.
- Fabricate one of each of the following designated items as part of the quantity required for
the project.
- Obtain approval of appearance and quality before proceeding with manufacture of the
remaining quantity.
• Designated items:
Both typical timber and metal doorsets.

COMPONENTS

430A INTERNAL TIMBER DOORSETS NON-FIRE RATED - BOH


• Fire resistance rating: Not applicable.
• Sound insulation rating: 35 RwdB.
• Door leaf:
- Core: Solid laminated hardwood - heavy duty.
- Facings: MDF with specified paint finish.
- Lippings: 9mm thick hardwood lipping - refer to Architect's details.
- Finish as delivered: Specified paint finish - refer to the Architect's Finishes Schedule.
- Thickness: minimum 44mm.
• Frame:
- 1.6mm thick (min.) zinc coated steel to form single rebate.
- Finish as delivered: Powdercoated - RAL colour to Architect's selection - submit for Approval.

- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,


U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Architraves: as per Architect's details.
• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and BWPDA Commodity Specification
C5; Desired service life: 30 years.
• Glazing details: As required - 12mm thick Clear single glazing, as indicated on Architect's
Internal Door Schedule.
- Aperture: Refer to Architect's Internal Door Schedule for size.
• Moisture content on delivery: 6-10% .
• Ironmongery: refer to Architect's current Ironmongery Schedule.
- Hinges: to suit weight of door, refer to Architect's current Ironmongery Schedule.
• Perimeter seals: as required.
• Fixing: Plugged and screwed as clause 790 and section Z20.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 166 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

430B INTERNAL TIMBER DOORSETS FIRE RATED - 30 TO 120 MINUTES - BOH


• Fire resistance rating: To BS 476: Part 22: 1987. The fire rating shall be determined by the
type/rating of the wall they are located in. Refer to Architect's fire strategy drawings for fire
ratings and locations.
• Sound insulation rating: 35 RwdB.
• Door leaf:
- Core: Solid laminated hardwood - heavy duty.
- Facings: MDF with specified paint finish.
- Lippings: 9mm square edge hardwood lipping all round.
- Finish as delivered: Specified paint finish - refer to the finishes schedule.
- Thickness: minimum 44mm.
• Frame:
- 1.6mm thick (min.) zinc coated steel to form single rebate.
- Finish as delivered: Powdercoated - RAL colour to Architect's selection - submit for Approval.

- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,


U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Architraves: MDF with specified paint finish.
• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and BWPDA Commodity Specification
C5; Desired service life: 30 years.
• Glazing details: clear, laminated fully insulating fire and impact resistant glass.
- Manufacturer: Pilkington, Tel: Tel: +44 (0)1744 692000, Fax: +44 (0)1744 692880, Email:
pilkington@respond.uk.com
- Glass Type / Ref: Pilkington Pyrostop to suit door fire rating.
- Fire Rating: Glass thickness to suit fire rating of door - refer to Architect's Fire Strategy
Drawings for ratings.
- Glazing Beads: Pin fixed up to 30 minute fire rating, and screw fixed for fire ratings above 30
minutes.
• Moisture content on delivery: 6-10% .
• Ironmongery: refer to Architect's current Ironmongery Schedule.
- Door Closers: To suit fire rating of door.
- Hinges: to suit fire rating and door weight, refer to Architect's current Ironmongery Schedule.
• Perimeter seals: Combined intumescent and smoke resistant seals to suit fire rating of door.
• Fixings: Plugged and screwed as clause 790 and section Z20.
• Other Requirements: Intumescent Air Transfer Grille required to doors as indicated within the
Architect's Internal Door Schedule. Contractor to supply international fire test certificates or
local civil defense fire test certificates to demonstrate evidence of fire performance and
compliancy as per clause L20 / 115.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 167 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

461 INTERNAL METAL DOORSET non-fire rated, BOH


• Manufacturer: Fitzpatrick Doors Ltd or equal and approved by Architect.
- Supplier: Fitzpatrick S.A.L. Lebanon. Tel: +961 (1) 901 888.
• Sound insulation rating: 35 RwdB.
• Door leaf:
- Core: Honeycomb severe duty - 45mm nominal thickness.
- Facings: 1.2mm electro zinc coated 'Zintec' steel c/w integral security astragal, vertical
interlock edge seams and top/bottom closing channels.
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated to 30% gloss level - colour to be selected from
manufacturer's standard range and to be approved by Architect.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Frame:
- Single or double rebated to overall watch to match scheduled wall widths (200mm thick walls
generally).
- Material: 1.5mm electro zinc coated 'Zintec' Steel.
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated to 30% gloss level - colour to be selected from
manufacturer's standard range and to be approved by Architect.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Architraves: not required.
• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and BWPDA Commodity Specification
C5; Desired service life: 30 years.
• Glazing details: Not applicable.
• Ironmongery: refer to Architect's Ironmongery Schedule.
- Door Closers: overhead door closer required.
- Hinges: as per manufacturer's recommendations for door weight.
• Perimeter seals: Not required.
• Fixings: Frames pre-drilled and supplied with matching, concealed fixing discs.
• Other Requirements: Intumescent Air Transfer Grille required to doors as indicated within the
Architect's Internal Door Schedule.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 168 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

462 INTERNAL METAL DOORSET 60 minute fire rated, BOH


• Manufacturer: Fitzpatrick Doors Ltd or equal and approved by Architect.
- Supplier: Fitzpatrick S.A.L. Lebanon. Tel: +961 (1) 901 888.
• Product Ref: FIRECEL 60
• Fire resistance rating: To BS 476: Part 22: 1987.
• Sound insulation rating: 35 RwdB.
• Door leaf:
- Core: Honeycomb severe duty - 45mm nominal thickness.
- Facings: 1.2mm electro zinc coated 'Zintec' steel c/w integral security astragal, vertical
interlock edge seams and top/bottom closing channels.
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated to 30% gloss level - colour to be selected from
manufacturer's standard range and to be approved by Architect.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Frame:
- Single or double rebated to overall watch to match scheduled wall widths (200mm thick walls
generally).
- Material: 1.5mm electro zinc coated 'Zintec' Steel.
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated to 30% gloss level - colour to be selected from
manufacturer's standard range and to be approved by Architect.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Architraves: not required.
• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and BWPDA Commodity Specification
C5; Desired service life: 30 years.
• Glazing details: If required, refer to Architect's Internal Door Schedule.
- Manufacturer: Pilkington, Tel: Tel: +44 (0)1744 692000, Fax: +44 (0)1744 692880, Email:
pilkington@respond.uk.com
- Glass Type / Ref: Pilkington Pyrostop, thickness to suit 60 minute fire rating.
- Fire Rating: Glass thickness to suit fire rating of door - refer to Architect's Fire Strategy
Drawings for ratings.
- Glazing Beads: Zintec steel trim and glazing bead system, screw fixed.
- Aperture: refer to Architect's Internal Door Schedule.
• Ironmongery: refer to Architect's Ironmongery Schedule. All ironmongery must be Certifire
approved/CE marked on all fire rated doorsets.
- Door Closers: To suit fire rating of door.
- Hinges: Grade 316 Stainless Steel 76mm x 102mm butt hinges c/w integral security 'dogbolt'
to BS/EN 1935:2002 supplied and fitted by doorset manufacturer.
- Flush Bolts: required to double leaf doorsets: ANSI standard supplied and fitted by doorset
manufacturer.
• Perimeter seals: Self adhesive cold smoke seal to frame head and jamb sections.
• Fixings: Frames pre-drilled and supplied with matching, concealed fixing discs.
• Other Requirements: Intumescent Air Transfer Grille required to doors as indicated within the
Architect's Internal Door Schedule. Contractor to supply international fire test certificates or
local civil defense fire test certificates to demonstrate evidence of fire performance and
compliancy as per clause L20 / 115.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 169 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

463 INTERNAL METAL DOORSET 90 minute fire rated, BOH


• Manufacturer: Fitzpatrick Doors Ltd or equal and approved by Architect.
- Supplier: Fitzpatrick S.A.L. Lebanon. Tel: +961 (1) 901 888.
• Product Ref: FIRECEL 90
• Fire resistance rating: To BS 476: Part 22: 1987.
• Sound insulation rating: 35 RwdB.
• Door leaf:
- Core: Honeycomb severe duty - 45mm nominal thickness.
- Facings: 1.2mm electro zinc coated 'Zintec' steel c/w integral security astragal, vertical
interlock edge seams and top/bottom closing channels.
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated to 30% gloss level - colour to be selected from
manufacturer's standard range and to be approved by Architect.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Frame:
- Single or double rebated to overall watch to match scheduled wall widths (200mm thick walls
generally).
- Material: 1.5mm electro zinc coated 'Zintec' Steel.
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated to 30% gloss level - colour to be selected from
manufacturer's standard range and to be approved by Architect.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Architraves: not required.
• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and BWPDA Commodity Specification
C5; Desired service life: 30 years.
• Glazing details: If required, refer to Architect's Internal Door Schedule.
- Manufacturer: Pilkington, Tel: Tel: +44 (0)1744 692000, Fax: +44 (0)1744 692880, Email:
pilkington@respond.uk.com
- Glass Type / Ref: Pilkington Pyrostop, thickness to suit 90 minute fire rating.
- Fire Rating: Glass thickness to suit fire rating of door - refer to Architect's Fire Strategy
Drawings for ratings.
- Glazing Beads: Zintec steel trim and glazing bead system, screw fixed.
- Aperture: refer to Architect's Internal Door Schedule.
• Ironmongery: refer to Architect's Ironmongery Schedule. All ironmongery must be Certifire
approved/CE marked on all fire rated doorsets.
- Door Closers: To suit fire rating of door.
- Hinges: Grade 316 Stainless Steel 76mm x 102mm butt hinges c/w integral security 'dogbolt'
to BS/EN 1935:2002 supplied and fitted by doorset manufacturer.
- Flush Bolts: required to double leaf doorsets: ANSI standard supplied and fitted by doorset
manufacturer.
• Perimeter seals: Self adhesive cold smoke seal to frame head and jamb sections.
• Fixings: Frames pre-drilled and supplied with matching, concealed fixing discs.
• Other Requirements: Intumescent Air Transfer Grille required to doors as indicated within the
Architect's Internal Door Schedule. Contractor to supply international fire test certificates or
local civil defense fire test certificates to demonstrate evidence of fire performance and
compliancy as per clause L20 / 115.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 170 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

464 INTERNAL METAL DOORSET 120 minute fire rated, BOH


• Manufacturer: Fitzpatrick Doors Ltd or equal and approved by Architect.
- Supplier: Fitzpatrick S.A.L. Lebanon. Tel: +961 (1) 901 888.
• Product Ref: FIRECEL 120
• Fire resistance rating: To BS 476: Part 22: 1987.
• Sound insulation rating: 35 RwdB.
• Door leaf:
- Core: Honeycomb severe duty - 45mm nominal thickness.
- Facings: 1.2mm electro zinc coated 'Zintec' steel c/w integral security astragal, vertical
interlock edge seams and top/bottom closing channels.
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated to 30% gloss level - colour to be selected from
manufacturer's standard range and to be approved by Architect.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Frame:
- Single or double rebated to overall watch to match scheduled wall widths (200mm thick walls
generally).
- Material: 1.5mm electro zinc coated 'Zintec' Steel.
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powder coated to 30% gloss level - colour to be selected from
manufacturer's standard range and to be approved by Architect.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Super Durable.
• Architraves: not required.
• Preservative treatment: Organic solvent as section Z12 and BWPDA Commodity Specification
C5; Desired service life: 30 years.
• Glazing details: If required, refer to Architect's Internal Door Schedule.
- Manufacturer: Pilkington, Tel: Tel: +44 (0)1744 692000, Fax: +44 (0)1744 692880, Email:
pilkington@respond.uk.com
- Glass Type / Ref: Pilkington Pyrostop, thickness to suit 120 minute fire rating.
- Fire Rating: Glass thickness to suit fire rating of door - refer to Architect's Fire Strategy
Drawings for ratings.
- Glazing Beads: Zintec steel trim and glazing bead system, screw fixed.
- Aperture: refer to Architect's Internal Door Schedule.
• Ironmongery: refer to Architect's Ironmongery Schedule. All ironmongery must be Certifire
approved/CE marked on all fire rated doorsets.
- Door Closers: To suit fire rating of door.
- Hinges: Grade 316 Stainless Steel 76mm x 102mm butt hinges c/w integral security 'dogbolt'
to BS/EN 1935:2002 supplied and fitted by doorset manufacturer.
- Flush Bolts: required to double leaf doorsets: ANSI standard supplied and fitted by doorset
manufacturer.
• Perimeter seals: Self adhesive cold smoke seal to frame head and jamb sections.
• Fixings: Frames pre-drilled and supplied with matching, concealed fixing discs.
• Other Requirements: Intumescent Air Transfer Grille required to doors as indicated within the
Architect's Internal Door Schedule. Contractor to supply international fire test certificates or
local civil defense fire test certificates to demonstrate evidence of fire performance and
compliancy as per clause L20 / 115.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 171 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

470A EXTERNAL HINGED DOORSETS WITH CLEAR GLAZING PANEL(S)


• Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A, Dubai
Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4 204 5642 or
equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Reference: ADS 50.
- Performance: Insulated to meet local authority thermal requirements
• Door Leaf: Aluminium joinery framed with hermetically sealed double glazed unit
- Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat
Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Frame & Architrave: Refer to manufacturer's literature for system
- Finish as delivered: Polyester Powder coated - refer to Architect's Finishes Schedule for
RAL Colour
- Powdercoat ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades
Collection.
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Inner pane: [6mm thick clear glass] .
- Air space: 12mm
- Outer pane: 6mm thick Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Size: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule
- Configuration: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule
• Ironmongery: Schuco Standard Ironmongery Range to suit door type and location. Concealed
Schuco hinges required. Supplier to submit samples for Architect approval.
• Perimeter Seals: Factory fitted EPDM weatherseal and silicone pointed.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and gaskets, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Acoustic Performance: Contractor to provide a written certificate stating that the aluminium
profiles achieve a minimum acoustic rating of 27 decibels.
• Other Requirements: Mill finish proprietary threshold with weather bar.
• Fixings: As recommended by Manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 172 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

470B EXTERNAL HINGED DOORSETS WITH LOUVRE INSERT PANEL(S)


• Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A, Dubai
Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4 204 5642 or
equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Reference: ADS 50
- Performance: Insulated to meet local authority thermal requirements
• Door Leaf: Aluminium joinery framed with louvre insert panel(s).
- Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat
Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Frame & Architrave: Refer to manufacturer's literature for system
- Finish as delivered: Polyester Powder coated - refer to Architect's Finishes Schedule for
RAL Colour
- Powdercoat ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades
Collection.
• Louvre Details: Powdercoated to match frame.
- Size: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule,
- Number of blades: to suit door size - contractor to submit proposals for architect approval.
- Blade Pitch: 30 degrees.
- Configuration: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule.
• Ironmongery: Schuco Standard Ironmongery Range to suit door type and location. Concealed
Schuco hinges required. Supplier to submit samples for Architect approval.
• Perimeter Seals: Factory fitted EPDM weatherseal and silicone pointed.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and gaskets, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Other Requirements: Mill finish proprietary threshold with weather bar. Insect mesh to be
located on the inside of door behind louvres.
• Fixings: As recommended by Manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 173 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

470C EXTERNAL HINGED DOORSETS WITH SOLID INSERT PANEL(S)


• Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A, Dubai
Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4 204 5642 or
equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Reference: ADS 50.
- Performance: Insulated to meet local authority thermal requirements
• Door Leaf: Aluminium joinery framed with solid aluminium insert panel(s).
- Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat
Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Frame & Architrave: Refer to manufacturer's literature for system
- Finish as delivered: Polyester Powder coated - refer to Architect's Finishes Schedule for
RAL Colour
- Powdercoat ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades
Collection.
• Inset Panel Details: Powdercoated aluminium sandwich panel to match door frame.
- Size: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule,
- Configuration: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule.
• Ironmongery: Schuco Standard Ironmongery Range to suit door type and location. Concealed
Schuco hinges required. Supplier to submit samples for Architect approval.
• Perimeter Seals: Factory fitted EPDM weatherseal and silicone pointed.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and gaskets, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Acoustic Performance: Contractor to provide a written certificate stating that the aluminium
profiles achieve a minimum acoustic rating of 27 decibels.
• Other Requirements: Mill finish proprietary threshold with weather bar.
• Fixings: As recommended by Manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 174 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

520A EXTERNAL SLIDING DOORSETS WITH CLEAR GLAZING PANEL(S)


• Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A, Dubai
Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4 204 5642 or
equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Reference: ASS 50.
- Performance: Insulated to meet local authority thermal requirements
• Door Leaf: Aluminium joinery framed with hermetically sealed double glazed unit
- Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat
Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Frame & Architrave: Refer to manufacturer's literature for system
- Finish as delivered: Polyester Powder coated - refer to Architect's Finishes Schedule for
RAL Colour
- Powdercoat ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades
Collection.
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Inner pane: [6mm thick clear glass] .
- Air space: 12mm
- Outer pane: 6mm thick Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Size: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule
- Configuration: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule
• Ironmongery: Schuco Standard Ironmongery Range to suit door type and location. Supplier to
submit samples for Architect approval.
• Perimeter Seals: Factory fitted EPDM weatherseal and silicone pointed.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and gaskets, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Acoustic Performance: Contractor to provide a written certificate stating that the aluminium
profiles achieve a minimum acoustic rating of 27 decibels.
• Other Requirements: Mill finish proprietary threshold with weather bar.
• Fixings: As recommended by Manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 175 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

530A EXTERNAL BI-FOLDING DOORSETS WITH CLEAR GLAZING PANEL(S)


• Manufacturer: Schüco International KG, 6th Floor, Office 4A-625, 4E Building, Block A, Dubai
Airport Free Zone, PO Box 54286, Dubai, UAE. Tel:+971 4 204 5643, Fax: +971 4 204 5642 or
equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Reference: ASS 70.HI.
- Performance: Insulated to meet local authority thermal requirements
• Door Leaf: Aluminium joinery framed with hermetically sealed double glazed unit
- Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat
Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Frame & Architrave: Refer to manufacturer's literature for system
- Finish as delivered: Polyester Powder coated - refer to Architect's Finishes Schedule for
RAL Colour
- Powdercoat ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades
Collection.
• Glazing Details:
- Manufacturer: MERINT L.L.C (Saint-Gobain), PO Box 29339, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 358
4565, Fax: +971 4 358 4575 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Inner pane: [6mm thick clear glass] .
- Air space: 12mm
- Outer pane: 6mm thick Cool Lite Pure SKN 144.
- Size: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule
- Configuration: Refer to Architect's External Door Schedule
• Ironmongery: Schuco Standard Ironmongery Range to suit door type and location. Supplier to
submit samples for Architect approval.
• Perimeter Seals: Factory fitted EPDM weatherseal and silicone pointed.
• Warranty Period: Contractor to provide a minimum 10 year warranty for all aluminium profiles
and gaskets, and a minimum 5 year warranty for all accessories.
• Acoustic Performance: Contractor to provide a written certificate stating that the aluminium
profiles achieve a minimum acoustic rating of 27 decibels.
• Other Requirements: Mill finish proprietary threshold with weather bar.
• Fixings: As recommended by Manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 176 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

610A EXTERNAL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOOR TO LOADING DOCK


• Manufacturer: Crawford Door M.E AB, Dubai Investment Park, PO Box 80983, Dubai, UAE.
Tel: +971 4 885 2888, Fax: +971 4 885 4919 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Crawford 542 Thermally Insulated Overhead Door .
• Performance: as per manufacturer's literature .
• Arrangement: Vertical rolling shutter, face fixed .
• Size: Refer to Architect's drawings for structural opening sizes.
• U-Value: minimum of 0.8 W/m2 according to norm pr EN 12428.
• Wind Resistance: minimum of 700 N/m2 according to norm pr EN 12424 class 3 for a closed
shutter door.
• Water Resistance: 70 PA according to norm pr EN 12425 class 3 for a closed shutter door.
• Air Tightness: 8.5m3/m2/h according to norm pr EN 12426 class 2 for a closed shutter door.
• Shutter curtain: steel sheet metal with powder coated finish .
- Finish as delivered: Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating complying to Qualicoat
Class 2 , AAMA 2604 standard. Minimum TSR 0.25.
- Powdercoating Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool Shades Collection.
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Frame/ Guides: Stainless steel chanel .
- Finish as delivered: Powdercoated - RAL 1013 .
• Operation: Electrical, with constant pressure button control .
• Lift Hardware: standard SL .
• Other requirements: Fusible Link required. Contractor to submit a sample of the roller shutter
to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication .
• Fixings: All as per manufacturer's recommendations.

610B FIRE CURTAIN as required


• Location: As indicated on Architect's drawings.
• Performance: To comply with EN 1634-1 & EN 13501-2.
• Manufacturer: Colt Arabia Limited, Office no. 39, 3rd Floor, Panda Building, Saudi Business
Centre, First street, Dammam, PO Box 9788, Dammam 31423, Saudi Arabia or equal
approved by Architect and Fire Engineer .
- Product reference: Colt FM1 Electronically operated automatic fire curtain, or equal
approved by Architect and Fire Engineer .
• Dimension: Refer to Architect's drawings .
• Arrangement: Vertical, fitted into reveal .
• Shutter curtain: E 120 heat stablised fabric with a stainless steel inlay .
• Control Option: Battery back-up to retain the curtain in its retracted position for a set period if
there is a mains power failure.
- Finish as delivered: All non galvanised parts to be primed for site painting .
• Frame/ Guides: Stainless steel chanel .
- Finish as delivered: satin .
• Operation: Electrical, with key switch .
• Ironmongery: none required .
• Other requirements: Fusible Link .

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 177 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

612A ROLLER SHUTTER TO CASHIER'S OFFICE


• Manufacturer: Saudi Crawford Doors Factory Limited, Po Box 18025, Jeddah, Saudi Arabia.
Tel: +966(2)6511248 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Standard Roller Shutter.
• Size: to suit structural opening size of 1150 (W) x 1200mm (H) - refer to Architect's drawings.
• Arrangement: Vertical, face fitted across opening .
• Grille curtain: Perforated Aluminium .
- Finish as delivered: Polyester powdercoated RAL 9010.
• Frame/ Guides: Manufacturer's standard .
- Finish as delivered: to match grille curtain .
• Operation: Electrical, with key switch .
• Ironmongery: to suit manufacturer's recommendations and guidelines .
• Other requirements: none .

631 ACCESS HATCHES [TO ROOF AREAS]


• Manufacturer: [Surespan Limited or equal and approved by Architect]
- Supplier: Gebal Abu Dhabi U.A.E, P.O. Box 25677, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E. Tel: +971 2 4464
684, Fax:+971 2 4464 683.
• Product reference: [Surespan SRH / LE Single Leaf Roof Hatch] .
• Structural Opening Size: [1000 x 1000mm]
• Material: Aluminium
• Operation: Gas Spring assisted opening lid supported by heavy-duty aluminium hinges
(automatic opening - manual closing)
• Locking Option: [L04 - Standard Cablock & Non-Locking External Handle]
• Accessories: Hatch to come with integral safety grid (SRH/LE). Contractor to include for all
flashings, trims and side panels etc to allow for fixing and weathering of hatch.

INSTALLATION

710 PROTECTION OF COMPONENTS


• General: Do not deliver to site components that cannot be installed immediately or placed in
clean, dry, floored and covered storage.
• Stored components: Stacked on level bearers, separated with spacers to prevent damage by
and to projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.

730 PRIMING/ SEALING


• Wood surfaces inaccessible after installation: Primed or sealed as specified before fixing
components.

750 FIXING DOORSETS


• Timing: After associated rooms have been made weathertight and the work of wet trades is
finished and dried out.

760 BUILDING IN
• General: Not permitted unless indicated on drawings.

770 DAMP PROOF COURSES ASSOCIATED WITH BUILT IN WOOD FRAMES


• Method of fixing: To backs of frames using galvanized clout nails.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 178 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

780 DAMP PROOF COURSES IN PREPARED OPENINGS


• Location: Correctly positioned in relation to door frames. Do not displace during fixing
operations.

790 FIXING OF WOOD FRAMES


• Spacing of fixings (frames not predrilled): Maximum 150 mm from ends of each jamb and at
600 mm maximum centres.

800 FIXING OF LOOSE THRESHOLDS


• Spacing of fixings: Maximum 150 mm from each end and at 600 mm maximum centres.

809 FIRE RESISTING AND/ OR SMOKE CONTROL DOORS/ DOORSETS


• Installation: By a firm currently registered under a third party accredited fire door installer
scheme in accordance with instructions supplied with the product conformity certificate, test
report or engineering assessment.

810 FIRE RESISTING AND/ OR SMOKE CONTROL DOORS/ DOORSETS


• Gaps between frames and supporting construction: Filled as necessary in accordance with
requirements for certification and/ or door/ doorset manufacturer's instructions.

820 SEALANT JOINTS


• Sealant:
- Manufacturer: To Architect's approval .
Product reference: To Architect's approval .
- Colour: To Architect's approval .
- Application: As section Z22 to prepared joints. Triangular fillets finished to a flat or slightly
convex profile.

830 FIXING IRONMONGERY GENERALLY


• Fasteners: Supplied by ironmongery manufacturer.
- Finish/ Corrosion resistance: To match ironmongery.
• Holes for components: No larger than required for satisfactory fit/ operation.
• Adjacent surfaces: Undamaged.
• Moving parts: Adjusted, lubricated and functioning correctly at completion.

840 FIXING IRONMONGERY TO FIRE RESISTING DOOR ASSEMBLIES


• General: All items fixed in accordance with door leaf manufacturer's recommendations
ensuring that integrity of the assembly, as established by testing, is not compromised.
• Holes for through fixings and components: Accurately cut.
- Clearances: Not more than 8 mm unless protected by intumescent paste or similar.
• Lock/ Latch cases for FD 60 doors: Coated with intumescent paint or paste before installation.

850 LOCATION OF HINGES


• Primary hinges: Where not specified otherwise, positioned with centre lines 250 mm from top
and bottom of door leaf.
• Third hinge: Where specified, positioned on centre line of door leaf .
• Hinges for fire resisting doors: Positioned in accordance with door leaf manufacturer's
recommendations.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 179 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

860 INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES


• Standard: Unless specified otherwise, install panic bolts/ latches in accordance with BS EN
1125.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L20 Doors/ shutters/ hatches Page 180 of 367
L30
Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ balustrades
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

L30 Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ balustrades

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• Design Requirements
The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance
specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance
specification.

20 DESIGN STANDARDS
• The Contractor shall ensure that the Works designed by him comply with all statutory
requirements and in particular, with the requirements of the current Local Authority
Regulations. The Contractor shall ensure that the Works comply with the British Standard
Specifications. Reference to British Standards shall be interpreted permitting the use of an
equivalent alternative INTERnational technical specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L30 Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ Page 182 of 367
balustrades
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install all metal stairs, ladders, walkways/ handrails and
balustrades in accordance with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited
to the following:
- Concrete stairs.
- Purpose made handrails and balustrades and associated fixings.
- Associated support systems.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Secondary steel required to achieve structural integrity and/ or to achieve intended profile
and appearance and design performance criteria.
- All flushings and weathering details associated with the above.
- Fixings and methods of alignment for the above.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- The completion of the design if required and preparation of documentation in sufficient detail
to determine the location and form of all.

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS

110 DESIGN
• Design standard: The following items have been designed to BS 5395 where applicable:
Stairs, balustrades and handrails.
• Completion of design: Finalize details to meet structural and safety requirements of BS 5395.
• Type of activity/occupancy category to BS 6399-1: C (Areas where people may congregate).

130 SITE DIMENSIONS


• Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record on shop
drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
- Designated items: All balustrades and handrails.

COMPONENTS

250A METAL STAIRS AND CATWALKS TO MECHANICAL AREAS AS INDICATED


• Grades of metal: Rectangular hollow steel sections to BS EN 10210; Grade S275 .
• Finish as delivered: Galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461with paint finish ref: RAL 7044 .
• Size: Refer to Architect's drawings
• Workmanship: To section Z11.
• Other requirements: None .

270A CONCRETE STAIRS TO FIRE ESCAPES:


• Treads: Refer to Architect's drawings .
• Risers: Refer to Architect's drawings .
• Other requirements: 35mm metal strip nosing as per Achitect's detail - Contractor to provide a
sample for Architect approval prior to commencement of fabrication .

Issue 0: Construction Documents L30 Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ Page 183 of 367
balustrades
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

550A PURPOSE MADE BALUSTRADES TO ESCAPE STAIRS


• Material: Mild steel with sprayed paint finish - All mild steel components to have a colour of
RAL 7044.
- Posts: 40 x 40mm square hollow section posts at 1400mm centres bolted on top of concrete
stair.
- Intermediate Vertical Uprights: 8 x 8mm steel at 90mm centres. Spacing must not allow a
100mm sphere to pass through.
- Handrails: 50mm diameter tube supported by 10mm diameter steel brackets at each vertical
post location - Mild steel with sprayed paint finish - RAL 7044. Refer to Architect's detail
drawings.
- Framing: 8 x 20mm flat steel framing. Framing to be bolted to vertical posts with hexagonal
key fixing.
• Workmanship:
- Metalwork: To section Z11.
• Other requirements: Manufacturer to submit loading calculations for Structural Engineer review
and approval. .
• Fixing: To be proposed by contractor to structural engineer's approval.

570B LADDER TO MAIN SWIMMING POOL


• Manufacturer: ROSA GRES or equal and approved by Architect.
- Supplier: Arabuild L.L.C, P.O Box 25211, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 222 6131. Fax: +971 4
221 4322. contact: Junaid Hameed.
• Product Ref: [Modelo 1000, MILX3, 3 steps]
• Component material: Stainless Steel, grade 316.
- Tubing: as per manufacturer's recommendations.
- Wall Thickness: as per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Workmanship:
- Joinery: Not applicable.
- Metalwork: To section Z11.
• Other requirements: Nylon levelling/ packing washers. Anchors and escutcheons required.
• Fixing: Frame to be secured to pool deck with two anchor sockets as per manufacturer's
recommendations. Lower end of frame is bent to meet pool wall and fitted with two white
rubber bumpers.

570C PURPOSE MADE HANDRAILS TO ESCAPE STAIRS


• Component material, grade and finish as delivered:
- Handrails: 50mm diameter tube - Mild steel with sprayed paint finish - RAL 7044. Refer to
Architect's detail drawings.
- Brackets: Mild steel with sprayed paint finish - RAL 7044. Refer to Architect's detail drawings

• Workmanship:
- Joinery: Not applicable.
- Metalwork: To section Z11.
• Other requirements: Nylon levelling/ packing washers. At stop and start handrail to be scrolled
90 degrees. Handrail stop ends to have 6mm thick end cap to match rail diameter.
• Fixing: M8 Anchor bolts fixed to concrete. Bracket fixings to be countersunk.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L30 Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ Page 184 of 367
balustrades
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

INSTALLATION

620 PRIMING/SEALING/PAINTING
• Surfaces inaccessible after assembly/installation: Before fixing components, apply full
protective/decorative treatment/coating system.

630 CORROSION PROTECTION OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS


• Components/ substrates/ fasteners of dissimilar materials: Isolate using washers/ sleeves or
other suitable means to separate materials to avoid corrosion and/ or staining.

640 INSTALLATION GENERALLY


• Fasteners and methods of fixing: To section Z20.
• Structural members: Do not modify, cut, notch or make holes in structural members, except as
indicated on drawings.
• Temporary support: Do not use stairs, walkways or balustrades as temporary support or
strutting for other work.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L30 Stairs/ ladders/ walkways/ handrails/ Page 185 of 367
balustrades
L35
Fixed utilitarian access systems
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

L35 Fixed utilitarian access systems

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• Design Requirements
The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance
specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance
specification.

20 DESIGN STANDARDS
• The Contractor shall ensure that the Works designed by him comply with all statutory
requirements and in particular, with the requirements of the current Local Authority
Regulations. The Contractor shall ensure that the Works comply with the British Standard
Specifications. Reference to British Standards shall be interpreted permitting the use of an
equivalent alternative INTERnational technical specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L35 Fixed utilitarian access systems Page 187 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install all metal access ladders, guard rails and floor gratings in
accordance with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to the
following:
- Metal access ladders and associated fixings.
- Guard Rails to riser shafts and associated fixings.
- Purpose made handrails aand associated fixings.
- Associated support systems.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Secondary steel required to achieve structural integrity and/ or to achieve intended profile
and appearance and design performance criteria.
- All flushings and weathering details associated with the above.
- Fixings and methods of alignment for the above.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- The completion of the design if required and preparation of documentation in sufficient detail
to determine the location and form of all.

GENERAL

131 LADDER SYSTEM ACCESS TO ROOF & M.E.P AREAS AS INDICATED


• Manufacturer: To be locally fabricated and approved by Architect - Submit proposals for
approval.
• Standard: To BS 5959-1
• Structural Design to BS-5950-1
• Method of provision: Fabricated off-site and assembled on site.
• Dimensions: For height refer to levels as indicated on the architect's drawings.
• Basic component material: Galvanized carbon steel.
• Finish: Sprayed Paint Finish, RAL 1013
• Rungs: Inverted V section.
• Stiles: Rectangular hollow section.
• Landings/ platforms: Not required.
• Hoops: Required if ladder rises more than 2.2m from ground or platform - Refer to Architect's
drawings.
• Assembly connectors: Stainless steel bolt assemblies.
• Fixing to superstructure: Stainless steel bolts - submit proposals.
• Accessories: As per manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations.
• Other Requirements: Contractor to submit shop drawings to the Architect for approval prior to
fabrication and installation.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L35 Fixed utilitarian access systems Page 188 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

155 GUARD RAIL TO RISER SHAFTS AS INDICATED


• Manufacturer: Steelway Fensecure or equal and approved by Architect - Submit proposals for
approval.
- Tel: +44 1902 451733. Email: sales@steelway.co.uk
• Dimensions: Refer to Architect's drawings.
• Method of provision: Fabricated off-site and assembled on-site
• Basic component material: Galvanized carbon steel.
- Finish to all components: Hot Dipped Galvanised to BS 729
• Guardrail: 50mm dia. shank x 90mm dia. ball - joints to be standard type internally screwed
nipple joint. Handrail single standard to suit rail with end rail attached using a loose type wall
flange and standards with ST382 flat base.
• Loading: Guardrail to be designed to take a 0.36kN/m horizontal uniformly distributed line load.
• Fixing to superstructure: Submit proposals.
• Other Requirements: None.

160A FLOOR GRATING TO SERVICE RISER VOIDS AS INDICATED


• Manufacturer: Steelway Fensecure or equal and approved by Architect - Submit proposals for
approval.
- Address: Queensgate Works, Bilston Road, Wolverhampton, West Midlands, WV2 2NJ. Tel:
+44 1902 451733, Fax: +44 1902 452256.
• Reference: Open type flooring type 25 FL25L.
• Support: Inverted steel angle curbs to perimeter, 'T' section to intermediate supports as
required.
• Fixing: Adjustable fixing clips for grating to frame fixing, stitching bolts for panel to panel.
- Finish to all components: Hot Dipped Galvanised to BS 729
• Other Requirements: Panels to be cut to suit services, all cut-outs to have edge bar to extent
of cut and additional support to cut perimeter to be provided as required.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the fixed utilitarian access systems.
• Design standards:
- Companionways: In accordance with BS 5395-3.
- Ladders for access to tall structures: To BS 4211.
- Straight stairs and winders: In accordance with BS 5395-1.
- Helical and spiral stairs: In accordance with BS 5395-2.
- Industrial stairs, permanent ladders and walkways: In accordance with BS 5395-3.
- Access to machinery: To BS EN ISO 14122-1, -2, and -3.
- Industrial type flooring, walkways and stair treads: To
BS 4592.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers' literature.

220 DESIGN DEVELOPMENT DOCUMENTATION


• Drawings: Provide design development and details: To comply with BS 4592-0.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L35 Fixed utilitarian access systems Page 189 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

240 STRUCTURAL DESIGN


• Design standard: In accordance with the relevant parts of BS 5950.
• Deflections (maximum): 3mm.
• Characteristic loads: personnel with maintenace equipment.

PRODUCTS

310 COMPANIONWAYS
• Standard: In accordance with BS 5395-3.
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Product reference: Submit proposals.

330 LADDERS
• Standard: In accordance with BS 5395-3.
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.

420 CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS


• Material: To BS EN 10025.
- Grade: S275JR.
- Options: n/a.
• Solid plates: To BS 4592-5.
- Thickness: 6 mm.
• Expanded metal grating panels: To BS 4592-2.
• Open bar gratings: To BS 4592-1.
- Depth: 25 mm.
• Finish: Hot dip galvanized.
- Colour: Self finished.
• Fixings: As section Z20.

490 ANCHORS
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Product reference: Submit proposals.
• Material and finish: Stainless steel sleeves and bolts.
• Size: M16 and M20 to suit application and conform to engineer's approval.

FABRICATION

510 FABRICATION GENERALLY


• Shop drawings: Submit.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L35 Fixed utilitarian access systems Page 190 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

EXECUTION

620 EXECUTION GENERALLY


• Structural members: Do not subject to nondesign loading. Do not modify, cut, notch or make
unspecified holes.
• Frameworks: Assemble and brace, including temporary members required for installation.
- Temporary support: Do not use access systems as temporary support or strutting for other
work.
• External durability of fastenings: Corrosion resistant material or with a corrosion resistant
finish.
• Bolted joints:
- Contact between dissimilar metals: Avoid.
- Bolts and washers: Select types, sizes and quantities of fasteners or packings and spacings
to retain supported components without distortion or loss of support.
• Welded joints:
- Standards:
Aluminium alloys: TIG or MIG welding to BS EN 1011-4.
Carbon steel: Metal arc welding to BS EN 1011-1 and -2.
Stainless steel: TIG welding to BS EN 1011-3.
- Surfaces to be jointed: Clean.
- Tack welds: Use only for temporary attachment.
- Traces of flux residue, slag and weld spatter: Remove.
- Surface of welds: Grind smooth.
- Joints: Fully bonded with no holes of cracks.
• Finished components:
- Free: From distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises.
- Corner junctions of identical sections: Mitre.
- Handrails: Smooth and continuous, with no sharp edges.

660 ANCHORING
• Fixing positions: Coordinate location of holding down bolts and wall fixings with services fixing
positions.

COMPLETION

910 CLEANING
• General: Clean surfaces and wipe down finishes.

920 INSPECTION
• Notice for inspection (minimum): 7 days.

930A DOCUMENTATION
• Operation and maintenance instructions: Contractor to Submit.
• Record drawings: Contractor to Submit.
• Structural Calculations: Contractor to Submit.

Issue 0: Construction Documents L35 Fixed utilitarian access systems Page 191 of 367
M10
Cement based levelling/ wearing screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing screeds

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor is to supply and install screeds to floors, roofs, roof decks etc. in accordance
with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Cement sand levellling screeds, associated reinforcement, additives etc.
- Proprietary polymer modified screeds, associated materials. Additives required to comply
with manufacturers printed instructions.
- Associated jointing materials etc.
- Reinforcement overlays to conduits etc.
- Strip reinforcements.
- All joints, crack induced grooves etc.
- All movement joints.
- Surface sealers.
- All jointing interfaces with associated interface works.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- The preparation of documents sufficient to determine the location and form of all associated
details

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 193 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF SCREED

110A CEMENT: SAND LEVELLING SCREEDS TO BACK OF HOUSE SERVICE AREAS, PLANT
ROOMS
• Base: Insitu Concrete.
• Primer: The bonding slurry shall comprise 1 part bonding primer liquid: 1 part water: 3 parts
fast drying screed by weight, shall be mixed to an even uniform consistency, and shall be
thoroughly worked into the substrate with brush or trowel, prior to the 'fresh on fresh'
application of the screed.
• The bonding primer liquid shall be Planicrete from IBS Mapei or approved equal.
• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 Website:
www.mapei.ae, or equal and approved by Architect.
• Screed type: Where indicated the bonded, normal setting, rapid hydrating, self-curing screed
shall comply with the recommendations of BS 8204-1 2003. The screed shall have a
compressive strength of >8N/mm² at 24 hours and >30N/mm² at 28 days, flexural strength of
>3N/mm² at 24 hours and shall exhibit a value of <3.5% residual moisture after 24 hours.
• The screed shall be Topcem from IBS Mapei, or equal and approved by Architect.
• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 Website:
www.mapei.ae
- Reinforcement for crack control: As clause 392.
- Nominal thickness: 40 mm
- Thickness (minimum): 25 mm.
• Mix:
- Aggregates: Standards as clause 305.
- Proportions (cement:sand): 1:3-4.5.
- Admixture: As clause 307.
• In situ crushing resistance (ISCR): As clause 335.
- Mass of test weight: 4 Kg.
- Depth of indentation (maximum): As required.
• Datum levels: Level as clause 345.
• Flatness/Surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation when measured as clause 355:
SR2.
• Finish:
- Method: Smooth finish as clause 530.
- To receive: Epoxy paint finish.
- Other requirements: Movement joints as clause 476.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 194 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

115A CEMENT:SAND LEVELLING SCREEDS TO FLAT ROOFS


• Base: In-Situ Concrete slabs.
• Screed type: Where indicated the un-bonded, normal setting, rapid hydrating, self-curing
screed shall comply with the recommendations of BS8204-1 2003. The screed shall have a
compressive strength of >8N/mm² at 24 hours and >30N/mm² at 28 days, flexural strength of
>3N/mm² at 24 hours and shall exhibit a value of <3.5% residual moisture after 24 hours.
• The screed shall be Topcem from IBS Mapei, or approved equal.
• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 Website:
www.mapei.ae, or equal and approved by Architect.
- Reinforcement for crack control: As clause 392.
- Nominal thickness: 75 mm.
- Thickness (minimum): 50 mm.
• Mix:
- Aggregates: Standards as clause 305.
- Proportions (cement: sand): 1:3-4.5.
- Admixture: As clause 307.
• In situ crushing resistance (ISCR): As clause 335.
- Mass of test weight: 4 Kg.
- Depth of indentation (maximum): A (3mm maximum indentation).
• Datum levels: Level as clause 345, laid to falls as clause 350.
• Flatness/Surface regularity: Maximum permissible deviation when measured as clause 355:
SR2.
• Finish:
- Method: Smooth finish as clause 520.
- To receive: Waterproof membrane, insulation and roof finishes.
• Other requirements: Movement joints as clause 476.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 195 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

140A PROPRIETARY POLYMER MODIFIED LEVELLING SCREEDS TO FRONT OF HOUSE


TILED FLOORS
• Base: Insitu concrete / precast slabs
• Screed type: Where indicated the bonded normal setting, rapid hydrating, self-curing screed
shall comply with the recommendations of BS 8204-1 2003. The screed shall have a
compressive strength of >8N/mm² at 24 hours and >30N/mm² at 28 days, flexural strength of
>3N/mm² at 24 hours and shall exhibit a value of <3.5% residual moisture after 24 hours.
• The screed shall be Topcem from IBS Mapei, or equal and approved by Architect.
• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 Website:
www.mapei.ae
- Nominal thickness: 50mm
- Thickness (minimum): 25mm
- Thickness (maximum): 55mm
• BS 8204 states a debonding risk for bonded screeds >40mm.
• Mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS 12, class 42.5
- Sand: To BS 882
- Grading Limit: To BS 8204-1, table 1
- Course Aggregate: 10mm to BS 882.
- Proportions (cement: sand, aggregate): (430kg/1280kg/950kg in 2360kg total).
- Ratio water/cement: 0.33.
• Curing: Under secured plastic sheet immediately following application.
• In situ crushing resistance (ISCR): BRE Screed Test to BS 8204-1, annex C.
- Depth of indentation (maximum): Class A : 3mm.
• Flatness/ Surface regularity: Sudden irregularities are not permitted. Maximum permissible
deviation when measured as clause 355: 2mm.
• Finish:
- Method: Smooth floated as clause 530.
- To receive: Porcelain, granite or marble tile flooring finish.

190 FLOATING FLOOR SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS


• Manufacturer: Regupol Acoustics Middle East, P.O Box 50910, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4
3233 493, Fax: +971 4 3262 129 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product Ref: Regupol 6010 SH.
- Thickness: 15mm.
- Type: Recycled tyre crumb product designed for use where very high impact loads are
apparent and acoustic performance is critical.
• Substrate: power floated floor system.
- Preparation: as per manufacturer's guidlines.
• Installation Guidelines: as per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Impact Improvement: 30dB minimum as per BS EN ISO 140-8:1998.
• Density: 595 kg/m3 minimum.
• Mean value of dynamic stiffness: 28.8 MN/m3 minimum.
• Other Requirements: Normal weight concrete screed as per M10 / 140 to be installed on top of
isolation material, screed thickness to suit desired floor build-up as stated on architectural
drawings. For final floor finish of health club refer to Interior Designer drawings and
specifications. Contractor to submit a sample of the acoustic isolation material to the architect
for approval prior to installation.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 196 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

GENERALLY/PREPARATION

205 DESIGN LIFE OF SCREEDS


• Duration: 50 years .
- Subject to reasonable wear and tear.
• Location: General areas and as indicated on drawings .
• Condition of use: Subject to correct loading and traffic usage throughout duration.

210 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES


• General:
- Suitable for specified levels and flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces. Consider
permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of screeds.
- Sound and free from significant cracks and gaps.
• Concrete strength: To BS 8204-1, Table 2.
• Cleanliness: Remove plaster, debris and dirt.
• Moisture content: To suit screed type. New concrete slabs to receive fully or partially bonded
construction must be dried out by exposure to the air for minimum six weeks.

215 SURFACE HARDNESS OF SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE POLYMER MODIFIED WEARING


SCREEDS
• General: Substrates must restrain stresses that occur during setting and hardening of wearing
screeds.
• Test for surface hardness: To BS EN 12504-2 using a rebound hammer with compliance
values selected from the following:
Screed thickness Rebound hammer value
_______________________________________________
15 mm or less Greater than 25
Greater than 15 mm Greater than 30
_______________________________________________
• Report: Submit details of areas where substrates surface hardness does not comply with these
values.

220 PROPRIETARY LEVELLING/WEARING SCREEDS


• General: Materials, mix proportions, mixing methods, minimum/maximum thicknesses and
workmanship must be in accordance with recommendations of screed manufacturer.
• Standard: To BS 8204-3.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES


• General: Complete areas of finished work and obtain approval of appearance before
proceeding.
• Screed type: As clause 110 and 140.
- Location/ Size: To be agreed on site / 6m².

250 CONDUITS UNDER FLOATING SCREEDS


• Haunching: Before laying insulation for floating screeds, haunch up in 1:4 cement:sand on both
sides of conduits.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 197 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

251 CONDUITS CAST INTO OR UNDER SCREEDS


• Reinforcement: Overlay with reinforcement selected from:
- 500 mm wide strip of steel fabric to BS 4483, reference D49, or
- Welded mesh manufactured in rolls from mild steel wire minimum 1.5 mm diameter to BS
1052, mesh size 50 x 50 mm.
• Placing reinforcement: Mid depth between top of conduit and the screed surface.
- Screed cover over conduit (minimum): 25 mm.

255 PIPE DUCTS/ TRUNKING


• Preformed access ducts: Before laying screed, fix securely to substrates and level accurately
in relation to finished floor surface.

260 FULLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION


• Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1.
• Removing mortar matrix: Shortly before laying screed, expose coarse aggregate over entire
area of hardened substrate.
• Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a full bond over complete area.
• Bonding coat: Recommended bonding agent or cement slurry as clause 275 to approval.

270 PARTIALLY BONDED CONSTRUCTION


• Preparation: Generally in accordance with BS 8204-1.
• Substrate surface: Brushed finish with no surface laitance.
- Texture of surface: Suitable to accept screed and achieve a bond over complete area.
• Bonding coat: Recommended bonding agent or cement slurry as clause 275 to approval.

275 CEMENT SLURRY BONDING


• Slurry type: Styrene-butadiene Rubber (SBR) Polymer modified cement based slurry coat as
recommended by screed manufacturer.
• Application: Shortly before laying screed, thoroughly wash clean the surface and keep well
wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in cement slurry bonding coat of
creamy consistency.
• Screeding: While slurry is still wet.

280 UNBONDED CONSTRUCTION


• Separation: Lay screed over a suitable sheet dpm or a separating layer.
- Type: Heavy gauge polyethylene sheet to approval.
• Installation of separating layer: Lay on clean substrate. Turn up for full depth of screed at
abutments with walls, columns, etc. Lap 100 mm at joints.

290A FLOATING CONSTRUCTION FOR TOILET CHANGING AREAS


• Insulation:
- Type: Rigid extruded polystyrene, thickness to suit finished floor level indicated on
architect's drawings .
- Installation: Lay with tight butt joints. Continue up at perimeter abutments for full depth of
screed.
• Separating layer:
- Type: Heavy gauge polyethylene to Architect's approval.
- Installation: Lay over insulation and turn up at perimeter abutments. Lap 100 mm at joints.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 198 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

295 FLOATING CONSTRUCTION (THIN SHEET IMPACT SOUND INSULATION)


• Substrate: Remove projections that may puncture the insulation.
• Insulation:
- Type: Rigid extruded polystyrene, thickness to suit finished floor level indicated on
architect's drawings.
- Installation: Lay on substrate. Turn up for full depth of screed at perimeter abutments. Lap
100 mm at joints and seal with tape.
- Perimeter: Maintain isolation of screed.

BATCHING/MIXING

302 CEMENTS
• Cement types: In accordance with BS 8204-1, clause 5.1.3.

305 AGGREGATES
• Sand: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading limits: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table B.1.
• Coarse aggregates for fine concrete levelling screeds:
- Standard: To BS EN 12620.
- Designation: 4/10.
• Lightweight aggregates: To BS 8204-1, Annex A.

307 ADMIXTURES
• Standard: In accordance with BS 8204-1, Table 1.
• Calcium chloride: Do not use in admixtures.

310 BATCHING WITH DENSE AGGREGATES


• Mix proportions: Specified by weight.
• Batching: Select from:
- Batch by weight.
- Batch by volume: Permitted on the basis of previously established weight:volume
relationships of the particular
materials. Use accurate gauge boxes. Allow for bulking of damp sand.

311 BATCHING WITH LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATES


• Standard: To BS 8204-1, Annex A.
• Mix proportions: Specified by volume.
• Batching: Use accurate gauge boxes.

330 MIXING
• Water content: Minimum necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to prevent
excessive water being brought to surface during compaction.
• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-fines must be
mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall drum type mixer.
• Consistency: Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
• Ready-mixed retarded screed mortar: Use within working time and site temperatures
recommended by manufacturer. Do not retemper.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 199 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

335 IN SITU CRUSHING RESISTANCE (ISCR)


• Standards and category: To BS 8204-1, table 4.
- Testing of bonded and unbonded screeds: To Annex D.
- Testing of floating levelling screeds: To Annex E.

340 ADVERSE WEATHER


• Screeds surface temperature: Maintain above 5°C for a minimum of four days after laying.
• Hot weather: Prevent premature setting or drying out.

LAYING

345 LEVEL OF SCREED SURFACES


• Permissible deviation: (allowing for thickness of coverings) ±10 mm from datum.

350 SCREEDING TO FALLS


• Minimum screed cover: Maintain at the lowest point.
• Falls: Gradual and consistent.
- Gradient (minimum): 1:60 to Gully position .

351 SCREEDING TO RAMPS


• Screed cover: Maintain consistent screed depth to graduated substrate.
• Falls: Gradual and consistent.

355 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY OF FLOOR SCREEDS


• Standard: To BS 8204-1, Table 5.
• Test: To BS 8204-1, Annex C.
• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.

365 FLATNESS/SURFACE REGULARITY OF ROOF SCREEDS


• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge (between points of
contact), placed anywhere on surface.
- Permissible deviation (maximum): 6 mm.

375 COMPACTION OF SCREEDS


• General: Compact thoroughly over entire area.
• Screeds over 50 mm thick: Lay in two layers of approximately equal thickness. Roughen
surface of compacted lower layer then immediately lay upper layer.

382 STAIR SCREEDS


• Construction: Fully bonded to treads, risers and landings.
• Risers: Form using fine finish formwork.
• Wearing screed surfaces: Make good with compatible cement:sand mix. Wood float. When
hardened remove laitance.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 200 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

386 COVED IN SITU SKIRTINGS


• Background: Concrete block work.
• Mix: To BS 8204-3, Table 2. Aggregate size adjusted as necessary to suit skirting thickness.
• Construction joint: Form at base.
• Rendering: Apply bonding agent. Render skirting while bonding agent is still wet. Achieve a
good bond. Allow each coat to set before applying subsequent coats. Render to true lines with
a fine finish and an even consistent appearance.
• Dimensions:
- Thickness of each coat (maximum): 10 mm.
- Height: 150 mm.
- Cove radius: 30 mm.
- Top edge: Rounded .

392 GENERAL REINFORCEMENT


• Steel fabric: To BS 4483.
- Type: D49 or D98 to approval.
• Installation: In accordance with BS 8204-1.

395 STRIP REINFORCEMENT


• Location: Across day joints .
• Steel fabric: To BS 4483.
- Type D49 or D98 to approval .
- Width of strips: to approval .
• Installation: In accordance with BS 8204-1.

405 JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS GENERALLY


• Laying screeds: Lay continuously using 'wet screeds' between strips or bays. Minimize defined
joints.
• Daywork joints: Form with vertical edge.

406 BAY JOINTS IN LEVELLING SCREEDS


• Screed type: As clause 115 and 140 .
• Bay sizes:
- Area (maximum): 20 m².
• Length (maximum): 6 m.
• Location of bay joints: Coordinate with those required for substrate slab and floor covering.

415 BAY JOINTS IN BONDED WEARING SCREEDS


• Bay sizes:
- Area (maximum): 20 m².
- Length: Breadth ratio (maximum): 3:2.
• Location of bay joints: Over construction / movement joints in slab and submit proposals for
other places.

435 FORMED JOINTS IN WEARING SCREEDS


• Temporary forms: Square edged with a steel top surface and in good condition.
• Placing screed: Compact thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no
lipping.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 201 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

440 CRACK INDUCING GROOVES IN LEVELLING SCREEDS


• Groove depth: At least half the depth of screed.
• Cutting grooves: Straight, vertical and accurately positioned. Select from the following:
- Trowel cut as screed is laid.
- Saw cut sufficiently early after laying to prevent random cracking.

445 CRACK INDUCING GROOVES IN WEARING SCREEDS


• Groove dimensions:
- Depth: At least half the depth of wearing screed.
- Width: as narrow as possible.
• Cutting grooves: Straight, vertical and accurately positioned. Saw cut sufficiently early after
laying to prevent random cracking.

450 SEALANT FOR SAWN JOINTS IN WEARING SCREEDS


• Type: Two part polysulfide-based, colour to approval.
• Preparation and application: As section Z22.

452 SEALING STRIPS FOR SAWN JOINTS IN WEARING SCREEDS


• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 Website:
www.mapei.ae, or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: to approval.
- Capping colour: to approval.

460 STRIP MOVEMENT JOINTS FOR DOOR THRESHOLDS


• Manufacturer: To Architects approval.
- Product reference: To Architects approval.
- Size: 5 mm.
• Installation: Set securely into screed to exact finished level of floor. Extend joints through to
substrate.
- Secure fixing to substrate: To manufacturer's recommendation.

468 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS WITH METAL EDGINGS GENERALLY


• Edging material: Stainless steel angle.
- Size: 75 x 50 x 5 mm.
- Bedding: 1:3 cement:sand.
• Installation: Centre over joints in substrate. Set to exact finished level of floor.
- Secure fixing to substrate: Stainless steel screws at 600 mm centres.
• Joint width: To match that of structural movement joint in substrate.
• Sealant:
- Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 Website:
www.mapei.ae, or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: to approval.
- Colour: to approval.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 202 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

476 METAL SECTION MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: IBS MAPEI, T: +971 4 815 6666 FAX: +971 4 815 6655 Website:
www.mapei.ae, or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: to approval.
- Colour of insert: to approval.
• Bedding: 1:3 cement:sand.
• Installation: Centre over joint in substrate. Set to exact finished level of floor.
- Secure fixing to substrate: Stainless steel screws and washers at 300 mm centres or to
manufacturer's recommendations.

FINISHING/CURING

510 FINISHING GENERALLY


• Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to setting and hardening
of screed material.
• Prohibited treatments to screed surfaces:
- Wetting to assist surface working.
- Sprinkling cement.

520 WOOD FLOATED FINISH


• Finish: Slightly coarse, even texture with no ridges or steps.

530 SMOOTH FLOATED FINISH


• Finish: Even texture with no ridges or steps.

550 TROWELLED FINISH TO WEARING SCREEDS


• Floating: To an even texture with no ridges or steps.
• Trowelling: Successively trowel at intervals, applying sufficient pressure to close surface and
give a uniform smooth finish free from trowel marks and other blemishes.

600 POWER GROUND FINISH TO WEARING SCREEDS


• Floating: To an even surface with no ridges or steps. Immediately commence curing.
• Grinding: When concrete is sufficiently hard for sand particles not to be torn from surface,
remove 1 - 2 mm from surface to give an even glass-paper texture, free from blemishes and
trowel marks.
• Cleaning: Remove dust and wash down. Resume curing without delay.

650 CURING
• General: Prevent premature drying. Immediately after laying, protect surface from wind,
draughts and strong sunlight. As soon as screed has set sufficiently, closely cover with
polyethylene sheeting.
• Curing period (minimum): Keep polyethylene sheeting in position for: period recommended by
screed manufacturer.
• Drying after curing: Allow screeds to dry gradually. Do not subject screeds to artificial drying
conditions that will cause cracking or other shrinkage related problems.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 203 of 367
screeds
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

670 ROOF SCREEDS


• Protection: Cover screeds during wet weather. When weathertight coverings are laid, screeds
must be as dry as practicable.

680 SURFACE SEALER TO WEARING SCREEDS


• Manufacturer: To Architects approval.
- Product reference: To Architects approval.
• Preparation: Clean cured screed surface to remove dirt, grease, oil and other surface
contaminants.
• Moisture content of screed: As recommended by sealer manufacturer. Test relative humidity to
BS 8203, Annex A if required to verify suitability to receive sealer.
• Application: Evenly to dry surfaces using sufficient coats to form an effective seal but without a
glossy finish.

690 SLIP RESISTANCE TESTING OF WEARING SCREEDS


• Test:
- To the relevant parts of BS 7976-1 and BS 7976 -2 using a TRL Pendulum.
- Make arrangements for test to be witnessed/ certified by: Engineer
• Report: Submit. Include slip resistance values in the wet and dry states.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M10 Cement based levelling/ wearing Page 204 of 367
screeds
M12
Resin flooring
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

M12 Resin flooring

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install resin/ epoxy flooring to basement car parks, BOH, fire
escape stairs, service rooms etc, etc. in accordance with this specification. The scope of work
includes but is not limited to:
- Proprietary resin/ epoxy flooring systems, associated materials/ additives etc. required to
comply with manufacturers printed instructions
- Associated jointing materials etc.
- Reinforcement overlays to conduits etc.
- Strip reinforcements.
- All joints, crack induced grooves etc.
- All movement joints.
- All jointing interfaces with associated interface works.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- The preparation of documents sufficient to determine the location and form of all associated
details.
- All proof documentation that the Contractor is an approved manufacturer applicator.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M12 Resin flooring Page 206 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF FLOORING

110B RESIN FLOORING TO GROUND FLOOR VEHICLE ENTRANCE RAMP


• Manufacturer: [BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel:
+971 4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect].
- Product reference: [Mastertop 1330 (polyurethane paint)].
• Surfaces: [Concrete slab carpark and ramp floor surfaces].
- Preparation: [As recommended by manufacturer].
- Colour: [Traffic Grey].
• Finishing coats: [The coating system shall acheive a thickness of 0.8kg/m² as per
manufacturers recommendation]. The paint system must be applied by a BASF approved
applicator.The system should meet or exceed the following performance criteria:
- Elongation DIN 53504: 100%
- Shore A Hardness: 80
- Taber Abrasion DIN 51963: 17mg
- Skid Resistance BS 812: 62 SKT
- Slip Resistance (TRL Test to BS7976-2:2002): >100
- Tensile Strength: >4.5N/mm2
- Fire Resistance: B2
• The product should be manufactured locally by a company certified to conform to the
requirements of the quality, environmental and occupational health & safety standards ISO
9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 and applied by a manufacturer certified specialist
applicator. This product includes road marking system.

110C RESIN FLOORING TO BOH STAIRS


• Substrate: Cement based leveling screed over in situ concrete slab.
- Preparation: As clauses 210, 220 230 .
• Resin flooring system:
- Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel:
+971 4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Resin flooring reference: Mastertop 1120T.
- Application: 2 coats of not less than 100 microns per coat / incorporating anti-slip aggregate.
- Colour: Traffic Grey.
- Surface finish/ treatment: As required by the manufacturer.
• Flatness/ Surface regularity:
- Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
- Classification of surface regularity to BS 8204-6: Not required.
• Other requirements: The product must be applied by a BASF approved applicator.
It shall be 100% volume solids and exhibit excellent impact and abrasion resistance and be
resistant to a wide range of chemicals. A minimum of two coats each of 100 microns shall be
applied to provide a durable, dust-free easily maintained surface for floors exposed to light
pedestrian or soft wheeled traffic. Solids content, by weight should be minimum 60%.
• The product should be manufactured by a company certified to conform to the requirements of
the quality, environmental and occupational health & safety standards ISO 9001, ISO 14001
and OHSAS 18001. Application Anti-slip: To achieve a non-slip surface immediately broadcast
MASTERTOP® AGGREGATE SRA No. 1 onto the wet base coat at the rate of 1.5- 2kg/m².
Excess aggregate to be removed before application of top coat.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M12 Resin flooring Page 207 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

110D RESIN FLOORING TO LOADING DOCK


• Manufacturer: [BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel:
+971 4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect].
- Product reference: [Mastertop 1324 ].
• Surfaces: [Cement based leveling screed over in situ concrete slab].
- Preparation: [Refer to manufacturers recommendations].
- Initial coats: [As recommended by manufacturer].
- Number of coats: [1].
- Finishing coats: [Polyurethane].
- Number of coats: [Refer to manufacturers recommendations].
- Colour: [Traffic Grey].
• The paint system must be applied by a BASF approved applicator. It must utilise an epoxidised
pre-conditioning coat to enhance adhesion and to prevent alkaline degradation of the
polyurethane system and meet or exceed the following performance criteria:
- System Thickness: minimum 1.5mm
- Tensile Strength: 30N/mm²
- Breaking Elongation DIN 53504: +/-10%
- Slip Resistance (TRL Test to BS7976-2:2002): >60
- Shore D Hardness: >75
- Elasticity Module DIN 53 457: 1200N/mm²
• The product must have an international track record in industrial, heavy traffic environments
and be covered by a 10 year manufacturer warranty. Chemical resistance complies with RILI /
DAFSEB 058 for chemically resistant flooring subject to high mechanical wear. The product
should be supplied by a company certified to conform to the requirements of the quality,
environmental and occupational health & safety standards ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS
18001 and shall be applied by a manufacturer endorsed and trained specialist applicator.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M12 Resin flooring Page 208 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

110E RESIN FLOORING TO MEP AREAS


• Substrate: Cement based leveling screed over in situ concrete slab.
- Preparation: As clauses 210, 220 230 .
• Resin flooring system:
- Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel:
+971 4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Resin flooring reference: Mastertop 1210 Plus.
- Application: 0.80mm.
- Colour: Traffic Grey.
- Surface finish/ treatment: As required by the manufacturer.
• Flatness/ Surface regularity:
- Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
- Classification of surface regularity to BS 8204-6: Not required.
• Other requirements: The product must be applied by a BASF approved applicator.
The hardened material after application shall achieve the following physical properties:
- Density: 1.53
- Absorption (ASTM C413-80): 0.06%
- Bond strength (DIN ISO 4624): 1.5N/mm² (concrete failure)
- Abrasion resistance (DIN Taber 53754): 98mg
- Modulus of elasticity (DIN 1048): 9000N/mm²
• The product should be manufactured locally by a company certified to conform to the
requirements of the quality, environmental and occupational health & safety standards ISO
9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 and shall be applied by a manufacturer endorsed and
trained.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES

210 TESTING MOISTURE CONTENT OF SUBSTRATES


• Drying aids: Remove minimum four days prior to test.
• Test: To BS 8203, Annex A using an accurately calibrated hygrometer.
- Location of readings: Corners, along edges, and at various points over the test area.
• Acceptability: Do not lay resin flooring until readings show 75% relative humidity or less .

220 SURFACE HARDNESS OF SUBSTRATES


• General: Substrates must restrain stresses that occur during setting and hardening of resin.
• Test for surface hardness: To BS EN 12504-2 using a rebound hammer.
• Test results: Submit.
• Areas of non compliance: Submit remedial proposals.

230 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES GENERALLY


• Chases/ Saw cuts: Cut/ break out at skirtings, free edges, movement joints, etc. for termination
of resin flooring.
• Blow holes, cavities, cracks, etc: Fill with repair product recommended by resin flooring
manufacturer.
• Cleanliness: Remove surface contaminants, debris, dirt and dust.
• Surface texture: Suitable to accept resin flooring and achieve a full bond over the complete
area.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M12 Resin flooring Page 209 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

LAYING FLOORING

310 WORKMANSHIP
• Operatives:
- Trained/ Experienced in the application of resin floorings.
- Evidence of training/ experience: Submit on request.
• Fillers and incorporated aggregates: Thoroughly mix in to ensure wetting. Avoid over-vigorous
mixing resulting in excessive air entrainment.
• Scattered aggregates: Broadcast onto wet surface of resin.
- Appearance: Consistent.
• Curing: Allow appropriate periods between coats and before surface treatments and trafficking/
use.

320 CONTROL SAMPLES


• Complete areas of finished work in the following locations: to be agreed for each type of resin
floor specified.
• Approval of appearance: Obtain before proceeding.

340 REINFORCEMENT
• Fabric: Glass fibre mat or as required by resin manufacturer.
- Locations: As per drawings.
- Laps (minimum): 50 mm.
- Bedding: Roll into preliminary thin layer of resin flooring.

350 COATED RESIN FLOORING


• Application: Even, of uniform thickness, surface finish and colour.

357 TROWEL APPLIED SCREEDED RESIN FLOORING


• Application: Even and thoroughly compacted, of uniform thickness, surface finish and colour.

360 SURFACE ABRADING/ POLISHING


• Surface on completion: Uniform, fine and dust free.

380 SURFACE SEALER


• Application: Even to completely wet resin surface.

400 BOND STRENGTH OF RESIN FLOORING


• Contact surfaces: Substrate and fully cured resin flooring.
• Bond: In accordance with manufacturer's performance data.
• Test: To BS 8204-6, clause 11.4 and BS EN 1542.

410 RESIN SKIRTINGS/ UPSTANDS


• Quality: Render grade resin.
• Colour: As flooring.
• Profile: Radius cove.
• Top edge of skirting/ upstand: Tuck into chase in the skirting or retain with stop bead.
• Transition with resin flooring: Strip movement joint.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M12 Resin flooring Page 210 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

420 FREE EDGES OF RESIN FLOORING


• Transition to abutting floor finishes: Straight and smooth.
• Retention of resin edges: as recommended by the manufacturer.

430 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS GENERALLY


• Location: Centre over movement joints in substrate.
• Preparation and application: As section Z22.
• Retention of resin edges: Saw cut in slab.
• Joint width: as recommended by resin flooring manufacturer.
• Sealant: Masterflex, or equal approved.
- Colour: Black.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M12 Resin flooring Page 211 of 367


M20
Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast coatings

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and apply/install internal and external plastered/ rendered coatings
to walls and soffits etc. as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with this specification.
The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Cement : lime :sand internal plaster coatings, associated reinforcement, stops and beads
etc.
- Cement sand external render coatings, associated stainless steel and heads etc. stainless
steel., beads etc.
- Associated jointing materials etc.
- Reinforcement overlays to conduits chases etc.
- Strip reinforcements.
- All joints, crack induced grooves etc.
- All movement joints.
- Surface sealers.
- All jointing interfaces with associated interface works.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- The preparation of documents sufficient to determine the location and form of all associated
details.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast Page 213 of 367
coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF COATING

110A CEMENT:LIME:SAND INTERNAL PLASTER


• Substrate: Concrete blockwork, as section F10.
- Preparation: Stipple keying coat as clause 538.
• Cement:lime:sand mortar:
- Type: Ready-mixed lime:sand.
- Pigment: Not required.
• Undercoats:
- M:lime:sand): Ready mixed to BS 4721 using sand to BS 1199, type A.
- Cement type: Portland.
- Admixture(s): will not be permitted without prior approval.
- Mix proportions: 1:4 to 1:6
• Final coat:
- Lime:sand mix): Ready mixed to BS 4721 using sand to BS 1199, type A.
- Cement type: Portland.
- Admixture(s): will not be permitted without prior approval.
- Mix proportions: 1:4 to 1:6.
- Finish: smooth with painted finish - RAL colour 9010.
- Overall thickness: 15-20mm (2 coats).
• Movement Joints: as per clause M20 / 651.
• Accessories: Stops and beads as clause 636.

110B EXTERNAL RENDER WITHOUT INSULATION


• Substrate: In-situ concrete, aerated blockwork, or other as indicated on the drawings.
• Manufacturer: Saudi BASF for Building Materials Co. (Jeddah Branch), Baladiyah Street, P.O.
Box 19465, Jeddah 21434, Saudi Arabia. Tel:+ 966 2 663 5019 or equal and approved by
Architect.
• Product Reference: BASF Senerflex System, or other equal and approved by Architect.
• Beads/ Trims: Aluminum angle beads incorporating reinforcing mesh. .
• Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave glass-fibre mesh treated for
compatibility with other materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh
tensile strength of not less than 21 dN/cm per EIMA 105.01, complying with ASTM D 578 and
the following requirements for minimum weight:
- Standard Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 140 g/sq. m.
• Waterproof Base-Coat Materials: Manufacturer's standard, powder base coat that requires on
site addition of water.
• Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-mixed 100% acrylic based primer for preparing base-
coat surface for application of finish coat.
• Finish-Coat Materials: Manufacturer's standard 100% acrylic-based coating complying with
the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials:
- Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, and fillers
• Decorative Finish: BASF Senerflex Fine
• Other Requirements: Texture and colour of render to match Insulated Render Finish as per
M21 / 210A.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast Page 214 of 367
coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

GENERAL

413 SAMPLES
• General: Provide representative samples of the following: sands, aggregates etc.

418 CONTROL SAMPLES


• Complete sample areas, being part of the finished work, in locations as follows: Internal plaster
5m² and External plaster 5m².

421 SCAFFOLDING
• General: Prevent putlog holes and other breaks in coatings.

MATERIALS AND MARKING OF MORTAR

430 READY-TO-USE CEMENT GAUGED RENDER MORTARS


• Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar manufacturer
- Retempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time limits.

438 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS


• Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.
Portland slag cement, CEM II.
Portland fly ash cement, CEM II.
- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.
• White cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.
- Type: Portland cement, CEM1.
- Strength class: 52.5.
• Sulfate resisting Portland cement: To BS 4027 and Kitemarked.
- Strength class: 42.5.
• Masonry cement: To BS EN 998-1 and Kitemarked.

440 SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


• Standard: To BS EN 13139.
- Grading: 0/2 or 0/4 (CP or MP); Category 2 fines.
• Colour and texture: Consistent. Obtain from one source.

443 LIME FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


• Standard: To BS EN 459-1.
- Type: CL 90S.

449 ADMIXTURES FOR CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


• Suitable admixtures: Select from:
- Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-2 and compatible with other mortar
constituents.
- Other admixtures: Submit proposals.
• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride and any admixture containing calcium chloride.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast Page 215 of 367
coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

450 CHLORIDE CONTENT OF MORTARS


• Chloride content (maximum): 0.1% by dry mass.

495 MIXING
• Render mortars (site prepared):
- Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.
- Mix proportions: Based on damp sand. Adjust for dry sand.
- Lime:sand: Mix thoroughly. Allow to stand, without drying out, for at least 16 hours before
using.
• Mixes: Of uniform consistence and free from lumps. Do not retemper or reconstitute mixes.
• Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.

PREPARING SUBSTRATES

510 SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES


• Soundness: Free from loose areas and significant cracks and gaps.
• Cutting, chasing, making good, fixing of conduits and services outlets and the like: Completed.
• Tolerances: Permitting specified flatness/ regularity of finished coatings.
• Cleanliness: Free from dirt, dust, efflorescence and mould, and other contaminants
incompatible with coatings.

527 RAKING OUT FOR KEY


• Joints in existing masonry: Rake out to a depth of 13 mm (minimum).
- Dust and debris: Remove from joints.

538 STIPPLE KEY


• Materials:
- Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.
- Sand: Clean, coarse.
- Admixture: SBR bonding agent, Agrément certified.
• Mix proportions (cement:sand): 1:1.5-2.
• Consistency: Thick slurry, well stirred.
• Application: Brushed and stippled to form deep, close textured key.
• Curing: Controlled to achieve a firm bond to substrate.

BACKINGS/ BEADS/ JOINTS

600 ADDITIONAL FRAMING SUPPORTS FOR BACKINGS


• Framing: Accurately position and securely fix to give full support to fixtures, fittings and service
outlets.
• Support board edges and perimeters: As recommended by board manufacturer to suit type
and performance of board.

630 BEADS/ STOPS FOR INTERNAL USE IN GENERAL


• Material: Galvanized steel to BS EN 13658-1.

636 BEADS/ STOPS FOR EXTERNAL USE GENERALLY


• Material: Stainless steel to BS EN 10088-1, grade 1.4301.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast Page 216 of 367
coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

640 BEADS/ STOPS GENERALLY


• Location: External angles and stop ends except where specified otherwise.
• Corners: Neat mitres at return angles.
• Fixing: Secure, using longest possible lengths, plumb, square and true to line and level,
ensuring full contact of wings with substrate.
- Beads/ stops for external render: Fix mechanically.
• Finishing: After coatings have been applied, remove surplus material while still wet, from
surfaces of beads/ stops exposed to view.

646 CRACK CONTROL AT JUNCTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR SOLID SUBSTRATES


• Locations: Where defined movement joints are not required. Where dissimilar solid substrate
materials are in same plane and rigidly bonded or tied together.
• Crack control materials:
- Isolating layer: Building paper to BS 1521.
- Metal lathing: Internally: Galvanized steel plain expanded metal with spacers.
• Installation: Fix metal lathing over isolating layer. Stagger fixings along both edges of lathing.
• Width of installation over single junctions:
- Isolating layer: 150 mm.
- Lathing: 300 mm.
• Width of installation across face of dissimilar substrate material (column, beam, etc. with face
width not greater than 450 mm):
- Isolating layer: 25 mm (minimum) beyond junctions with adjacent substrate.
- Lathing: 100 mm (minimum) beyond edges of isolating layer.

651 CONSTRUCTION / MOVEMENT JOINTS TO INTERNAL PLASTER


• Manufacturer: Saudi BASF for Building Materials Co. (Jeddah Branch), Baladiyah Street, P.O.
Box 19465, Jeddah 21434, Saudi Arabia. Tel:+ 966 2 663 5019 or equal and approved by
Architect.
- Product reference: Masterflex 472 or Sonolastic 150.
• Panel Size: To be a maximum of 20 square metres.
• Joint Width:To suit that of structural movement joint in substrate, to allow for a + or - 3mm
movement.
• Plaster/Render Stop Beads: As per M20 / 640.
• Installation: Centred over joint in substrate.
• Other Requirements: For external render, metal lathing additional movment joints will be
required at maximum intervals of 5 metres.

652 CONSTRUCTION / MOVEMENT JOINTS TO EXTERNAL RENDER


• Location: Install at locations indicated, where required by Render manufacturer, and as
follows:
- Where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind Render.
- Where Render adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction.
- At floor lines in multilevel construction.
- Where wall height changes.
• Formation: Accurately to detail.
• Modifications to joint locations/ design: Agree revisions before proceeding.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast Page 217 of 367
coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

659 PLASTERBOARD JOINTS


• Joints and angles (except where coincident with metal beads). Reinforce with continuous
lengths of jointing tape.

673 PLASTERING OVER CONDUITS/ SERVICE CHASES


• General: Prevent cracking over conduits and other services.
• Services chased into substrate: Isolate from coating by covering with galvanized metal lathing,
fixed at staggered centres along both edges.

INTERNAL PLASTERING

710 APPLICATION GENERALLY


• Application of coatings: Firmly and in one continuous operation between angles and joints.
Achieve good adhesion.
• Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges,
cracks and crazing.
- Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and corners to a right
angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals plumb and square.
• Drying out: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out.

715 FLATNESS/ SURFACE REGULARITY


• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Deviation of plaster surface: Measure from underside of a straight edge placed anywhere on
surface.
- Permissible deviation (maximum) for plaster not less than 13 mm thick: 3 mm in any
consecutive length of 1800 mm.

720 DUBBING OUT


• General: Correct substrate inaccuracies.
• New smooth dense concrete and similar surfaces: Dubbing out prohibited unless total plaster
thickness is within range recommended by plaster manufacturer.
• Thickness of any one coat (maximum): 10 mm.
• Mix: As undercoat.
• Application: Achieve firm bond. Allow each coat to set sufficiently before the next is applied.
Cross scratch surface of each coat.

725 UNDERCOATS GENERALLY


• General: Rule to an even surface. Cross scratch to provide a key for the next coat.
• Undercoats on metal lathing: Work well into interstices to obtain maximum key.
• Undercoats gauged with Portland cement: Do not apply next coat until drying shrinkage is
substantially complete.

742 THIN COAT PLASTER


• Preparation for plasters less than 2 mm thick: Fill holes, scratches and voids with finishing
plaster.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast Page 218 of 367
coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

747 PROJECTION PLASTER


• Application: Evenly and in one continuous operation between angles and joints.
• Finish: A level open textured surface before finishing manually.

777 SMOOTH FINISH


• Appearance: A tight, matt, smooth surface with no hollows, abrupt changes of level or trowel
marks. Avoid water brush, excessive trowelling and over polishing.

EXTERNAL RENDERING

810 APPLICATION GENERALLY


• Application of coatings: Firmly and in one continuous operation between angles and joints.
Achieve good adhesion.
• Appearance of finished surfaces: Even and consistent. Free from rippling, hollows, ridges,
cracks and crazing.
- Accuracy: Finish to a true plane, to correct line and level, with angles and corners to a right
angle unless specified otherwise, and with walls and reveals plumb and square.
• Drying: Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out.

811 EXTERNAL RENDER INSTALLATION


• Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in
writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1.6-mm dry-coat thickness.
• Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free
installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 64 mm or otherwise
treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and manufacturer's written requirements. Do not
lap reinforcing mesh within 204 mm of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional
base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.
- Standard impact reinforcing mesh.

856 FINAL COAT - PLAIN FLOATED FINISH


• Finish: Even, open texture free from laitance.

880 CURING AND DRYING


• General: Prevent premature setting and uneven drying of each coat.
• Curing coatings: Keep each coat damp by covering with polyethylene sheet and/ or spraying
with water.
- Curing period (minimum): 4 days.
- Final coat: Hang sheeting clear of the final coat.
• Drying: Allow each coat to dry thoroughly, with drying shrinkage substantially complete before
applying next coat.
• Protection: Protect from frost and rain.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M20 Plastered/ Rendered/ Roughcast Page 219 of 367
coatings
M30
Metal lathing/ anchored mesh reinforcement for
plastered/ rendered coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

M30 Metal lathing/ anchored mesh reinforcement for plastered/


rendered coatings

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

TYPES OF LATH/ REINFORCEMENT

110 METAL LATH TO JOINTS IN RENDER SUSBSTRATE


• Substrate: Concrete blockwork and in-situ concrete structure.
• Lath: EN 13658-1, CLS.
- Grade: Z275 for galvanised steel.
- Finish: Not required.
• Additional requirements: Stainless Steel Lath to external applications and galvanised Lath to
internal applications.

PRODUCTS

215 METAL LATH


• Internal applications: Flat, corrugated and ribbed expanded lath to BS EN 13658-1.
• External applications: Flat, corrugated and ribbed expanded lath to BS EN 13658-2.
• Galvanized steel: To BS EN 10327 and BS EN 10143.
• Stainless steel: To BS EN 10088-1 and -2, number 1.4301 (name X5CrNi18-10).

235 WIRE
• Zinc coated mild steel wire:
- Wire ties: Soft annealed steel tying wire.
- Wire: To BS 10218-2.
- Zinc coating: To BS EN 10244-2.
• Stainless steel wire: To BS EN 10088-3, number 1.4301 or 1.4541 (name X5CrNi18-10 or
X6CrNiTi18-10).

285A FIXINGS
• Nails: 38 x 2 mm galvanized steel clout nails to BS 1202-1 for internal applications, stainless
steel nails to be used externally.
• Staples: 32 x 2 mm galvanized steel for internal applications, stainless steel staples to be used
externally.

EXECUTION

325 SUPPORTS
• Fixing: Secure, rigid and accurate.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M30 Metal lathing/ anchored mesh Page 221 of 367
reinforcement for plastered/ rendered
coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

410 FIXING EXPANDED METAL LATH


• Requirement: Fixed securely to give a taut, firm base for plaster or render.
• Placement:
- Orientation: Long way of mesh at right angles to supports.
- Strands:
Horizontal lath: Sloping in same direction.
Vertical lath: Sloping downwards away from outer face.
• Laps:
- Sides (minimum): 25 mm.
- Ends (minimum): 50 mm at supports.
- Angles and bends: Do not locate laps within 100 mm of angles or bends.
• Fixing:
- Generally: 100 mm centres.
- Sides and ends at supports: 1.2 mm wire ties.
Centres (maximum): 150 mm.

450 FIXING ANCHORED MESH REINFORCEMENT


• Dubbing out: Complete before placing mesh.
• Placement:
- Orientation: Horizontal wires outwards.
- Panels: Locate between movement joints.
• Fixing:
- Edges: Tie tightly together.
- Fasteners: Locate where wires cross.
- Spacers: 4 mm thick stainless steel or plastics washers on each fastener.
- Fixing mesh to fasteners: Select from:
1.2 mm stainless steel wire ties; or
Cramp with stainless steel washers placed on each fastener on the inner and outer faces of
mesh.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M30 Metal lathing/ anchored mesh Page 222 of 367
reinforcement for plastered/ rendered
coatings
M40
Stone/ ceramic tiling
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries..

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install ceramic tiling and natural stone covering in accordance
with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Ceramic tiling walls.
- Ceramic tiling to floors
- Natural stone covering
- All adhesive fixings.
- All grouting etc.
- All movement joints, expansion joints etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with all specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details, setting out, including joints, edge details, expansion joint, service penetrations,
abutments stops, steps and interface details to adjacent construction.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 224 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF TILING/ MOSAIC

110A TILING TO FLOORS OF B.o.H AREAS AS INDICATED


• Tiles: Ceramic.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: Arabuild L.L.C - or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O Box 25211, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 2226131. Fax: 00971 4 2214322.
Contact: Junaid Hameed.
- Product reference: P60117, Daroma Ceramic, Rustic Porcelain Tile.
- Colour: Grey.
- Finish: Matt, non-slip.
- Size: 600 x 600 mm.
- Thickness: 8mm.
- Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum)/ Pendulum test value (PVT) (minimum) to BS 7932
or BS EN 14231 (natural stone only): tba.
- Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134: tba.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
• Background/ Base: Cement:sand render.
- Preparation: Smooth.
• Intermediate substrate: Not applicable.
• Bedding: Cement based tile adhesive.
- Reinforcement: Not applicable.
- Adhesive: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 40 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Colour: Grey.
- Plastic density: 1800 kg/m³
• Joint width: 2mm.
• Grout: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 530 LM or equal and approved by Architect.
• Movement joints: Provide movement joints over Structural movement joints and where tiling is
continuous across junctions of different bases.
• Accessories: None.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 225 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

110B TILING TO FLOORS OF BOH AREAS WITH FLOOR GULLIES


• Tiles: Ceramic.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: Arabuild L.L.C - or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O Box 25211, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 2226131. Fax: 00971 4 2214322.
Contact: Junaid Hameed.
- Product reference: P60117, Daroma Ceramic, Rustic Porcelain Tile.
- Colour: Grey.
- Finish: Matt, non-slip.
- Size: 300 x 300 mm.
- Thickness: 8mm.
- Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum)/ Pendulum test value (PVT) (minimum) to BS 7932
or BS EN 14231 (natural stone only): tba.
- Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134: tba.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
• Background/ Base: Cement:sand render.
- Preparation: Smooth.
• Intermediate substrate: Not applicable.
• Bedding: Cement based tile adhesive.
- Reinforcement: Not applicable.
- Adhesive: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 40 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Colour: Grey.
- Plastic density: 1800 kg/m³
• Joint width: 2mm.
• Grout: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 530 LM or equal and approved by Architect.
• Movement joints: Provide movement joints over Structural movement joints and where tiling is
continuous across junctions of different bases.
• Accessories: None.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 226 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

110C TILING TO WALLS OF B.o.H DRY AREAS AS INDICATED


• Tiles: Ceramic.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: Arabuild L.L.C - or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O Box 25211, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 2226131. Fax: 00971 4 2214322.
Contact: Junaid Hameed.
- Product reference: Daroma Polished - code: TB6001BT.
- Colour: Cream / Off-White.
- Finish: Glazed - Polished.
- Size: 600 x 600 mm.
- Thickness: 8mm.
- Slip resistance value (SRV) (minimum)/ Pendulum test value (PVT) (minimum) to BS 7932
or BS EN 14231 (natural stone only): tba.
- Surface roughness (Rz) (minimum) to BS 1134: tba.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
• Background/ Base: Cement:sand render.
- Preparation: Smooth.
• Intermediate substrate: Not applicable.
• Bedding: Cement based tile adhesive.
- Reinforcement: Not applicable.
- Adhesive: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 40 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Colour: Grey.
- Plastic density:1800 kg/m³
• Joint width: 2mm.
• Grout: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 530 LM or equal and approved by Architect.
- Type/ classification: as per manufacturers recommendation.
• Movement joints: Provide movement joints over the following;
Perimeter: As clause 815 at all perimeters including door thresholds around columns etc.,
Structural: As clause 835 to coincide with structural movement joints.
• Accessories: none.
• Other Requirements: Colour to have no inconsistencies and to match colour of ceramic tile
M40 / 110D.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 227 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

110D TILING TO WALLS OF BOH WET AREAS AS INDICATED


• Tiles: Ceramic.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: Arabuild L.L.C - or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O Box 25211, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 2226131. Fax: 00971 4 2214322.
Contact: Junaid Hameed.
- Product reference: Daroma MW 6002 Matt.
- Colour: Cream / Off-white.
- Finish: Matt.
- Size: 600 x 600 mm or 300 x 300mm depending on size of floor tile specified for room. Size
of tile to match floor tile..
- Thickness: 8mm.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
• Background/ Base: Cement:sand render.
- Preparation: Smooth.
• Waterproofing Substrate: [BASF Thoroseal FX100 applied to wet area walls prior to adhesive
in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.]
• Bedding: Cement based tile adhesive.
- Adhesive: [BASF Mastertile 30 and Mastertile 200 or equal and approved by Architect]
- Reinforcement: Around penetrations such as light fittings, the contractor is to apply BASF
Concresive 2020.
• Joint width: 2 mm.
• Grout: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 550 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Type/ classification: as per manufacturers recommendation.
• Movement joints: Provide movement joints over Structural movement joints and where tiling is
continuous across junction of different bases.
• Accessories: None.
• Other Requirements: Colour to have no inconsistencies and to match colour of ceramic tile
M40 / 110C.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 228 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

110E TILING TO WALLS OF BOH KITCHEN AREAS


• Tiles: Ceramic.
- Manufacturer/ Supplier: Arabuild L.L.C - or equal and approved by Architect.
- Address: P.O Box 25211, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 2226131. Fax: 00971 4 2214322.
Contact: Junaid Hameed.
- Product reference: CINCA.
- Colour: White.
- Finish: Glazed.
- Size: 200 x 300 mm tile.
- Thickness: 8mm.
- Recycled content: Not applicable.
• Background/ Base: Cement:sand render.
- Preparation: Smooth.
• Intermediate substrate: Not applicable.
• Bedding: Cement based tile adhesive.
- Reinforcement: Not applicable.
- Adhesive: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 40 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Colour: grey.
- Plastic density: 1800 kg/m³
• Joint width: 2 mm.
• Grout: BASF Construction Chemical's Mastertile 530 LM or equal and approved by Architect.
Type/ classification: as per manufacturers recommendation.
• Movement joints: Provide movement joints over the following;
Perimeter: As clause 815 at all perimeters including door thresholds around columns etc.,
Structural: As clause 835 to coincide with structural movement joints.
• Accessories: none.

115A NATURAL STONE COVERING TO BOH VANITY BENCHTOPS


• Location: Staff Toilets
• Type: Purpose-made granite benchtop.
• Supplier: [POLYCOR INC, Saudi Arabia. Tel: 1-418-692-4695 or equal and approved by
Architect]
• Stone: Picasso - Granite
• Size: refer to Architect's drawings.
• Edges: Smooth
• Other Requirements: Cut-outs for wash basins. Contractor to submit a 300 x 300mm stone
sample for Architect approval prior to installation.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 229 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

GENERAL

210 SUITABILITY OF BACKGROUNDS/ BASES


• Background/ base tolerances: To permit specified flatness/ regularity of finished surfaces given
the permissible minimum and maximum thickness of bedding.
• New background drying times (minimum):
- Concrete walls: 6 weeks.
- Brick/ block walls: 6 weeks.
- Rendering: 2 weeks.
- Gypsum plaster: 4 weeks.
• New base drying times (minimum):
- Concrete slabs: 6 weeks.
- Cement:sand screeds: 3 weeks.

215 FALLS IN THE BASES


• General: Give notice if falls are inadequate.

220 SWIMMING POOL TILING


• Watertightness of pool base/ substrate structure: Test and prove to be watertight.
• Time intervals between stages of the work (minimum):
- Completion (curing) of pool shell to start of rendering/ screeding/ tiling: 6 weeks
- Completion of rendering/ screeding to start of tiling: 3 weeks
- Completion of tiling to start of grouting: 3 days
- Completion of grouting and sealing of movement joints to filling of pool: 3 weeks.
• Filling, emptying and heating pool: Minimize stresses.
- Maximum filling and emptying rate: 750 mm/24 hour.
- Maximum rate of heating water: 0.25°C/hour.

250 SAMPLES
• General: Submit representative samples of the following:
1m² of each of the following tile types: M40/110A, M40/110B, M40/110C, M40/110D.

252 NATURAL STONE SAMPLES


• General: Submit samples in accordance with BS EN 12057, clause 4.2.3.2.

PREPARATION

370 NEW IN SITU CONCRETE


• Backrounds/ bases to be tiled: Remove mould oil, surface retarders and other materials
incompatible with bedding.

380 NEW PLASTER


• Plaster: Dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter.
• Plaster primer: Apply if recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 230 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

431 STIPPLING FOR KEY


• Stipple mix:
- Cement: Portland to BS EN 197-1 type CEM I/42.5.
- Sand: Clean coarse.
- Proportions (cement:sand): 1-1.5:2.
- Admixture: BBA certified SBR bonding agent.
• Application/ finish: Brush applied to a deep close texture.
• Curing/ drying: Keep damp until hardened. Dry out to provide securely bonded finish.

438 PREPARING CONCRETE BASES FOR FULLY BONDED BEDDING


• Surface cement:sand matrix: Remove to expose coarse aggregate.
• Surface preparation: Suitable to achieve a full bond with bedding. Select from:
- Keep well wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bonding coat.
Slurry: SBR polymer modified cement.
- Prepare, prime as necessary and apply a bonding agent.
Bonding agent: BBA certified SBR bonding agent.

460 SMOOTHING UNDERLAYMENT


• Type: Recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
• Condition: Allow to dry before tiling.

FIXING

510 FIXING GENERALLY


• Colour/shade: Unintended variations within tiles for use in each area/room are not permitted.
- Variegated tiles: Mix thoroughly.
• Adhesive: Compatible with background/base. Prime if recommended by adhesive
manufacturer.
• Cut tiles: Neat and accurate.
• Fixing: Provide adhesion over entire background/base and tile backs.
• Final appearance: Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to give true,
regular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.
• Surplus bedding material: Clean from joints and face of tiles without disturbing tiles.

530 SETTING OUT


• Joints: True to line, continuous and without steps.
- Joints on walls: Horizontal, vertical and aligned round corners.
- Joints in floors: Parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.
• Cut tiles: Minimize number, maximize size and locate unobtrusively.
• Joints in adjoining floors and walls: Align.
• Joints in adjoining floors and skirtings: Align.
• Movement joints: Where locations are not indicated, submit proposals.
• Setting out of tiling : Drawing references: tba.
• Setting out of --- : Submit proposals.

540 LEVEL OF FLOOR TILING


• Permissible deviation in level from datum for floor tiling to be 5 ± mm.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 231 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

550 FLATNESS/ REGULARITY OF TILING


• Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
• Deviation of surface: Measure from underside of a 2 m straightedge placed anywhere on
surface. The straightedge should not be obstructed by the tiles and no gap should be greater
than 3 mm.

560 LEVEL OF TILING ACROSS JOINTS


• Deviation (maximum) between tile surfaces either side of any type of joint:
- 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide.
- 2 mm for joints 6 mm or greater in width.

600 SIT-ON TILE SKIRTINGS


• Sequence: Bed solid to wall after laying floor tiles.
• Bedding: Cement based adhesive.

670 THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (WALLS)


• Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background. Comb surface.
• Tiling: Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles firmly onto float coat.
• Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.

710 THICK BED ADHESIVE - SOLID (FLOORS)


• Application: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb surface.
• Tiling: Apply coat of adhesive to backs of tiles filling depressions or keys. Press tiles firmly into
position.
• Finished adhesive thickness: Within range recommended by manufacturer.

MOVEMENT JOINTS/ GROUTING/ COMPLETION

815 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS TO TILING IN GENERAL


• Joints: Extend through tiles and bedding to base/ background. Centre over joints in base/
background.
- Width: 10 mm .
• Sealant: submit for architect approval .
- Colour: to match tiles .
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

835A METAL SECTION MOVEMENT JOINTS OVER STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT JOINTS


• Manufacturer: Vexcolt.
- Address: The Sidings, Redlake Trading Estate, Ivybridge, Devon, PL21 0EZ , UK. Tel: +44
(0) 1752 894133. Fax:+44 (0) 1752 691933 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: React 401-A01-025 .
- Colour: aluminium finish .
• Joint width: 30mm structural joint.
• Installation: Centre over joints in base. Set to exact finished level of floor.
• Fixing to base: Stainless steel screw fixed to slab, washers and plugs at 300mm crs .

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 232 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

875 GROUTING
• Sequence: Grout when bed/adhesive has set sufficient to prevent disturbance of tiles.
• Joints: 6 mm deep (or depth of tile if less). Free from dust and debris.
• Grouting: Fill joints completely, tool to profile, clean off surface. Leave free from blemishes.
- Profile: flush.
• Polishing: When grout is hard, polish tiling with a dry cloth.

885 COLOURED GROUT


• Staining of tiles: Not permitted
• Evaluating risk of staining: Apply grout to a few tiles in a small trial area. If discoloration occurs
apply a protective sealer to tiles and repeat trial.

890 SPARES
• Contractor to supply the Client with 15m2 of each ceramic and stone tile type for spares and
maintenance.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M40 Stone/ ceramic tiling Page 233 of 367
M50
Vinyl/ carpet
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

M50 Vinyl/ carpet

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor is to supply and install Vinyl and Carpet flooring in accordance with this
specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Vinyl to floors including all coved skirting, welding rods etc.
- Carpet to floors
- All adhesive fixings.
- All granting etc.
- All movement joints, expansion joints etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with all specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details, setting out, including joints, edge details, expansion joint, service penetrations,
abutments stops, steps and interface details to adjacent construction.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M50 Vinyl/ carpet Page 235 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF COVERING

150A VINYL SHEETING TO SERVICE LIFTS FLOOR


• Manufacturer: To be supplied by Lift Manufacturer.
• Preparation: As required by vinyl applicator.
• Fabricated underlay: n/a.
• Flooring roll: to EN 13845 / 13553.
- Manufacturer: by lift supplier.
Product reference: Not applicable.
- BS EN 685 class: 33.
- Recycled content: Submit proposals.
- Width: to suit size of lift floor.
- Thickness: as per manufacturer's standard.
- Colour/ pattern: to be selected and approved by Architect once Lift Supplier is confirmed.
• Adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): As clause 640.
• Seam welding: Hot welding with complimentary coloured rod.
• Accessories: as per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Finishing: Seal and polish.
• Other requirements: Contractor to submit a 600 x 600mm sample of the Vinyl to the Architect
for approval prior to installation..

170A CARPET TILES To Back of House Offices


• Location: as indicated on Architect's drawings.
• Base: Power floated concrete.
- Preparation: As required by carpet applicator.
• Carpet Tile:
- Manufacturer: Ege Carpets, JLT, Dubai. tel: +971 4 375 6490.
Product reference: Epoca Classic Modular. Ref No: 068251048.
- Type: Tufted loop pile.
- BS EN 1307 classification:
Category: n/a.
Level of use class: 33 Commercial Heavy.
Luxury rating class: n/a.
- Recycled content: n/a.
- Size: 480 x 480mm carpet tiles as per maunfacturer's standard.
- Colour/ pattern: Medium Blue.
• Carpet adhesive (and primer if recommended by manufacturer): As clause 640.
• Accessories: Skirtings as per clause P20 / 200.
• Other requirements: Contractor to submit a 480 x 480mm sample carpet tile to the Architect for
approval prior to installation. Contractor to supply a minimum of 30 carpet tiles for spares and
maintenance by the Operator as per clause M50 / 880A.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

210 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY


• Base condition after preparation: Rigid, dry, sound, smooth and free from grease, dirt and
other contaminants.
• Finished coverings: Accurately fitted, tightly jointed, securely bonded, smooth and free from air
bubbles, rippling, adhesive marks and stains.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M50 Vinyl/ carpet Page 236 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

220 SAMPLES
• Covering samples: Before placing orders, submit representative sample of each type.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES


• General: Complete areas of finished work in approved locations as follows, and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding: to be agreed .

330 COMMENCEMENT
• Required condition of works prior to laying materials:
- Building is weathertight and well dried out.
- Wet trades have finished work.
- Paintwork is finished and dry.
- Conflicting overhead work is complete.
- Floor service outlets, duct covers and other fixtures around which materials are to be cut are
fixed.
• Notification: Submit not less than 48 hours before commencing laying.

340 CONDITIONING
• Prior to laying: Condition materials by unpacking and separating in spaces where they are to
be laid. Maintain resilient flooring rolls in an upright position. Unroll carpet and keep flat on a
supporting surface.
• Conditioning time and temperature (minimum): As recommended by manufacturer with time
extended by a factor of two for materials stored or transported at a temperature of less than
10°C immediately prior to laying.

350 ENVIRONMENT
• Temperature and humidity: Before, during and after laying, maintain approximately at levels
which will prevail after building is occupied.
• Ventilation: Before during and after laying, maintain adequate provision.

PREPARING BASES

410 NEW BASES


• Suitability of bases and conditions within any area: Commencement of laying of coverings will
be taken as acceptance of suitability.

430 NEW WET LAID BASES


• Base drying aids: Not used for at least four days prior to moisture content testing.
• Base moisture content test: Carry out in accordance with BS 5325, Annexe A or BS 8203,
Annexe A.
- Locations for readings: In all corners, along edges, and at various points over area being
tested.
• Commencement of laying coverings: Not until all readings show 75% relative humidity or less.

440 SUBSTRATES TO RECEIVE THIN COVERINGS


• Trowelled finishes: Uniform, smooth surface free from trowel marks and other blemishes.
Abrade suitably to receive specified floor covering material.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M50 Vinyl/ carpet Page 237 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

LAYING COVERINGS

610 SETTING OUT TILES


• Method: Set out from centre of area/ room, so that wherever possible:
- Tiles along opposite edges are of equal size.
- Edge tiles are more than 50% of full tile width.

620 COLOUR CONSISTENCY


• Finished work in any one area/ room: Free from banding or patchiness.

640 ADHESIVE FIXING GENERALLY


• Adhesive type: As specified, as recommended by covering/ underlay, manufacturer or as
approved.
• Primer: Type and usage as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
• Application: As necessary to achieve good bond.
• Finished surface: Free from trowel ridges, high spots caused by particles on the substrate, and
other irregularities.

700 LOOSE LAID CARPET TILES


• Areas of adhered tiles: Secure using double sided tape or peelable adhesive.
• Joints: Butted.
- Perimeter joints: Accurately cut to match abutment and prevent movement.

720 DOORWAYS
• Joint location: On centre line of door leaf.

740 EDGINGS AND COVER STRIPS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals to Engineer for approval .
- Product reference: n/a .
• Material/ finish: Stainless steel .
• Fixing: Secure with edge of covering gripped. Use matching fasteners where exposed to view

750 STAIR NOSINGS AND TRIMS


• Manufacturer: Contractor's choice, submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Metal strip as per architect's detail.
• Material/ finish: Aluminium with cover strip insert.
• Fixing: Secure, level and with mitred joints. Adjusted to suit thickness of covering with
continuous packing strips of hardboard or plywood. Nosings and packing strips bedded in gap-
filling adhesive recommended by nosing manufacturer.
- Screw fixing with matching plugs: Required.

COMPLETION

880A SPARES
• Spare covering material: Retain suitable material for patching. On completion submit pieces for
selection. Hand over selected pieces to Employer.
• Contractor to supply a minimum of 30 carpet tiles for spares and maintenance by the Operator

Issue 0: Construction Documents M50 Vinyl/ carpet Page 238 of 367


M60
Painting/clear finishing
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

M60 Painting/clear finishing

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and apply paint and clear finishing coatings in accordance with this
specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Initial, undercoat and finishing emulsion coatings to internal surface.
- Initial, undercoat and finishing gloss coatings to internal surfaces.
- Initial, undercoat and finishing coats to basement carpark wall and ceiling surface etc.
- All preparation works.
- All proof certificate to comply with the specification and data to prove suitability of materials
for the proposed application and where specialist coatings are specified these are
undertaken by manufacturer approved applicators.
- Special epoxy resin coatings to walls and ceilings, garbage, transformer rooms etc

COATING SYSTEMS

110A EMULSION PAINT TO INTERNAL PLASTERED SURFACES (DRY AREAS)


• Manufacturer: Jotun Paints Co LLC, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815
or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Fenomastic Stain Resistant Emulsion - Matt.
- Colour: Refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Surfaces: Internal plaster / blockwork / concrete / gypsum.
- Preparation: Refer Jotun Technical Data Sheet .
- Application: Roller / Spray / Brush
• Initial coats: One coat PVA Primer - as recommended by manufacturer
• Smoothening Coats: 2 coats Stucco a pva co-polymer based putty - as recommended by
manufacturer
• Finishing Coats: 2 full coats Fenomastic Stain Resistant Emulsion Matt - as recommended by
manufacturer
• Other requirements: The paint system must be applied by a Jotun approved applicator.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 240 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

110B EXTERIOR PAINT TO EXTERNAL SURFACES


• Manufacturer: Jotun Paints Co LLC, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815
or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference : Jotashield Tex Medium with Jotashield SuperDurable Matt finish.
- Colour: Refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Surface(s): Render / Concrete
- Preparation: Refer to Jotun Technical Data Sheet
- Application: Roller/ Spray / Brush
• Initial Coat/Primer: One coat Jotashield Alkali Resistant Primer - as recommended by
manufacturer
• Finishing Coats: as per manufacturer's recommendations, to match finish of M21 / 210.

110C HYGENIC PAINT TO INTERNAL PLASTERED SURFACES (WET AREAS)


• Manufacturer: Jotun Paints Co LLC, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815
or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Fenomastic Hygiene - Semi Gloss.
- Colour: Refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.
• Surfaces: Internal plaster / blockwork / concrete / gypsum.
- Preparation: Refer Jotun Technical Data Sheet .
- Application: Roller / Spray / Brush
• Initial coats: One coat PVA Primer - as recommended by manufacturer
• Smoothening Coats: 2 coats Stucco a pva co-polymer based putty - as recommended by
manufacturer
• Finishing Coats: 2 full coats Fenomastic Hygiene - as recommended by manufacturer
• Other requirements: The paint system must be applied by a Jotun approved applicator.

130A ALKYD ENAMEL PAINT SYSTEM TO INTERNAL SKIRTINGS, TRIMS, CASEMENTS ETC
• Manufacturer: Jotun Paints Co LLC, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815
or equal and approved by Architect.
• Type: Non Yellowing Lead Free Alkyd Finish.
• Surface(s): Timber
- Preparation:Sanding and dust free
• Initial Coats: One coat of 'Bengalac Wood Primer'
• Smoothening Coats: 2 coats PVA Co-polymer based Stucco filler.
• Middle Coat: 1 coat 'Fenomastic Enamel Matt' Lead Free non-yellowing alkyd finish flat
• Finishing Coats: 2 coats 'Fenomastic Enamel Semi-Gloss' *Lead Free non-yellowing alkyd
finish semi gloss

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 241 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

160 DECORATIVE WOODSTAIN/ VARNISH/ PRESERVATIVE TO TIMBER FEATURES ON


ROOF TERRACE
• Manufacturer: Renner Wood Coatings, First Group, Unit No. 2H-05-259, Floor No. 5, Building
No. 2, Plot No. 550-554, J&G, DMCC, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 343 9199, Fax: +971 4 343
2080 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: T30 Castagno - Chestnut .
• Surfaces: Timber .
- Preparation: Sanding, sound surface .
• Initial coats: as per manufacturer's recommendations for external use .
- Number of coats: As recommended by manufacturer .
• Finishing coats: as per manufacturer's recommendations .
- Number of coats: as per manufacturer's recommendations .

175A PROTECTIVE COATING TO GROUT & STONE


• Manufacturer: Laticrete International Inc, 1 Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423,
USA - Tel: (203) 393 0010 ext 235.
- Product reference: Laticrete 190 Sealer.
• Type: Invisible, penetrating sealer that protects against stains, soiling, discolouration and
efflorescence..
- Preparation: All Stone surfaces to be sealed must be clean and dry. Surface temperature
should be between 7 - 30 degrees. Allow cements, stucco and mortars to cure 24 hours
before applying sealer. Protect aluminium and glass surfaces from direct prolonged
exposure to 190 sealer..
• Application: Apply sealer with a sponge, brush or sprayer.
• Number of coats: As recommended by manufacturer
• Other Requirements: All sides of stone to be sealed. Clean with fresh water after use, do not
allow dried residue to remain on polished surfaces, glass or aluminium.

180A FLOOR SEALER TO BASEMENTS


• Manufacturer: [BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel:
+971 4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect].
- Product reference: [Mastertop 20].
• Surfaces: [concrete floor slab].
- Preparation & Application: [as per manufacturer's recommendations].
- No. of coats: 2 coats minimum - as per manufacturers recommendations.
• Other Requirements: new concrete should be allowed to cure fully for a minimum of 21 days
before the floor sealer is applied. Care should be taken to protect glass, paintwork, blockwork,
furnishings etc from splashes. Do not use the floor sealer on coloured concrete or masonry.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 242 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

195A SPECIAL COATING TO EXPOSED STEELWORK


• Manufacturer: Jotun Paints Co LLC, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971 4 347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815
or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Steel Paint.
• Colour: Refer to Architect's Finishes Schedule for RAL Colour
• Surfaces: Galvanised steelwork.
- Preparation: Wash down and degrease with Jotun Heavy Duty Cleaner - refer to
manufacturer's recommendations.
• Initial coats: Jotun Penguard Special at 80 microns - refer to manufacturer's recommendations.
- Number of coats: 1 coat.
• Undercoats: Jotun Penguard Midcoat at 100 microns - refer to manufacturer's
recommendations.
- Number of coats: 1 coat.
• Finishing coats: Jotun Hardtop XP at 65 microns - refer to manufacturer's recommendations.
- Number of coats: 1 coat.
• Surface preparation: All surfaces should be clean, dry and free from contamination. The
surface should be assessed and treated in accordance with ISO 8504.

195B SPECIAL COATING EPOXY RESIN FINISH TO HEAVY DUTY AREA WALLS & CEILINGS ie
PUMP ROOM
• Manufacturer: [BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel:
+971 4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect].
- Product reference: [BASF Mastertop 1110T].
• Surfaces: [Walls and ceiling].
- Preparation: [as per manufacturer's recommendations].
• Finishing coats: [BASF Mastertop 1110T].
- Number of coats: [2 coats each of 100 microns - refer to manufacturer's recommendations].

195C SPECIAL COATING REFLECTIVE PAINT TO BASEMENT CARPARK WALLS,


CEILINGS, COLUMNS ETC
• Manufacturer: [BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel:
+971 4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect].
- Product reference: [BASF Sonoshield Parkcoat].
• Surfaces: [Concrete Walls, Ceiling and Columns].
- Preparation: [Wash down and degrease as per Manufacturer's recommendations].
- Number of coats: [2].
• Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Schedule.

GENERALLY

210 COATING MATERIALS


• Manufacturers: Obtain materials from any of the following:
Clause M60/110A & B, 160, 175A, 195A, 195B & 195C.
• Selected manufacturers: Submit names before commencement of coating work.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 243 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

215 HANDLING AND STORAGE


• Coating materials: Deliver in sealed containers, labelled clearly with brand name, type of
material and manufacturer's batch number.
• Materials from more than one batch: Store separately. Allocate to distinct parts or areas of the
work.

220 COMPATIBILITY
• Coating materials selected by contractor:
- Recommended by their manufacturers for the particular surface and conditions of exposure.
- Compatible with each other.
- Compatible with and not inhibiting performance of preservative/fire retardant pretreatments.

240 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED


• Internal & external fittings and fixtures including MEP services etc.

280 PROTECTION
• 'Wet paint' signs and barriers: Provide where necessary to protect other operatives and
general public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.

300A CONTROL SAMPLES


• Sample areas of finished work: Carry out, including preparation, as follows:
Types of coating Nature of sample
M60/ 110A . 3.0m x 3.0m size, location to be agreed .
M60/ [110B]. [3.0m x 3.0m size, location to be agreed].
M60/ [110C]. [3.0m x 3.0m size, location to be agreed].
M60/ [130A]. [location to be agreed].
M60/ [160]. [size and location to be agreed].
M60/ [180A]. [size and location to be agreed].
M60/ [195A]. [3.0m x 3.0m size, location to be agreed].
M60/ [195B]. [3.0m x 3.0m size, location to be agreed].
• Approval of appearance: Obtain before commencement of general coating work.

320 INSPECTION BY COATING MANUFACTURERS


• General: Permit manufacturers to inspect work in progress and take samples of their materials
from site if requested.

321A INSPECTION OF WORK STAGES


• Programme for inspections: Submit as follows:
Types of coating Inspection at completion of
M60/ 110A . Final coat .
M60/ [110B]. [Final coat].
M60/ [110C]. [Final coat].
M60/ [130A]. [Final coat].
M60/ [180A]. [Final coat].
M60/ [195A]. [Final coat].
M60/ [195B]. [Final coat].
• Inspection: Give prior notice when each stage is ready for inspection.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 244 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

PREPARATION

400 PREPARATION GENERALLY


• Standard: In accordance with BS 6150.
• Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and method statements
covering operations, disposal of waste, containment and reoccupation, and obtain approval
before commencing work.
• Preparation materials: Types recommended by their manufacturers and the coating
manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
• Substrates: Sufficiently dry in depth to suit coating.
• Efflorescence salts: Remove.
• Dirt, grease and oil: Remove. Give notice if contamination of surfaces/ substrates has
occurred.
• Surface irregularities: Remove.
• Joints, cracks, holes and other depressions: Fill flush with surface, to provide smooth finish.
• Dust, particles and residues from preparation: Remove and dispose of safely.
• Water based stoppers and fillers:
- Apply before priming unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer.
- If applied after priming: Patch prime.
• Oil based stoppers and fillers: Apply after priming.
• Doors, opening windows and other moving parts:
- Ease, if necessary, before coating.
- Prime resulting bare areas.

420 FIXTURES AND FITTINGS


• Removal: Before commencing work remove: Coverplates, grilles, wall clocks, and other
surface mounted fixtures.
• Replacement: Refurbish as necessary, refit when coating is dry.

425 IRONMONGERY
• Removal: Before commencing work: Remove ironmongery from surfaces to be coated.
• Hinges: Remove.
• Replacement: Refurbishment as necessary; refit when coating is dry.

430 EXISTING IRONMONGERY


• Refurbishment: Remove old coating marks. Clean and polish.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 245 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

440 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES GENERALLY


• Preparation: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 11.5.
• Contaminated or hazardous surfaces: Give notice of:
- Coatings suspected of containing lead.
- Substrates suspected of containing asbestos.
- Significant rot, corrosion or other degradation of substrates.
• Suspected existing hazardous materials: Prepare risk assessments and method statements
covering operations, disposal of waste, containment and reoccupation, and obtain approval
before commencing work.
• Removing coatings: Do not damage substrate and adjacent surfaces or adversely affect
subsequent coatings.
• Loose, flaking or otherwise defective areas: Carefully remove to a firm edge.
• Alkali affected coatings: Completely remove.
• Retained coatings:
- Thoroughly clean to remove dirt, grease and contaminants.
- Gloss coated surfaces: Provide key.
• Partly removed coatings:
- Additional preparatory coats: Apply to restore original coating thicknesses.
- Junctions: Provide flush surface.
• Completely stripped surfaces: Prepare as for uncoated surfaces.

461 PREVIOUSLY COATED WOOD


• Degraded or weathered surface wood: Take back to provide suitable substrate.
• Degraded substrate wood: Repair with sound material of same species.
• Exposed resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.

471 PREPRIMED WOOD


• Areas of defective primer: Take back to bare wood and reprime.

481 UNCOATED WOOD


• General: Provide smooth, even finish with arrises and moulding edges lightly rounded or
eased.
• Heads of fasteners: Countersink sufficient to hold stoppers/fillers.
• Resinous areas and knots: Apply two coats of knotting.

490 PREVIOUSLY COATED STEEL


• Defective paintwork: Remove to leave a firm edge and clean bright metal.
• Sound paintwork: Provide key for subsequent coats.
• Corrosion and loose scale: Take back to bare metal.
• Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution.
• Bare metal: Apply primer as soon as possible.
• Remaining areas: Degrease.

500 PREPRIMED STEEL


• Areas of defective primer, corrosion and loose scale: Take back to bare metal. Reprime as
soon as possible.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 246 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

511 GALVANIZED, SHERARDIZED AND ELECTROPLATED STEEL


• White rust: Remove.
• Pretreatment: Apply one of the following:
- 'T wash'/ mordant solution to blacken whole surface.
- Etching primer recommended by coating system manufacturer.

521 UNCOATED STEEL - MANUAL CLEANING


• Oil and grease: Remove.
• Corrosion, loose scale, welding slag and spatter: Remove.
• Residual rust: Treat with a proprietary removal solution.
• Primer: Apply as soon as possible.

531 UNCOATED STEEL - BLAST CLEANING


• Oil and grease: Remove.
• Blast cleaning:
- Atmospheric conditions: Dry.
- Abrasive: Suitable type and size, free from fines, moisture and oil.
- Surface finish: To BS EN ISO 8501-1, preparation grade Sa ½ .
• Primer: Apply as soon as possible and within four hours of blast cleaning.

541 UNCOATED ALUMINIUM/ COPPER/ LEAD


• Surface corrosion: Remove and lightly key surface.
• Pretreatment: Etching primer if recommended by coating system manufacturer.

552 UNCOATED PVC-U


• Dirt and grease: Remove. Do not abrade surface.

560 UNCOATED CONCRETE


• Release agents: Remove.

570 UNCOATED MASONRY/ RENDERING


• Loose and flaking material: remove.

580 UNCOATED PLASTER


• Nibs, trowel marks and plaster splashes: Scrape off.
• Overtrowelled 'polished' areas: Key lightly.

590 UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD


• Depressions around fixings: Fill with stoppers/ fillers

601 UNCOATED PLASTERBOARD - TO RECEIVE TEXTURED COATING


• Joints: Fill, tape and feather out with materials recommended by textured coating
manufacturer.

611 WALL COVERINGS


• Retained wall coverings: Check that they are in good condition and well adhered to substrate.
• Previously covered walls: Wash down to remove paper residues, adhesive and size.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 247 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

622 ORGANIC GROWTHS


• Dead and loose growths and infected coatings: Scrape off and remove from site.
• Treatment biocide: Apply appropriate solution to growth areas and surrounding surfaces.
• Residual effect biocide: Apply appropriate solution to inhibit re-establishment of growths.

645 SEALING OF INTERNAL MOVEMENT JOINTS


• General: To junctions of walls and ceilings with architraves, skirtings and other trims.
• Sealant: Water based acrylic.
- Manufacturer: BASF.
Product reference: Masterflex 472.
- Preparation and application: As section Z22.

651 EXISTING GUTTERS


• Dirt and debris: Remove from inside of gutters.
• Defective joints: Clean and seal with suitable jointing material.

APPLICATION

711 COATING GENERALLY


• Application standard: In accordance with BS 6150, clause 9.
• Conditions: Maintain suitable temperature, humidity and air quality during application and
drying.
• Surfaces: Clean and dry at time of application.
• Thinning and intermixing of coatings: Not permitted unless recommended by manufacturer.
• Overpainting: Do not paint over intumescent strips or silicone mastics.
• Priming coats:
- Thickness: To suit surface porosity.
- Application: As soon as possible on same day as preparation is completed.
• Finish:
- Even, smooth and of uniform colour.
- Free from brush marks, sags, runs and other defects.
- Cut in neatly.
• Doors, opening windows and other moving parts: Ease before coating and between coats.

720 PRIMING JOINERY


• Preservative treated timber: Retreat cut surfaces with two flood coats of a suitable preservative
before priming.
• End grain: Coat liberally allow to soak in, and recoat.

730 WORKSHOP COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES


• General: Apply coatings to all surfaces of components.

731 SITE COATING OF CONCEALED JOINERY SURFACES


• General: After priming, apply additional coatings to surfaces that will be concealed when fixed
in place.
- Components: Any where aplicable.
- Additional coatings: One undercoat.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 248 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

740 CONCEALED METAL SURFACES


• General: Apply additional coatings to surfaces that will be concealed when component is fixed
in place.
- Components: Any where applicable.
- Additional coatings: Black paint to BS 1070.

770 EXTERNAL DOORS


• Bottom edges: Prime and coat before hanging doors.

800 GLAZING
• Etched, sand blasted and ground glass: Treat or mask edges before coating to protect from
contamination by oily constituents of coating materials.

Issue 0: Construction Documents M60 Painting/clear finishing Page 249 of 367


N10
General fixtures/ furnishings/ equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

N10 General fixtures/ furnishings/ equipment

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install Vanity and Washroom Furniture, Fire Hose Reels, Dado
Rails, Linen Chute, Garbage Chute and Column Gaurds in accordance with this specification.
The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Vanity and Bathroom Furniture to staff areas allowing to interface with all associated items
such as sanitary fittings, all pipe connections, structural support, sealants, insulation,and
ancillary items etc.
- Fire hose reels to all areas allowing for all associated trims, sealants, pipe connections and
ancillary items etc.
- All adhesive fixings.
- All grouting etc.
- All movement joints, expansion joints etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with all specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details, setting out, including joints, edge details, expansion joint, service penetrations,
abutments stops, steps and interface details to adjacent construction.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N10 General fixtures/ furnishings/ Page 251 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

PRODUCTS

145A VANITY AND WASHROOM FURNITURE TO STAFF CHANGING ROOMS/TOILETS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Purpose-made, refer to Architect's drawings.
• Material: Stone.
• Dimensions: Refer to Architect's drawings.
• Supports:
- Material: Tubular steel, powder coated as section Z33.
- Finish/ Colour: black.
- Edges: Not required.
• Doors/ Drawers/ Shelves:
- Material: n/a.
- Finish/ Colour: n/a.
- Edges: n/a.
• Worktops:
- Material: Granite - Grey Sardo.
- Finish/ Colour: Grey Sardo.
- Exposed edges: Not required.
• Other requirements: Provide all fixings/materials etc to complete installation in accordance with
manufacturers printed instructions.

170 BENCHES TO STAFF CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Gibca Furniture Industry Co Ltd, PO Box 20923, Ajman, UAE. Tel: +971 6 743
68888.
- Product reference: Locker room bench ref: G/LB-43 - for size refer to Architect's drawings.
• Material: High pressure laminate and powdercoated steel.
• Finish/ Colour: RAL 7002 - Olive Grey.
• Fittings: Adjustable feet.

220 LOCKERS TO STAFF CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Gibca Furniture Industry Co Ltd, PO BOx 20923, Ajman, UAE. Tel: +971 6 743
68888.
- Product reference: L shaped - also refer to architect's drawings.
• Standard: To BS 4680.
- Test level: Heavy.
• Material: High pressure laminate.
- Finish/ Colour: RAL 7002 - Olive Grey.
• Fittings: comes complete with all fittings.
• Other requirements: Keyed lock.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N10 General fixtures/ furnishings/ Page 252 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

270 MIRRORS TO BOH BATHROOMS AND WC's


• Material: Class C safety glass to BS 6206.
• Quality: Free from tarnishing, discoloration, scratches and other defects visible in the designed
viewing conditions. Reflection undistorted.
• Size: Refer to Architect drawings.
• Backing: Lacquer.
• Edges: rounded.
• Fixing: Adhesive fixed to rendered blockwork wall.
• Installation: Accurately with sides vertical.

350A MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS


• Item: FIRE HOSE REELS.
• Manufacturer: Refer to MEP Consultant's specification.
- Product reference: Refer to MEP Consultant's specification.
• Size/ Capacity: Refer to MEP Consultant's specification.
• Finish/ Colour: Contractor to submit a proposed colour and finish for the Fire Hose Reel for
Architect approval.
• Fixing: Refer to MEP Consultant's specification.
• Other requirements: Provide all fixings/materials etc to complete installation in accordance with
manufacturers printed instructions.

EXECUTION

710 MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD AND WOOD BASED BOARDS


• Temperature and humidity: During delivery, storage, fixing and to handover maintain
conditions to suit specified moisture contents of timber components.
• Testing: When instructed, test components with approved moisture meter to manufacturer's
recommendations.

720 INSTALLATION GENERALLY


• General: as per scope of work.
• Fixing and fasteners: As section Z20.
• Services: As Engineering Services specification.

740 TAPS
• Fixing: Secure, watertight seal with the appliance.
• Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by user of appliance.

750 WASTES AND OVERFLOWS


• Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound.
• Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and backnut.

760 SEALANT POINTING


• Manufacturer: Dow Corning SA or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: 785 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
• Material: Silicone based to BS 5889, type B with fungicide.
• Colour: White.
• Application: As section Z22.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N10 General fixtures/ furnishings/ Page 253 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

770 TRIMS
• Lengths: Wherever possible, unjointed between angles or ends of runs.
• Running joints: Where unavoidable, obtain approval of location and method of jointing.
• Angle joints: Mitred.

COMPLETION

910 GENERAL
• Doors and drawers: Accurately aligned, not binding. Adjusted to ensure smooth operation.
• Ironmongery: Checked, adjusted and lubricated to ensure correct functioning.

920 APPLIANCES
• Test: Ensure that all functions and features work correctly.
• Documentation: Submit guarantees, instruction manuals, etc.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N10 General fixtures/ furnishings/ Page 254 of 367
equipment
N13
Sanitary appliances and fittings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor is to supply and install sanitary appliances, fittings etc. in accordance with this
specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Supply and installation of all sanitary appliances, fittings, and associated sanitary fixtures/
mongery and support structures.
- All pipe connections, sealants, insulation etc.
- All ancillary fixtures and fittings, clothes hooks, paper towel dispensers, soap dispensers,
toilet paper holders and spare toilet paper holders, towel racks.
- Waste pipe connections etc.
- All noggings and bearers and any ancillary support structure to achieve intended design
profile and appearance.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- Preparation of documentation/ drawings in sufficient detail to determine the location and
form of all relevant details including, fixings, clips, service connections, abutments, brackets
and interfaces with adjacent construction, tiling setting out etc.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 256 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

PRODUCTS

300A WCS AND CISTERNS TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• WC standard: To DEFRA WC suite performance specification or equivalent and approved by
relevant water company.
• Type: Wall hung WC with concealed cistern.
• Pan:
- Standards: To BS EN 37 and BS EN 997.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC, P.O Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product reference: SHR-RE30400-WH, Wall mounted WC.
- Size: 358 x 524 x 374mm
- Material: Vitreous china, white.
• Seat and cover:
- Standard: To BS 1254.
- Manufacturer: Bagno Remo.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC.
- Product reference: SNT-56-025-01-WH.
• Cistern: Concealed Cistern - Front Operated, includes flush pipe connector.
- Manufacturer: Geberit.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC, P.O Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Ref: SNT-95-701-00-S000
- Cistern Standard: To comply with DEFRA requirements.
- Installation Height: approx 1080mm above finished floor level.
• Control Panel: Dual Flush Operating Plate.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC.
Product reference: SNT-16-701-81.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 257 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

316A WALL MOUNTED URINAL TO MALE STAFF CHANGING ROOM


• Manufacturer: Bagno Remo and Gerberit
• Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
• Urinals:
- Standard: To BS 5520.
- Manufacturer: Gerberit.
- Product reference: SHR-REU0001-WH, concealed trap urinal.
- Size: 370 x 300 x 655mm
- Material: Vitreous china, white.
- Colour: White.
• Wastes: Chrome Plated Brass Grated Waste with Top Kleen Access 11/2 inch.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: PEX-451-TK-CP
- Material: Chrome
- Tail: Unslotted.
• Back Inlet Urinal Spreader: DVA-URT002.
- Material: Chrome.
• Traps: Bottle.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Product reference: SNT-31-220-00-0000.
- Size: 11/2 inch x 400mm.
- Material: PVC.
- Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm.
• Flushing Valve: HyBasic Infrared Urinal Electronic Flush Control, 230V, Plastic Cover.
- Manufacturer: Geberit
Product reference: GEB-115-817-46-1.
- Finish: Matt Chrome
- Flush volume:
- Housing for Electronic / Pneumatic with Shut-off Valve: GEB-115-801-00-1.
• Urinal Divider:
- Manufacturer: Geberit
- Supplier: Sanipex L.L.C
- Product Ref: TAN-HDUV001-WH
• Accessories: 2 x SF 75 wall brackets.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 258 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

331A SINK TO EXPRESS LAUNDRY/ENGINEERING WORKSHOP


• Standard: To BS EN 13310.
• Sink Manufacturer: Reginox.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Beta 10 BA (2 x waste with plug with connection kit)
- Product reference: REG-BETA-10-BAP-OKG.
- Size: 780 x 430 x 145mm
- Finish: Matt Stainless Steel.
• Mixer:
- Manufacturer: Vado
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC
- Product Description: Chelsea Sink Mixer with cast swivel spout with 1/2 inch flexible tubes.
- Product Ref: EBI-CHE-150-CP
- Finish: Chrome
• Trap: Plastic Bottle Trap.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC
- Product Description: Bottle trap with plug, chain and waste. For use with European norm
waste connections 1 1/2 inch x 320mm.
- Product reference: PEX-472-WHT.
- Colour: White.

331B CLEANER'S SINK TO SMALL HOUSEKEEPING STORES / CLEANERS ROOMS


• Standard: To BS 1206.
• Manufacturer: Bagno Design.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Cleaner's Sink with low back and 12 inch legs with fixing bracket and
waste.
- Product reference: SHW-CL0300010; FT0100012; FT0200012; FT1600013.
- Colour: White
• Mixer: Wall mounted swivel spout sink mixer
- Manufacturer: Vado
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC.
- Product Ref: EBI-WAR-254F-CP.
- Finish: Chrome
• Trap: [Plastic Bottle Trap].
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC
- Product Description: Bottle trap with plug, chain and waste. For use with European norm
waste connections 1 1/2 inch x 320mm.
- Product reference: [PEX-472-WHT].
- Colour: White.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 259 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

331C SINK TO CLINIC


• Standard: To BS EN 13310.
• Manufacturer: Bagno Design.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Bagno Kudos semi recessed wash basin and full pedestal.
- Product reference: DPG-Z04-WH, BFK-BASIN-KIT, DPG-Z24-WH.
- Colour: White.

335A UNDERCOUNTER WASHBASIN TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Washbasin Manufacturer: Bagno Design.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product reference: BVT-C22131W-WH.
- Size: 545(W) x 385(D) x 205(H)mm.
- Material: Vitreous china, white.
- Tap/ Chainstay/ Overflow holes: One centre tap, no chain stay hole, one overflow hole.
• Water supply fittings: Mixer Tap with flow reducer.
- Manufacturer: Vado - Chelsea Range.
- Supplier: Sanipex L.L.C
- Product reference: EBI-CHE-100-RB-CP, Single Lever Wash Basin Mixer with Pop-up waste
with 1/2 inch flexible tubes.
- Finish: Chrome
- Operation: Manual.
• Wastes: Pop up.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Supplier: Sanipex L.L.C.
Product reference: EBI-FR-100-PLA.
• Traps: Brass Bottle Trap.
- Standards: To BS EN 274-1, -2 and -3.
- Manufacturer: Plumbex UK.
- Supplier: Sanipex L.L.C
- Product reference: PEX-460-1-1/4-400-CP.
- Size: 400mm oulet pipe 1 1/4 inch x 1 1/4 inch.
- Material: Brass, chrome plated.
- Depth of seal (minimum): 75 mm.
• Angle Valve: Mini Angle Valve
- Supplier: Sanipex L.L.C
- Product Ref: PEX-225-CP
- Size: 1/2 x 1/2 inch.
- Finish: Chrome.
• Accessories: as per manufacturers/suppliers recommendations to complete system.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 260 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

375A FIXED SHOWER HEAD TO EXTERNAL SHOWER ON POOL DECK


• Manufacturer: Bossini.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: CYLINDRICO/1 Fixed Head Kit, 'consisting of: Shower Arm, Single Funktion
Shower Head.
- Product reference: BOS-H26352-CP.
- Finish: Chrome.

375B SHOWER MIXER TO EXTERNAL SHOWER ON POOL DECK


• Manufacturer: Vado
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Chelsea concealed shower mixer.
- Product reference: EBI-CHE-145-CP.
- Finish: Chrome.

375C SHOWER WASTE TO STAFF CHANGING ROOM SHOWER CUBICLES


• Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Type 823/90 shower tray waste with trap 90mm.
- Product reference: SNT-34-045-00-0000CP.
- Finish: Chrome cover

375D GLASS PIVOT DOOR TO STAFF CHANGING ROOM SHOWER CUBICLES


• Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Glass pivot door, glass thickness 8mm.
- Product reference: WMS-KP1-90-CP.
- Ironmongery: By Sanipex L.L.C.
- Finish: Frosted.

376A SHOWER MIXER WITH SPOUT TO STAFF CHANGING ROOM SHOWER CUBICLES
• Manufacturer: Vado.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Chelsea 2H Exposed Wall / Mounted Shower / Bath.
- Product reference: EBI-CHE-123-CP .
- Finish: Chrome.

376B SHOWER HEAD WITH HOSE TO STAFF CHANGING ROOM SHOWER CUBICLES
• Manufacturer: Bossini.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Cylindrica 3 Slide Rail Kit with Double Interlock Brass Hose 1500mm.
- Product reference: BOS-D54035-CP.
- Finish: Chrome.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 261 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

380 ABLUTION SET TO STAFF TOILET CUBICLES


• Manufacturer: Bossini
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: 'Patty' Ablution handset with 1200mm diameter hose and bracket.
- Product reference: BOS-C03075-CP.
- Finish: Chrome.
• Angle Valve: Mini Angle Valve 1/2 x 1/2 inch
- Supplier: Sanipex L.L.C
- Product Ref: PEX-225-CP

385 FLOOR DRAIN TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Aqua Drain
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Brass Floor Drain with cover (3 pcs set), outlet diameter of 40mm.
- Product reference: JIX-55003-CP.
- Size: 95 x 95mm.
- Finish: Chrome.

387 FLOOR DRAIN / RAINWATER OUTLET TO POOL DECK


• Manufacturer: Havestock.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: 150mm x 4" BSP Threaded Square Top.

- Product reference: AQH-T150S .


- Size: 150 x 150mm.
- Finish: Stainless Steel - grade 316.

390 BIB TAP TO POOL DECK


• Manufacturer: Pex.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Lever arm bib tap CP.
- Product reference: PEX-708-1/2-CP .
- Size: as per manufacturer's product size.
- Finish: Chrome.

391 CHANNEL DRAIN TO EXTERNAL SHOWER ON POOL DECK


• Manufacturer: Bagno Design.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Highline panel; Frame; Drain Unit and Outlet.

- Product reference: UDN-1920-1010-BS; UDN-1910-1010-BS; UDN-1400-1000; UDN-1410-


0050 .
- Size: as per manufacturer's product size.
- Finish: Brushed Stainless Steel - grade 316.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 262 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

429A CLOTHES HOOKS TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Bagno Design.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Ref: Smooth Double Hook.
- Product reference: BDA-SMO-422-A-CP.
- Finish: Glazed Steel.

442A PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER WITH BIN TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Bagno Design
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Recessed wall mounted paper towel dispenser with bin.
- Product reference: YIL-Y5001-SS.
- Size: 1200 x 350 x 120mm
- Finish: Polished Chrome.

443 HAND DRYER TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Bagno Hotel
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Wall mounted sensor hand dryer.
- Product reference: SIM-40-MHCA.
- Size: 219 x 274 x 140mm.
- Finish: Polished Chrome.

446A SANITARY BAG DISPENSER TO FEMALE STAFF TOILETS / CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Bagno Hotel
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Description: Hygenic Sanitary Bag Dispenser.
- Product reference: PAC-HBDC-CP; PAC-HBR.
- Size: 140 x 100 x 25mm.
- Finish: Chrome.

458A SOAP DISPENSER TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Bagno Contract
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Wall mounted liquid soap dispenser, 0.50L.
- Product reference: YSN-5825-SS.
- Size: 145 x 90mm.
- Finish: Stainless Steel.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 263 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

458B SOAP DISPENSER TO STAFF SHOWER CUBICLES


• Manufacturer: Bagno Design
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Wall Mounted Soap Dispenser 0.25L.
- Product reference: NBL-268-71569-CP.
- Size: 180 x 60 x 100mm.
- Finish: Chrome.

458C SOAP BASKET TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Bagno Hotel
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Small corner soap basket.
- Product reference: DGM-H121015S-CP.
- Size: 150 x 114 x 30mm.
- Finish: Chrome.

460A TOILET BRUSH HOLDER TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Bagno Hotel
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Freestanding Toilet Brush Set.
- Product reference: DGM-2670301NA-CP.
- Finish: Chrome.

462A TOILET PAPER HOLDERS TO STAFF TOILET CUBICLES


• Manufacturer: Bagno Hotel
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Double Paper Roll Holder
- Product reference: DGM-261676SSN-2H-CP.
- Size: 302 x 160 x 74mm
- Finish: Stainless Steel.

466A TOWEL RAILS TO STAFF SHOWER CUBICLES


• Manufacturer: Bagno Design.
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: Smooth Towel Rail.
- Product reference: BDA-SMO-712-B-CP.
- Size: 650 x 30 x 60mm.
- Finish: Chrome.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 264 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

474A PEDAL BIN TO STAFF TOILETS/CHANGING ROOMS


• Manufacturer: Bagno Hotel
- Supplier: Sanipex LLC. PO Box 30871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 00971 4 330 7771. Fax: 00971 4
330 7177.
- Product Description: 5 litre capacity pedal bin.
- Product reference: DGM-261068Z-5N-CP.
- Finish: Chrome

EXECUTION

610 INSTALLATION GENERALLY


• Assembly and fixing: Surfaces designed to falls to drain as intended.
• Fasteners: Nonferrous or stainless steel.
• Supply and discharge pipework: Fix before appliances.
• Fixing: Fix appliances securely to structure. Do not support on pipework.
• Jointing and bedding compounds: Recommended by manufacturers of appliances,
accessories and pipes being jointed or bedded.
• Appliances: Do not use. Do not stand on appliances.
• On completion: Components and accessories working correctly with no leaks.
• Labels and stickers: Remove.

613 COMPATIBILITY OF COMPONENTS


• General: Each sanitary assembly must consist of functionally compatible components,
preferably obtained from a single manufacturer.
- Exceptions: Water supply fittings, wastes and traps.

620 NOGGINGS AND BEARERS


• Noggings, bearers, etc. to support sanitary appliances and fittings: Position accurately. Fix
securely.

630 TILED BACKGROUNDS OTHER THAN SPLASHBACKS


• Timing: Complete before fixing appliances.
• Fixing appliances: Do not overstress tiles.

650 INSTALLING WC PANS


• Floor mounted pans: Screw fix and fit cover caps over screw heads. Do not use mortar or
other beddings.
• Seat and cover: Stable when raised.

670 INSTALLING CISTERNS


• Cistern operating components: Obtain from cistern manufacturer.
- Float operated valve: Matched to pressure of water supply.
• Overflow pipe: Fixed to falls and located to give visible warning of discharge.
- Location: Agreed, where not shown on drawings.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 265 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

710 INSTALLING TAPS


• Fixing: Secure against twisting.
• Seal with appliance: Watertight.
• Positioning: Hot tap to left of cold tap as viewed by user of appliance.

720 INSTALLING WASTES AND OVERFLOWS


• Bedding: Waterproof jointing compound.
• Fixing: With resilient washer between appliance and backnut.

755 SEALANT BEDDING AND POINTING


• Bedding: Bed sinks to top of worktops. .
• Pointing: Joints between appliances and splashbacks, walls and floors .

Issue 0: Construction Documents N13 Sanitary appliances and fittings Page 266 of 367
N14
General internal signage systems
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

N14 General internal signage systems

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install all signage in accordance with this specification. The
scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- All signage systems and assoicated fixings etc.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N14 General internal signage systems Page 268 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

GENERAL

110 SIGNAGE SYSTEM FOR GENERAL INTERNAL SIGNAGE


• System manufacturer: Allgood PLC, 297 Euston Road, London. NW1 3AQ, Te: +44 20 7387
9951, Fax: +44 20 7255 9342 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: Self adhesive and visibily fixed signs. Submit Proposals for Architect
approval .
• Layout and dimensions: Submit Proposals for Architect approval .
• Lettering:
- Language: Arabic & English .
- Font: To suit Operator's preference and requirements - submit proposals for Architect
approval .
- Colour: To suit Operator's preference and requirements - submit proposals for Architect
approval .
- Size: To suit Operator's preference and requirements - submit proposals for Architect
approval .
• Symbols and graphics: To suit Operator's preference and requirements - submit proposals for
Architect approval .
- Colour: To suit Operator's preference and requirements - submit proposals for Architect
approval .
- Size: To suit Operator's preference and requirements - submit proposals for Architect
approval .
• Background colour: To suit Operator's preference and requirements - submit proposals for
Architect approval .
• Sign type: Submit proposals .
- Inserts: Submit proposals .
- Manufacturing process: Manufacturer's standard .
• Supports/ Fixings: Wall mounted, adhesive and screw-fixed .
• Accessories: Not required .

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


• Signage system: Complete to BS 559, including facing information, components, inserts,
accessories and fixings necessary to complete the system.
- Comply with the requirements of: Wayfinding strategy.
• Geometric shapes, colours and layout: In accordance with BS 8501.
• Design standard for disabled people: In accordance with BS 8300.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations and manufacturer's
literature.

240 FIRE REACTION OF SIGNAGE SYSTEM N14/110


• Non flammable surface:
- Standard: Class 1 to BS 476-7 .

280 DESIGN LIFE OF SIGNAGE SYSTEM N14/110


• Duration: 10 years .
- Subject to reasonable wear and tear.
• Condition of use: Subject to regular maintenance.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N14 General internal signage systems Page 269 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

290 SIGNAGE SAMPLES


• Sign type: Signage system N14/110 .
- Action: Submit labelled samples.
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract or until instructed to
remove.
- Delivered product: To conform with labelled samples.

295 SIGNAGE SAMPLES BOARD


• Samples board: Submit.
- Content: Selected labelled signs, showing methods of fixing.
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract or until instructed to
remove.
- Delivered product: To conform with labelled samples.

PRODUCTS

305 PRODUCTS GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS 559.

EXECUTION

610 FIXING SIGNS GENERALLY


• Installation: To BS 559.
- Secure, plumb and level.
• Strength of fasteners: Sufficient to support all live and dead loads.
• Fasteners and or adhesives: As section Z20.
• Fixings showing on surface of sign: Must not detract from the message being displayed.

620 FIXING SIGNS FOR THE VISUALLY IMPAIRED


• Protection of users:
- Fasteners for tactile/ Braille signs must not have sharp edges or protrusions that would
cause confusion or injury to users.

COMPLETION

910 DOCUMENTATION
• Submit:
- Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
- Guarantees, warranties, test certificates, record schedules and log books.

920 SPARES
• Supply as follows:
- Type: Signage system N14/110 .
- Quantity: 5 modular sets containing all alpha and numeral characters .

930 SPECIALIST TOOLS


• Supply as follows: 2 sets of nameplate adjustment tools .

Issue 0: Construction Documents N14 General internal signage systems Page 270 of 367
N15
Fire and safety signage systems
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

N15 Fire and safety signage systems

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor is to supply and install Fire Safety Signage in accordance with this
specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Fire Safety Signage including all fixings and sealants etc.
- Allowing to co-ordinate with MEP for electrical requirements.
- All adhesive fixings.

GENERAL

110A FIRE SIGNAGE SYSTEMS FOR ESCAPE ROUTES


• System manufacturer: Signbox Ltd, Unit 3, Egham Business Village, Crabtree Road, Egham,
Surrey, TW20 8RB. Tel: +44 1784 438688 / or equal and approved - Submit proposals for
Architect approval .
- Product reference: Signbox Fire Range. - Emergency lighting for the means of egress shall
be provided in accordance with Section 7.9 of NFPA 101 .
• Layout and dimensions: Means of egress shall be marked in accordance with section 7.10 of
NFPA 101 - Refer to drawings for locations .
- Language: Arabic & English.
• Sign type: Photoluminescent - submit proposals for Architect approval .
- Manufacturing process: Screen print - submit proposals for Architect approval .
• Supports/ Fixings: Varies - submit proposals for Architect Approval .
• Accessories: Anodised aluminium extrusion and steel cable suspension system for ceiling
fixed .

Issue 0: Construction Documents N15 Fire and safety signage systems Page 272 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

120A SAFETY SIGNAGE SYSTEMS FOR HAZARD, MANDATORY ACTION & PROHIBITION
DANGER
• System manufacturer: Signbox Ltd, Unit 3, Egham Business Village, Crabtree Road, Egham,
Surrey, TW20 8RB. Tel: +44 1784 438688 / or equal and approved - Submit proposals for
Architect approval .
- Product reference: Signbox Action Range - or equal and approved - submit proposals .
• Layout and dimensions: Manufacturer's Standard .
- Language: Arabic & English.
• Sign type: Photoluminescent .
- Manufacturing process: Screen print - submit proposals for Architect approval .
• Supports/ Fixings: Wall / Door mounted, screw fixed .
• Accessories: Not required .

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


• Signage system design:
- Complete to: BS 559 and BS ISO 16069.
- Comply with the requirements of: NFPA 101 .
• Proposals: Submit drawings, schedules, technical information, calculations and manufacturer's
literature.

240A SIGNAGE SYSTEM SPECIFICATION


• Content: Signs including facing information, components, inserts, accessories and fixings
necessary to complete the system.
• Geometric shapes, colours and layout: To BS 5499-1.
- Font: Helvetica medium for English.
• Escape route: In accordance with BS 5499-4 and BS ISO 16069
• Safety meaning: In accordance with BS 5499-5.
• Water safety: In accordance with BS 5499-11.

270 FIRE REACTION OF FIRE SIGNAGE SYSTEM


• Non flammable surface:
- Standard: Class 1 to BS 476-7 .

280 DESIGN LIFE OF FIRE SIGNAGE SYSTEM


• Duration: 15 years .
- Subject to reasonable wear and tear.
• Environment: External .
• Condition of use: Subject to regular maintenance.

290 SIGNAGE SAMPLES


• Sign type: Fire .
- Action: Submit labelled samples.
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract or until instructed to
remove.
- Delivered products: To conform with labelled samples

Issue 0: Construction Documents N15 Fire and safety signage systems Page 273 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

PRODUCTS

305 SIGNAGE PRODUCTS GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS 559.
• Colorimetric and photometric properties: To BS 5378-2.

400 PHOTOLUMINESCENT SIGNS


• Standard: In accordance with Photoluminescent Safety Products Association (PSPA) Standard
002 part 1.
• PSPA material: Class I .
• Manufacturer: As clause N15/110 & 120 .
- Product reference: As clause N15/110 & 120 .
• Base material: Plastics sheet .
• Component thickness: To BS 559 .
• Finish: Manufacturer's standard .
• Perimeters: Radiused corners .

EXECUTION

610 FIXING SIGNS GENERALLY


• Installation: To BS 559.
- Secure, plumb and level.
• Fasteners and adhesives: As section Z20.
• Strength of fasteners: Sufficient to support live and dead loads.
• Fasteners for external signs: Corrosion resistant material or with a corrosion resistant finish.
Isolate dissimilar metals to avoid electrolytic corrosion.
• Fixings showing on surface of sign: Must not detract from the message being displayed.

COMPLETION

910 DOCUMENTATION
• Submit:
- Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
- Guarantees, warranties, test certificates, record schedules and logbooks.

920 SPARES
• Supply as follows:
- Type: Escape route signs .
- Quantity: 1 set of each type .

930 SPECIALIST TOOLS


• Supply as follows: 1 set suspension adjustment tools .

Issue 0: Construction Documents N15 Fire and safety signage systems Page 274 of 367
N17
Portable fire fighting systems
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

N17 Portable fire fighting systems

To be read with Preliminaries/ General Conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor is to supply and install portable fire extinguisher system and fire blankets in
accordance with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Portable fire extinguishers, all support brackets fixings etc.
- Proprietary fire blankets, all support brackets, fixings etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and test data to prove
suitability of materials/ products for the proposed applicator.

GENERAL

110A PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER TO BOH AREAS


• Locations: Refer to MEP Consultant drawings.
• Type: To suit room type and use - fire specialist to advise on extinguisher type and size.
- Capacity: to be advised by Fire Specialist.
- Supports: Fixing bracket.

150A FIRE BLANKET SYSTEM TO MAIN KITCHEN


• Type: Heavy duty.
• Size: 1.8 x 1.8 m.
• Supports: Mounting brackets.
• Other Requirements: To be coordinated with the Kitchen Consultant's drawings and
specifications.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 DESIGN
• Design: Complete the design of the portable fire fighting system.
- Basis: In accordance with BS 5306-0.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers' literature.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N17 Portable fire fighting systems Page 276 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

220 COLOUR CODING


• Portable fire extinguishers: Colour code in accordance with BS 7863.

PRODUCTS

310 CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHERS


• Standard: To BS EN 3-6.
• Manufacturer: To Architects approval.
- Product reference: To Architects approval.

320 DRY POWDER EXTINGUISHERS


• Standard: To BS EN 3-6.
• Manufacturer: To Architects approval.
- Product reference: To Architects approval.

420 FIRE BLANKETS - HEAVY DUTY


• Standard: To BS 7944.
- Type: 1.
• Manufacturer: To architects approval.
- Product reference: To architects approval.

EXECUTION

610 INSTALLING PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


• Mounting height above finished floor level: Bracket fixed at 1 m.

650 INSTALLING FIRE BLANKETS


• Mounting height above finished floor level: Bracket fixed at 1 m.

COMPLETION

910 CLEANING
• Protective wrappings: Remove.
• Cleaning: Clean off and wipe down container finishes.

920 TESTING
• Test standard: To BS 5603-0.
• Test times: At completion or when Civil Defense require.
• Notice for testing (minimum): 5 days.

930 TRAINING
• Training: Submit instruction manuals or supply other appropriate resources to train the users of
the building in the safe and appropriate use of the fire extinguishers and fire blankets.
• Fire brigade: Submit contact details.

940 MAINTENANCE
• Servicing: Arrange the first annual service of the portable fire fighting systems.
• Maintenance standard: To BS 5603-0.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N17 Portable fire fighting systems Page 277 of 367
N25
Permanent access and safety equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

N25 Permanent access and safety equipment

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• Design Requirements
The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.
• The drawings and specifications reflect a scheme level of details with the purpose of defining
the architectural works package and do not purport to be complete they do however indicate
the design intent. Where performance specification is defined the contractor shall be
responsible for the completion of the further design necessary to satisfy the Employer's
Requirements and shall prepare all of the further drawings and design documents required for
the efficient execution of the Works in accordance with the Contract. Where performance
specification is defined the Contractor shall ensure and shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Designer and the Construction Manager that the Works meet the applicable performance
specification.

20 DESIGN STANDARDS
• The Contractor shall ensure that the Works designed by him comply with all statutory
requirements and in particular, with the requirements of the current Local Authority
Regulations. The Contractor shall ensure that the Works comply with the British Standard
Specifications or shall be interpreted permitting the use of an equivalent alternative
international technical specification.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 279 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor shall plan, supply, install and maintain all Building Maintenance Unit(s)
hereafter call the BMU Systems, for routine cleaning, and maintenance of the development.
The Works to be carried out under this section shall comprise the arrangement, engineering,
submission of shop drawings, testing, fabrication, transportation, coordination, assembly,
installation and testing and commissioning of all elements required for the successful operation
of the BMU systems.
• BMU system(s) equipment shall be brand new; factory fabricated robust construction and shall
be fit for purpose in outdoor use in Saudi Arabia and manufactured to relevant Standards
stated herein.
• The complete BMU Installation shall comply with this specification and satisfy the testing and
inspection by relevant authorities having jurisdiction on the subject installation. Completion of
the BMU work is subject to the Engineer's decision on acceptance of the overall performance
of the BMU and their complete installation as per the Contract requirements.
• This system shall be devised to meet the requirements of the applicable EN standards and
related rules and to suit or accommodate a permanent suspended platform for window
cleaning and exterior maintenance using a permanent suspended platform and fall protection
systems. All systems including electronic, electrical, hydraulic and mechanical components
shall be suitable for use in service conditions permitting to Saudi Arabia.
• Drawings are indicative of the design intent, and illustrate the routing and arrangement of the
BMU System(s). This specification is to be read in conjunction with the Contract Documents
and other technical specifications for the project. Any discrepancies or contradictions in the
Drawings and /or Specification shall be brought to the attention of the Structural Engineer by
the contractor for clarification directly upon discovery. The contractor shall assume
responsibility for developing members, details, extrusions and carrying out fabrication in
accordance with the drawings to satisfy the performance requirements stated in the
specification. The validity of the contractor's proposal is to be established by the submission
and approval of shop drawings and computations together with all tests as later specified.
• Manufacturer: Work within this Section to be executed by manufacturer among specified
specializing in the design, fabrication and installation of window cleaning/suspended
maintenance systems having a minimum of 15 years documented experience.
• Loading and safety assurance: Work of this Section to meet the requirements of governing
codes and jurisdiction and to comply with properly engineered loading and safety criteria for
the intended use.
• Design Coordination: Contractor to ensure and demonstrate that all aspects of the BMU works
are coordinated with adjacent interfacing works to the approval of the Structural Engineer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 280 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

50 IMPLEMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
• The BMU systems shall be able to access all parts of the building facades below the highest
element of the buildings, including recesses, soffits, ceilings and architectural features, for
maintenance, cleaning works.
• Locks, braking or other safety devices shall be provided for securing the BMUs.
• Locate anchorages to suit suspension equipment that will be used on the building with respect
to items such as reach, rigging, spacing, roof edge condition, and similar items.
• Design all anchor components to provide adequate attachment to the building and suited to
current window cleaning/suspended maintenance practices. Ensure compatibility with industry
standard equipment.
• Ensure all anchor components conform to proper engineering principles and have been
endorsed by a Chartered Engineer qualified in the design of window cleaning/suspended
maintenance equipment, its application and safety requirements.
• Design system fall arrest safety anchors and equipment supports to comply with the following
structural requirements:
- Supports for Suspended Platforms/Gondolas, davits, rigging sleeves and monorail are used
for suspending a powered platform from storage and rigging/working locations on the
building. These supports and the structures to which they are attached are typically
designed to (10.0 kN) vertical service load plus impact with a factor of safety as per EN
requirements and/or ACI or other applicable construction codes, and to 4 times the rated
load against fracture or detachment (i.e. 4 to 1 stability factor).
- Fall Arrest Safety Anchors: designed to a maximum (2 Persons) fall arresting force of
typically 8.0 kN when wearing a body harness with a safety factor of 2 without any
permanent deformation and to 22.24 kN against fracture or detachment.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 281 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

60 QUALITY ASSURANCE
• Manufacturer Qualifications: An established and reputable firm with minimum 15 years
production of power scaffolding of quality and scope required for this Project.
- Manufacturer must be able to show he has experienced personnel, physical facilities,
established quality control procedures, management capability sufficient to produce system
without causing Project delay.
- Right is reserved to require manufacturer to submit list of at least three representative
systems three years old or older, with date of installation and Engineer's and builder's
names and addresses.
• Qualifications :
- Erector: Regularly engaged for at least five years in erection of power scaffold systems
similar to this Project.
- Welder: Present evidence, in compliance with AWS D1.1, that each welder has satisfactorily
passed qualification tests for welding processes involved and has undergone re-certification
if welder has not welded for more than six months. Submit for Structural Engineer's
information only.
• Quality Control: Contractor to establish and maintain quality control to assure compliance with
contract requirements.
- Maintain records of his quality control for all construction operations required under this
Section. Furnish copy of these records, as well as corrective action taken, to Employer at
time of Issue of Taking Over Certificate.
- Records to Include:
a. Load test of typical davit base to minimum of 4 times rated load.
b. Certified load test of typical davit to minimum of 4 times rated load.
c. Welder AWS Certification.
- Provide Employer's personnel instruction on operation and maintenance of window washing
equipment.
• Design Criteria: Where requirements of governing codes, regulations, laws, and rules
promulgated by authorities having jurisdiction conflict with these Specifications and are
mandatory, they shall be followed the same as if specified herein. Design structures with safety
factor of 4 to 1 or greater on overturn. Provide proposed plan endorsed by a Chartered
Engineer licensed in Saudi Arabia.
• Contractor shall co-ordinate and ensure that loadings imposed by the BMU system(s) while
operational and/or stationary shall in no way cause failure and/or deterioration to building
finishing materials.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 282 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

70 SUBMITTALS
• Shop Drawings: Comprehensive shop drawings showing complete layout and configuration
with all necessary detailed dimensions of the complete window cleaning/suspended
maintenance system, including all components and accessories. Clearly indicate design and
fabrication details, window drops, hardware, and installation details of maintenance system,
including all components and accessories. Shop drawings shall include installation and rigging
instructions and all necessary Restrictive and Non-Restrictive Working Usage Notes and
General Safety Notes. Shop drawings shall include the extent of all surfaces to be cleaned by
each BMU system. Detailed drawings showing all components of each BMU system including
Telescoping Boom units, davits and coupling settings.
a. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other
anchorages to be installed by others.
b. Show assembly, including parapet and layout of roof top system.
• Product Data: Manufacturer's published catalogue containing physical properties and
characteristics of window washing equipment, as well as installation instructions and
recommendations. The extent of information or samples required shall be adequate and
sufficient to demonstrate that the proposed system and materials are in compliance with the
contract requirements. Submit any additional or supplementary information to substantiate the
performance of the proposed system or material as requested by the Architect.
• Certificates; All required submittal of items specified to be certified including:
- Shop Drawings.
- Operations and maintenance procedures.
- Load, weights, and dimensions.
- Location of sockets for safest operation.
• Calculations; (FIO): Calculations shall be submitted to prove the performance and structural
design of the BMU systems proposed. Manufacturer's catalogues, test certificates, and
installation method statements, material samples of all relevant materials shall be submitted to
the Structural Engineer.
• Operation and Maintenance Data: In compliance with local authority requirements; including
parts list and operating and maintenance data.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 283 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

80 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The BMU System(s) shall comply with the following regulations:
• British Standard B.S.6037 : Suspended Platforms.
• European Standard EU8.0, pr EN 1808 : Suspended Access Equipment.
• BS EN 353 Parts 1 and 2 1993, Personal protective equipment against falls from a height:
Guided fall arrester.
• BS EN 360: 1993, Personal protective equipment against falls from a height: Retractable type
fall arrester.
• BS EN 361: 1993, Personal protective equipment against falls from a height: Full body
harnesses.
• BS EN 354 to 365: 1993, Specification for industrial safety belts, harnesses and safety
lanyards.
• BS EN 795: 1997, Protection against falls from a height: Anchor devices – requirements and
testing and 12. Permanent anchors for industrial safety belts, harnesses and safety lanyards.
• BS 6858: 1987, Manually operated positioning devices and associated anchorage lines for
use with industrial safety belts and harnesses.
• BS 7883: 1997, Code of practice for application and use of anchor devices conforming to BS
EN 795.
• EN 795: Anchorage points.

85 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING


• Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
• Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 284 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

TYPES OF SYSTEM/ EQUIPMENT

111 PERMANENT SUSPENDED ACCESS SYSTEM BUILDING MAINTENANCE UNIT - ROOF


MOUNTED
• Design/ Manufacture/ Installation: Generally to BS 6037-1 and BS EN 1808.
• Manufacturer: SECALT SA - TRACTEL GROUP or equal and approved by Architect.
• Local Agent: Metco International Group Building Maintenance Systems, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia,
11437, P.O.Box 2805, tel: +966 1 4627570.
- System Reference: Secalt Mars Special - system to suit 1500mm maximum width, as
recommended by system manufacturer.
• Type: Roof-mounted Continuous Track with Powered BMU System & Carriage.
• Standard: Design / Manufacture and Installation to conform to BS 6037-1 and BS EN 1808.
• Position and Dimensions: Submit production drawings for Architect approval
• Mode of operation: Electrically powered.
- Power supply: 3 ph, 400 V, 50 Hz, neutral earth - Refer to Manufactuer's guidlines and
recommendations.
• Rail Track: UC 152 x 152 x 23 Kg/m - Support every 2 metres
- Finish: Galvanized - refer to Manufacturer's recommendations
• Cradle: As per clause N25/150.
- Standard: To BS 2830, BS 6037-1 and BS EN 1808.
- Maximum vertical travel distance: Refer to the Architect's drawings.
- Carrying capacity (persons): Two - Submit Proposals for Architect Approval.
- Maximum Suspended Load: 500kg - to be confirmed by Manufacturer.
- Clear working width: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Length: To suit extent indicated on Architect's drawings.
- Material: Aluminium alloy.
- Infill between guardrails: Open mesh.
- Attachment points: Provide at least one safety harness attachment point per person. Provide
additional points for attaching platform restraint system, where fitted.
- Lateral restraint system: As clause 115.
- Fenders: Provide suitable protective cushions/ rollers to prevent cradle from damaging
building.
- Signage: A metal sign in Arabic & English language shall be attached to the platform stating
the maximum load capacity.
• Finishes: RAL 1013 - to Architects selection and approval.
• General requirements: Cradle access door (inward opening). All design, loading calculations,
materials and fixings are to be designed in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations and also to the approval of the Structural Engineer. Personal Protection
Equipment to be supplied to complete the system as per manufacturer's guidelines.
• Other Requirements: All hardware, clips, bolts, nuts, washers etc. shall be stainless steel. All
electrical equipment shall have phase protection.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 285 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

150 POWERED CRADLE TO BMU SYSTEM


• The self-powered modular platform (supported by four wire ropes: 2 primary and 2 secondary)
is to be fabricated of aluminium to provide a lightweight and rigid structure. The stage shall be
permanently enclosed to a height of 1065mm with aluminium-perforated sheet. The deck shall
consist of aluminium-extruded sections with a non-slip surface surrounded by a six-inch toe-
guard on all sides. The two powered end sections of the platform can be attached together by
removing the centre sections of the stage to accommodate all required stage lengths to
perform service drops around the building perimeter. Provide wheels or casters on all platform
sections. Safe working load must be 240Kg. and shall be exclusive of the weight of the stage
and the cables. (Provisions shall be made so both powered ends can be used independently
as single man work cages (if required).
• The modular self powered platform 610 x 1830mm wide by length as required, 240Kg capacity
for two men for window cleaning and building maintenance as indicated on the drawings and
described in the equipment schedule shall be provided.
• Provide 64mm minimum diameter non-marking façade rollers at the inboard side of the
platform. The roller assemblies shall be designed to maintain contact with the building facade.
• Provide Tirak traction type electric hoist with dual 8mm dia. wire suspension ropes and
associated powered wire winder to prevent the suspension rope tail lines from hanging below
the platform. Suspension wire ropes must be long enough to negotiate the buildings full height
at all intended working stations with four (4) full wraps remaining on the wire winder. The
secondary wire rope shall pass through an overspeed rope grab device with a governor that
must automatically activate should the platform achieve an overspeed condition. Furthermore if
failure occurs of one wire rope or suspension attachment the stage platform must not upset.
• The operating speed of the platform, during ascent or descent, shall be approximately 10.67
metres per minute.
• Provide two (2) emergency stop switches, one at each operator's station that must stop any
further platform travel, up or down, after either is activated.
• Individual controls for each hoist for raising, lowering and leveling of the platform must be
provided.
• Provide a platform overload and slack wire device at each hoist.
• Provide an upper travel limit switch at the top fairlead of each hoist with an interlock system to
prevent further upward movement in the event the platform contacts the support.
• The work deck of the platform shall have small openings or holes to allow the passage of air
and to prevent uplift of the platform due to wind pressures. Openings shall not allow tools or
other normally carried equipment to pass through.
• Provide a painted metal sign in Arabic & English, attached to the platform, stating the
maximum load capacity of the platform / system (500 lb. Live load).
• Provide non-corrosive water tanks for carrying fresh water, with faucets at the bottom for
draining.
• Provide a fire extinguisher mounted on the platform.
• Provide lower obstruction detectors that will stop any further downward travel after contacting
an obstruction from below.
• Provide a level sensing system that will prevent the platform from being out-of-level by more
that five (5) degrees. The system shall be arranged so that either hoist operator can correct
any out-of level conditions.
• All connectors, bolts, self-locking nuts, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel.
• Provide a factory installed 8mm diameter horizontal galvanized wire rope safety line (dogline)
at the rear midrail level of the stage platform for the attachment of the lanyards from the
worker's fall protection equipment. The safety line shall be secured to a structural member of

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 286 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

the platform's deck at both ends. The connections shall be capable of sustaining a minimum of
5000 pounds before failure. Rope clips shall not be used.
• Device must be provided to lower the platform manually, at a controlled rate, in case of an
emergency.
• Power Requirements; 380VAC, 3 Phase, 60 HZ,. The power locations will be provided during
shop drawing submissions. The platform is to be powered by a dedicated electrical circuit from
power outlets. The electric cord is to be collected in a bin, mounted on the platform. Each
outlet will be provided with a strain relief anchor. See 2.6.1 Power Requirements for further
details.
• Provide stage tie down anchors. Tie downs shall have a round base, which extends a
minimum of eight inches above the roof membrane, for ease of flashing. The anchor eye
attachment shall be stainless steel.

210 GUIDED TYPE FALL ARREST SYSTEM FOR ROOF MAINTENANCE ACCESS & SAFETY
• Manufacturer: Latchways plc, Hopton Park , Devizes Wiltshire SN10 2JP Tel: +44 (0)1380
732700 or equal and approved by Architect.
- System reference: Latchways Mansafe Class B1 System or equal and approved by Architect

• Anchorage device: Horizontal stainless steel cable.


• Overall system length: Refer to Architect's drawings - extent to be verfied by system supplier.
• Intermediate support spacing: 3 metres.
• Accessories/ Other requirements: Manufacturer to provide 2 complete sets of Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE). Each set is to comprise of a Full body fall arrest harness, suitable
length lanyard and 1 x removable transfastener. All the equipment is to be supplied in a
suitable PPE storage holdall. All accessories should be supplied which are necessary to
complete safe installation in accordance with the manufactuer's printed instructions. Also
provide at the entrance to the system suitable signage giving instructions for operating and
directives about use of personal protective equipment - clearly state purpose and limitations of
the system.
• Installation: To BS 7883 by the system manufacturer or a contractor approved by the system
manufacturer.
• Structural anchors: Type recommended by the system manufacturer to suit the structure/ fabric
into which they will be fixed.

220 SINGLE POINT ANCHORAGE DEVICES For Roof Maintenance Safety


• Standard: To BS EN 795.
• Manufacturer: Latchways plc, Hopton Park , Devizes Wiltshire SN10 2JP Tel: +44 (0)1380
732700 - or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Pushlock Safety Eyebolt System or equal and approved by Architect.
• Type: 200mm x M12 eyebolt, 19mm I/D.
• Material/ Finish: Stainless Steel - as per Manufacturer's recommendations.
• Locations: Refer to Architect's drawings.
• Installation: To BS 7883.
• Other requirements: Provide with each anchor:
- A backing disc giving the manufacturer's name and telephone number and the date of
installation.
- A certificate of compliance with testing and examination requirements of BS EN 365.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 287 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

DESIGN/ PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

420 WIND LOADING


• General: Design the access/ safety system to withstand specified wind loads with equipment in
position of maximum exposure and in parked position.
• Wind loads:
The exact wind speed criteria is to be approved by Structural Engineer.

430 SAFETY
• General: The equipment as installed must have no irregularities/ projections capable of
inflicting personal injury.
• Finished surfaces and edges of all accessible parts: Regular and smooth.

440 DESIGN LIFE/ MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME


• Design life of access/ safety system: Not less than 50 years.
• Schedule for maintenance and for replacement of components: Submit.

450A TESTING OF SUSPENDED ACCESS EQUIPMENT


• Pre-installation testing: Test roof rig at manufacturer's/ supplier's works. The rig must be
capable of lifting and sustaining a proof load of 125% of the specified rated load without
suffering damage or permanent deformation.
• Post-installation testing: Immediately on completion of installation, or when otherwise agreed,
examine and test the complete installation in accordance with recommendations given in BS
6037-1, clause 14. Give adequate notice of testing arrangements.
• Certificates for works and site testing: Submit within 7 days of completion of satisfactory
acceptance tests.

460 ASSESSMENT/ TESTING OF FIXING POINTS FOR ANCHOR DEVICES


• Design and installation of fixings in steelwork or timber: Verified by calculation to be capable of
sustaining the relevant static and dynamic test forces specified in BS EN 795, clause 4.3.
• Fixings in other materials: Verify suitability by carrying out a test in a sample of the material.
The sample must be capable of sustaining the relevant static and dynamic test forces specified
in BS EN 795, clause 4.3. Thereafter, each structural anchor installed in that material must be
subjected to an axial pull out force of 5 kN to confirm the soundness of the fixing. The
structural anchor must sustain the force for a minimum of 15 seconds.

FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

510 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY GENERALLY


• Machine cutting, drilling and assembly: Carry out as much as possible in the workshop. Obtain
approval for any reassembly on site.
• Dissimilar metal surfaces of assembly components/ supports/ fixings: Isolate to prevent
electrolytic corrosion.

520 PROTECTION
• General: Do not deliver to site any components or assemblies that cannot be installed
immediately or unloaded into a suitable well protected storage area.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 288 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

530 SUITABILITY OF STRUCTURE/ FABRIC


• Visual and geometric survey of supporting structure and fabric: Carry out before commencing
installation of access/ safety system. Report immediately if structure/ fabric will not allow
required accuracy/ security of erection/ fixing.

540 MECHANICAL FIXINGS


• Materials: Unless otherwise recommended by equipment manufacturer:
- Connecting bolts and other fixings fully accessible for inspection: Mild steel hot dip
galvanized to BS 7371-6.
Nuts: Tapped after galvanizing.
- Cast-in anchors and other fixings not accessible for routine inspection: Austenitic stainless
steel, grade 1.4401 (316) to BS EN 10088-1.

550 FASTENERS, INSERTS AND BOLTS FOR BUILDING IN


• Supplier: Equipment manufacturer/ supplier.

560 FIXINGS FOR SECURING EQUIPMENT


• Adjustment capability: Adequate three dimensional adjustment to accommodate building
structure/ fabric irregularities.

570 FIXING ANCHOR INSTALLATION


• Site drilling or cutting into structure/ fabric: Permitted only in approved locations.
• Distance between all fixing devices and edges of supporting material: Not less than
recommended by fixing manufacturer.

605 IDENTIFICATION AND REGISTRATION LABELS FOR SUSPENDED ACCESS SYSTEM


• Provision:
- Suspension rig and any non-dedicated track systems: Provide and fix a permanent label
giving:
a) Manufacturer's name, address and telephone number.
b) Name and/ or reference code of model.
c) Serial number and year of manufacture.
d) Rated load of suspended platform (where the platform is permanently attached to the
system) or maximum total suspended load (where the platform can be derigged).
- Suspended platform: As a), b) and c) above, plus
d) Rated load and self weight in kg of the platform.
e) Maximum number of persons allowed on the platform.
f) Identification mark or number of the suspension rig or rigs with which the platform is
compatible (where the platform can be derigged).
- Suspension and safety ropes (detachable): Marked with length and unique identification
number.
• Location: In positions such that labels can be easily read.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 289 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

615 CE MARKING AND DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY OF PERMANENTLY INSTALLED


SUSPENDED ACCESS EQUIPMENT
• Marking: Equipment to be clearly labelled with a CE mark indicating conformity with the current
edition of the Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations.
• Declaration of conformity: Provide for the complete installation a declaration of conformity with
Machinery Directive 98/37/EC together with certificates of incorporation for parts not supplied
or installed by the main equipment manufacturer or supplier.

640 MARKING OF ANCHOR DEVICES


• Provision: Provide on or near each anchor device a label or other clear marking giving:
- Manufacturer's name and telephone number.
- Serial number and year of manufacture of device.
- Maximum number of personnel that may be attached to the device at any one time.
- Requirements for energy absorbers, ground clearance, etc.
• Anchor devices intended solely for use with personal protective equipment: Indicate restriction
of use by pictogram or other suitable marking on or near the device.

710 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION For Suspended Access Systems


• General: Install, test and commission electrical work forming part of the access equipment
system up to and including wiring of isolating switch or switches provided by the electrical
contractor, all in accordance with BS 7671 'Requirements for Electrical Installations' (The IEE
Wiring Regulations) and requirements of the Electricity Supply Company, ensuring compliance
with design and performance requirements, to provide a safe, well insulated, earth protected
system.
• Components/ Fasteners: Use waterproof components and corrosion resisting fasteners
throughout. Avoid contact between dissimilar metals.
• Control system: Designed so that an electrical supply failure, or the failure or malfunction of
any electrical component, will cause the system to fail to safety.
• Failsafe provision: In the event of power failure the system must be capable of delivering the
working platform to a position of safety either by hand winding or by a controlled gravity
descent device.
• Isolating switches: Clearly labelled to identify purpose. Labels to display an emergency contact
telephone number.

810 SERVICE/ MAINTENANCE For Suspended Access Systems


• General: Following acceptance of the completed installation, service and maintain the
equipment for the period stated below as and at intervals recommended by the manufacturer.
Such maintenance to include a 'call-out' service during normal working hours to maintain the
equipment in an acceptable and safe condition.
• Service/ Maintenance period: 12 months from date of issue of the Practical Completion
Certification.

815 WARRANTY
• Provide manufacturer's warranty for one (1) year against defects in materials and installation,
executed by an authorised company official.

820 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS


• Equipment and accessories: Where appropriate, mark in such a way that it is possible to
identify the correct mode of operation for their safe use.
Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 290 of 367
equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

830 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL


• General: Provide, for inclusion in the Building Manual, printed instructions and recommended
procedures to be established by the Employer for operating and routinely maintaining the
equipment. Provide diagrams where appropriate.
• Content:
- Instructions for assembling/ erecting equipment for use.
- Comprehensive operating instructions, including safety and emergency procedures, for all
motions including upward, downward and lateral travel, and slew.
- Servicing and planned maintenance procedures, including assembly instructions where
maintenance necessitates dismantling of machinery parts.
- List of replacement parts, with references.
- Recommended procedures for testing equipment.

840 AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS


• General: After commissioning/ testing of the equipment provide as installed drawings for
inclusion in the Building Manual.
- Number of sets: 3.
• Drawing content:
- Contractor's name and contract number.
- Location and date of installation.
- Manufacturer's name, model and type numbers.
- General arrangement of the complete installation.
- Electrical circuit wiring diagrams complete with details and ratings of all items of equipment.

Issue 0: Construction Documents N25 Permanent access and safety Page 291 of 367
equipment
P12
Fire stopping systems
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

P12 Fire stopping systems

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install all fire stopping necessary to ensure the fire routing
integrity of walls and floors in accordance with this specification. The scope of work includes
but is not limited to:
- Supply and install of fire stopping systems of all service; individual and multiple penetrations
through fire rated floors and walls including all framing, fixings, fixtures, sealants, internal
floors, fire resistant bounding, pipe collars, etc., etc.
- Fixings to superstructure
- Any secondary steel required to achieve intended design profile and appearance and design
performance criteria.
- Fixings and method of alignment for the above.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• The completion of the design and the preparation of the documents are to be sufficient to
determine the location and form of all relevant details including joints, fixings, clips, edge
details, expansion joints, abutments, brackets, steps and interfaces to adjacent construction
with associated fixings, flushings and seals.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 293 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

GENERAL

110A FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM GENERAL


• General: Provide Firestopping in accordance with requirements of the contract documents.
The contractor shall:
- Be responsible for the installation of the Firestopping work based upon the design and the
requirements of the specification namely – 1,2,3,4 hours insulation and integrity as defined
in BS 476 to all seals and all penetrating services created by their own works in accordance
with the relevant code of practice, standards and regulations contained therein.
- Be responsible for the final selection of materials, sizes, thickness, types, locations of fixings
and related accessories, all in accordance with specified standards detailed herein and
submit samples for review by the architect prior to manufacture.
- Be responsible for compliance with the requirements of the current building regulations,
building acts and the health and safety regulations. Submit all information necessary to the
relevant statuary authorities to obtain approval in timely manner so as to comply with the
construction programme.
- Be responsible for bring attention to the client or main contractor other breaches in
compartmentation requiring additional work to be done.
- Co-operation with the planning supervisor and compliance with the health and safety plan for
the project.

• Scope of Work: The work of this section includes, but is not limited to the following:
- Openings in fire resisting walls, floors and roofs both empty and those containing
penetrations such as cables, conduits, cable trays, pipe, ducts and similar penetrating items.
- Openings at each floor level in fire rated shafts or stairwells.
- Gaps between the tops of fire rated walls and structural deck or roof assemblies.
- Penetrations though smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalised areas
involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
- Firestops for Multi cable transit penetrations where no conduit is used for penetration
through fire rated partitions and floors.
" Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
- Voids between fire rated floor slabs and exterior curtain walls are to be firestopped,
using flexible fire and smoke seal installed by qualified Installers. The Firestop Installer shall
make proposals that allow for the integrity of the floor level compartment to be maintained
with regard to fire (as defined by BS 476), and for additional features including, water
resistance, air tightness, movement accommodation both in tension and shear, resistance to
ageing with proof of function over extended time span. The Firestop Installer shall provide
documentation which shows the system proposed has been tested to recognised
international standards for all the above especially with regard to fire tests relating
specifically to curtain wall assemblies.
- Openings Through Floors and Walls
Fire rated: Metal sleeves for fire rated openings through floors and walls shall be provided
under applicable mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection specification sections.
Non-rated: Non-rated openings through floors and walls shall be sealed under applicable
mechanical and electrical specification sections.
- Intumescent Fireproofing

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 294 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

111 REFERENCES
• British Standards (BS):
- BS 476, Fire Tests on Building Materials
- BS 6401, Method of measurement, in the agency, of the specific optical density of smoke
generated by materials.
- BS6399: Loading for buildings
Part 1: 1996: Code of practice for dead and imposed loads Part 3: 1988: Code of practice for
Imposed roof loads
• Durability Criteria: DafStb guidelines for the protection and repair of concrete building
components, Part 4, Section 2.4.5.6, with subsequent fire testing to ensure long term
functionality.
• Sound Insulation: Provide through penetration Firestop Systems and joints Firestop Systems
with sound insulation where a minimum of 54 dB sound reduction is achieved.
• Where the language in any documents referred to herein be in the form of a recommendation
or suggestion, such recommendations or suggestions shall be deemed to be mandatory under
this contract. The qualified installer shall be responsible for ensuring that all materials and
processes employed in the works are compatible with each other and meet the current
requirements of the relevant British standards and codes of practice. Reference to a code or
standard shall be deemed to include all other codes and standards referred to in the specified
code or standard.

115 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING


• General: Deliver and store materials in manufacturers' original packaging labelled to show
name, brand, type and grade.
• Store materials in protected dry location off ground in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Do not open packaging nor remove labels until time for installation.

116 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS


• Environmental Requirements: Do not proceed with the work when environmental conditions
are unfavourable, unless the work will proceed in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements and instructions and any agreements or restrictions of the pre construction
conference. Maintain adequate temperature and ventilation conditions to ensure proper
application and curing of Firestopping. Do not use materials that are beyond manufacturers
recommendations for shelf life.

117 COORDINATION & SCHEDULING


• General: Do not install Firestopping system(s) until work within opening has been completed,
co ordinate with other applicable sections. Schedule work of other trades so that Firestopping
applications can be inspected prior to being covered by subsequent construction.

118 WARRANTY
• Firestopping Warranty: Submit for employers' documentation. Furnish written warranty signed
by the qualified installer, agreeing to repair or replace work which has shown any evidence of
deterioration, failed to provide an airtight seal, failed to provide a watertight seal where
required, failed to provide a required acoustic seal, failed in adhesion or cohesion, or otherwise
failed as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. Upon notification of such defects,
within the warranty period, make necessary repairs or replacement at the convenience of the
employer.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 295 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

120 FIRESTOP SEALANT


" Usage: For use in small openings 300 mm diameter or less, penetrations subject to
movement, in non combustible pipes, non combustible conduits, non combustible ducts,
control joints, slab edge and exterior wall voids, as a sealant for smoke barrier construction,
fire and smoke dampers, head of wall details and fire doors in masonry or gypsum drywall
partitions. Provide one of the following (P12/121, P12/122 or p12/123):

121 SILICONE SEALANT


• Material: One part, low modulus, moisture activated CP601S Elastic Firestop silicone sealant
capable of withstanding high movement in compression and extension.

122 INTUMESCENT SEALANT


• Material: Graphite based, one part CP611A / FS ONE High Pressure Exerting Intumescent
paste unaffected by water or moisture when cured containing no solvents, inorganic fibres, or
silicone compounds, with minimum exerting pressure of 5 Bars.

123 ELASTOMERIC SPRAY & COATINGS


• Material: CP672 Firestop Joint Spray, CP601S Firestop Elastic Sealant, CP606 Firestop Joint
and Gap Filler Elastomeric spray and coatings designed for usage over architectural joints that
contain dynamic movement due to seismic, wind sway or thermal expansion conditions.

127 FIRE STOPPING ABOVE CEILINGS


• Manufacturer: Knauff L.L.C, P.O Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 3377 170 or equal
and approved by Architect.
• Fire Rating: To achieve 30 to 120 minute fire rating as required.
- Product Reference: CW Stud Framework with studs at 600mm centres. One or two layers of
15mm Gypsum wall board lining to each side fixed using drywall screws at 300mm centres -
layers of wall board increased to achieve desired fire rating.
- Head Condition: floor & ceiling channel fixed to underside of concrete slab
- Deflection Allowance: 15mm
• Cavity Width: Refer to Architect's drawings
• Accessories: Stone Mineral Wool fire stopping to perimeter gaps as neccessary
• Other Requirements: Fire / Smoke sealant around service penetrations.

128 CEILING CAVITY BARRIER


• Manufacturer: Knauff L.L.C, P.O Box 112871, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 3377 170 or equal
and approved by Architect.
- Product Reference: Fire & Smoke Barrier 30 minute integrity and insulation cavity barrier
• Fasteners: Fixed to underside of structural slab to manufacturer's recommendations.
• Other Requirements: Fire / Smoke sealant around service penetrations

130 FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM TO INDIVIDUAL SERVICES PENETRATIONS TO FIRE


RESISTING WALLS AND FLOORS
• Joint filler: Submit proposals.
- Size or thickness: Submit proposals .
- Pipe outside diameter: Submit proposals.
• Sealant: Submit proposals.
- Colour: White .

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 296 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

130A FIRESTOPS MORTARS / COMPOUNDS


• Usage/Material: Pre-packaged, dry mixes of CP636/CP637 Firestop Mortar, CP638 Structural
Grade Firestop Mortar consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and
lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at project site to form a non shrinking,
homogenous mortar, fire and impact resistant, load bearing where required, for use in large
openings, in static, non moving, penetrations such as cable trays, electrical and
communication bundles, conduit and combustible sleeves and pipes.

140A FIRESTOPPING FOR COMBUSTIBLE PENETRATING ITEMS


• Usage: For use in openings where either plastic pipes insulated pipes or insulated cables are
installed. For Plastic Pipes/ducts upto 3 Dia provide Intumescent Sealants as described below
(P12/141) for the entire project, and for greater Diameters provide Intumescent collars/wraps
as described below (P12/142, P12/143) for the entire project:

141 INTUMESCENT GRAFITE BASED SEALANTS


• Material: One part graphite based CP611A / FS ONE High Pressure exerting Intumescent
sealant unaffected by water or moisture when cured, with a minimum pressure of 5 Bars.

142 FIRESTOP PIPE CLOSING DEVICES


• Material: Prefabricated CP642 Firestop Collar, CP643 Firestop Collar, CP680 Firestop Cast In
devices unaffected by humidity, moisture and frost.

143 INTUMESCENT WRAP STRIPS PIPE CLOSING DEVICES


• Material: Solvent free Intumescent CP648 Pipe wrap strips, unaffected by water, frost or
ultraviolet light.

150 FIRESTOPPING FOR SMALL COMPLEX MULTIPLE SERVICE PENETRATIONS


• Usage: For use in small openings 440 x 550 mm or less, multiple complex penetrations, non
combustible pipes, non combustible conduits, non combustible ducts, control joints, slab edge
and exterior wall voids, as a sealant for smoke barrier construction, fire and smoke dampers,
head of wall details and fire doors in masonry or gypsum drywall partitions.
• Material: Expanding Seal CP620 and CP657 firestop bricks made of two part graphite / resin
based, unaffected by moisture, or water when cured.

160A FIRESTOPPING FOR LARGE COMPLEX MULTIPLE SERVICE PENETRATIONS


• Reference: whenever it is possible, use Firestop Mortar (Ref: clause P12/130A)
• Alternative option and only for the following usage: For use in large vertical openings, multiple
complex penetrations, non combustible pipes, non combustible conduits, non combustible
ducts, control joints, slab edge and exterior wall voids, as a sealant for smoke barrier
construction, fire and smoke dampers, and head of wall details in masonry or gypsum drywall
partitions. Provide the following (P12/161):

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 297 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

161 COATED BOARD SYSTEM


• Usage: Only if Firestop Mortar could not be used.
• Material: CP671/CP670 Firestop Coated Board System comprising high density mineral fibre
board, minimum density 160 kg/m3, pre coated with chemical Intumescent or ablative coating
to form a non shrinking seal, fire resistant, for use in large openings, in static, non moving,
penetrations such as cable trays, electrical and communication bundles, conduit and con
combustible sleeves and pipes, multiple complex penetrations, non combustible pipes, non
combustible conduits, non combustible ducts, control joints, slab edge and other interior wall
voids, as a sealant for smoke barrier construction, fire and smoke dampers, head of wall
details in masonry or gypsum drywall partitions.

170A FIRESTOPPING FOR CABLE TRUNKING INTERNALS


• Usage: For use inside cable trunking at the point of passage through compartment wall or
floor. Provide the following (P12/171) for the entire project:

171 FIRESTOP BRICKS


• Material: Re-usable, dustless, gas tight, CP657 Firestop Intumescent expanding bricks
composed of water insoluble expansion agents and fire retardant additives.

180 FIRESTOPPING FOR DIAMOND CORED HOLES


• Usage: For use in diamond cored holes, multiple complex penetrations, non combustible
pipes, non combustible conduits, as a sealant for smoke barrier construction, in masonry or
concrete partitions. Provide one of the followings (P12/181,P12/182):

181 FORMED COMPRESSIBLE PLUGS


• Re-usable, dustless, gas tight, CP656 Firestop Intumescent heat expanding plugs composed
of water insoluble expansion agents and fire retardant additives.

182 INTUMESCENT SEALANT


• Refer to P12/141 for approved material

190A FIRESTOPPING TO EDGE OF SLAB TO INTERSECTION OF FACADE WITH FLOOR


• Usage: Elastomeric systems CP 672 spray applied latex designed for usage in joints that
contain dynamic movement due to seismic, wind sway or thermal expansion conditions and
are specifically tested under direct flame front fire conditions in full size curtain wall mock-ups.

195 TEMPORARY FIRE STOPPING


• Refer to P12/171 for approved material

199 DAMMING MATERIAL / VOID FILLERS


• Material / Usage: Non combustible or appropriately tested CF125 - 50 Fire Rated Backing
Foam insulation for use as a damming material and / or void filler for tested and rated Firestop
system(s) as per manufacturers' recommendation. These materials are only to be used in
conjunction with tested Firestop systems.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 298 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210A SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


• Performance Requirements: Provide Firestop materials and systems produced, tested and
installed for sound insulation and to resist the spread of fire and the passage of smoke and
gases through openings in fire rated assemblies. Design and install the Firestopping system(s)
so that penetrating items may be removed or inserted after installation of the Firestopping
system(s) while still maintaining the required fire resistance of the system.
• Firestop System Tests and Ratings: Provide materials which have been tested and rated as
systems applicable to each Firestop condition in the work, as listed by a qualified testing
agency and is acceptable to the local authority.
• Durability: Provide Firestop systems which have been tested and rated to withstand ageing in
normal service life between 25 and 30 years in accordance with DafStb guidelines for the
repair and protection of building components part 4, section 2.4.5.6. with subsequent fire
testing to ensure long-term functionality.
• Through Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide systems tested in accordance with BS476
methods for type of penetration required. Provide a seal completely filling all annular spaces to
prevent the passage of flame, smoke and toxic gases through the opening in the fire rated
construction in which it is installed. When the penetrating items are subject to movement, the
Firestop systems shall be based upon elastomeric Firestop sealant such that movement of the
penetrations shall not affect the adhesion or integrity of the Firestop system.
• Firestop Joint Systems: Provide systems tested in accordance with BS476 methods or type of
joint system required.
• Leakage Rating: Provide Firestop systems and rated to function as an effective airtight seal
preventing passage of smoke and gases in normal service as well as under exposure to heat
and fire conditions. Do not use materials to function as air seals if such materials are known to
shrink with curing or ageing.
• Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide Firestop materials rated as required by laws, codes,
ordinances and regulations, when tested in accordance with BS476, Part 7, for flame spread
and BS6401, for smoke development.
• Sound Insulation: Provide through penetration Firestop Systems and joints Firestop Systems
with sound insulation where a minimum of 54 dB sound reduction is achieved.
• Water Resistance: Provide Firestop systems resistant to degradation from moisture during
normal service before exposure to heat and fire. Firestop systems used in the following
locations shall also function as a watertight seal preventing passage of water
- Penetrations in exterior wall.
- WC and lavatory areas.
- Mechanical equipment rooms.
• Building Movement: Provide Firestop systems suitable to withstand building movements,
including thermal movements, loading deflection, shrinkage, creep and similar movements.
• Compatibility: Provide only the Firestop systems that are explicitly recommended by the
manufacturer for the application, and which have been determined by tests to be totally
compatible with the adjoining construction and each other, as stated in the manufacturers
published data certified by the manufacturer for each application. Firestop systems are not
intended to support live loads or traffic (unless specifically designed and tested to do so)
• Material Content: Provide Firestop materials which are non-toxic, non hazardous, and do not
contain asbestos fibres or dust particles or other substance prohibited by law.
• Co-ordination with Insulation Coverings: Provide Firestopping that does not require the
removal of insulation coverings integral to the penetrating item. Insulation coverings include

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 299 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

thermal and acoustical insulation's and their protective jackets and coverings and insulation /
coverings for electrified components.
• Acoustic Barriers: Where specified provide Firestop of known acoustic properties in order that
the rating of acoustic partitions is maintained.
• Accessories: Provide components for each Firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials. Use only components specified by the Firestopping manufacturer and approved by
the qualified testing and inspection agency for the designated fire resistance rated systems.
Accessories include but are not limited to the following items:
- Permanent forming / damming / backing materials
- Temporary forming materials
- Substrate primers.
- Collars.
- Steel sleeves.
• For Firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products
that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
- For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture
resistant through penetration Firestop systems.
- Firestopping use in floors of mechanical, electrical, janitor's rooms or closets and toilets
rooms, kitchens, cafeterias, pantries and walls in such spaces where any portion of the
Firestopping is 75 mm or less from the floor surface shall be watertight as well as fire
resistant to degradation from moisture during normal service before exposure to heat and
fire.
- For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 100 mm or more in width and exposed
to possible loading and traffic, provide Firestop systems capable of supporting the floor
loads involved in accordance with the requirements of BS6399 Parts 1 and 3.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 300 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

220 SUBMITTALS
• Combined Submittals for Firestop Systems: Combine the submittals required for every
component part in the Firestop systems to be used in the work. Show in the submittals that the
Firestop systems have received the prior approval of the construction manager; the qualified
installer awarded the work, and the manufacturer of each principal component.
• Design Drawing: Furnish design drawings for the fabrications and installation of the work.
Include the following:
- Indicate for each Firestopping condition the specific Firestop system and construction
assembly, including size and configuration of penetrations or voids, the thickness and
attachment of materials, and the surrounding construction. Indicate the material, size and
function of the penetrating item. List the tested performance ratings of the Firestop system
for each specific application as well as fire resistance rating of the surrounding construction.
- Furnish a legend location of each Firestop system in the work.
- Identify each specific Firestop system with a type designation specific to the project and
include in location legend. Indicate corresponding testing agency and system identification
with year of test.
- Identify each condition for which there is no tested and rated Firestop system in
existence and furnish a certified design suitable for the condition as approved by the
manufacturers' fire protection engineer.
• Supplementary Product Literature: Submit for architects' information. Furnish manufacturers
literature describing the general properties of each product to be used in the work.
• Certification: Submit the following:
- Manufacturers Certification: Furnish certification signed by the primary manufacturer of the
Firestop materials, stipulating which Firestop systems are proposed for use in the work, and
stating that the installer is able to install said Firestop systems.
- System Test Reports: Furnish certified test reports from the testing agency performing the
Firestop system tests, indicating identification of the corresponding system design number, a
test summary and a conclusion verifying compliance with specified requirements.
- Engineered Deviations: Furnish certification from Firestop systems manufacturer, identifying
each condition for which there is no tested and rated Firestop system in existence, and
describing a suitable design for the condition as based on modification of a tested system
and approved by the manufacturer's fire protection engineer.
• Statement of Manufacturer's Review: Submit statement, signed by the qualified installer,
stating that the architect's drawings and specifications, the shop drawings and product data
have been reviewed with qualified representatives of the materials manufacturers, and that
they are in agreement that the selected materials and systems are proper and adequate for the
application shown including compatibility with adjacent systems and materials.
• Statement of Application: Submit for employers' documentation. Furnish statement in form
stipulated by architect, signed by the qualified installer, stating that the work was provided in
compliance with the contract document and the installation proper for the conditions of
application and use.
• Record Documents: Submit for employer's documentation. Furnish record drawings annotated
with the changes made during installation of the work so as to be a complete set of as installed
plans. Use design drawings as basis to show changes. Accurately depict the entire
Firestopping system and surrounding construction.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 301 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

230 QUALITY ASSURANCE


• Qualified Installer Quality Assurance Responsibilities: Qualified Installer is solely responsible
for quality control of the work and undivided responsibility of the Firestop systems for the entire
work.
Qualified Installer: The firestopping work shall be performed by a qualified Installer who shall
be trained and approved by the Firestop system manufacturer in the use of the materials and
equipment to be employed in the work.
• Firestop Manufacturer: Provide materials for each Firestopping and each through penetration
type as produced by one manufacturer for the entire project. Do not use Firestop material
produced by any manufacturer who will not agree to send a qualified technical representative
to the project site, when requested, for the purpose of rendering advice concerning the proper
installation of materials.
• Field Samples: Prior to the pre construction conference, provide a field sample for each type,
condition and application of Firestopping in the building at final installation locations. Utilise the
same materials and installation methods in the sample as required for the final work. Schedule
the installation with allowance for sufficient time so that the sample may be examined and any
necessary adjustments made, at least 1 week prior to date scheduled for commencing
installation of the work. When accepted, sample areas shall serve as the standard for
materials, workmanship, and appearance for such work throughout the project and shall
remain a part of the final work.
• Regulatory Requirement: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances
and regulations of all authorised having jurisdictions. Obtain necessary approvals from all
authorities including the building control officer and the Civil Defence Officer if required.

PRODUCTS

305 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION


• Certification: For products specified generically, submit evidence of compliance with the
specification.
• Acceptable evidence: Agrément certificate.

310A BOARDS - MINERAL FIBRE HIGH DENSITY LIGHTWEIGHT


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP671 Firestop Coated Board System and CP670 Fire Safety Board
System

315A FIRESTOP FLEXIBLE INTUMESCENT BRICKS


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP 657 Firestop Flexible Bricks..

320A INTUMESCENT EXPANDING FOAMS


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP620 Expanding Fire Seal

325A FIRESTOP MORTARS


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP636/CP637 Firestop Mortar

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 302 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

330A HIGH STRENGTH STRUCTURAL MORTARS


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP638 High Strength Structural Grade Firestop Mortar

335 INTUMESCENT FOAMS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Product reference: Submit proposals.

340A FORMED COMPRESSIBLE INTUMESCENT PLUGS


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP656 Firestop Plug

345A INTUMESCENT PILLOWS


• Composition: Sealed polyethylene bags containing graphite and vermiculite granules treated
with fire activated chemicals.
• Integral reinforced eyelets: Required.
• Linking cable: Non-corrosive cotton-coated wire.
• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP651 Firestop Cushion.

350A INTUMESCENT GRAFITE BASED SEALANTS


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP611A / FS ONE High Pressure Intumescent Sealant

365A ELASTOMERIC SPRAY COATINGS


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP672 Firestop Joint Spray

370A INTUMESCENT WRAP STRIPS PIPE CLOSING DEVICES


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP649 Pipe Wrap

375A PIPE COLLARS - METAL INSULATED WRAP


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP642 / CP643 Firestop Collar

380A CAST IN FIRESTOP INTUMESCENT COLLAR


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP680 Cast In Firestop Device.

385A SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL


" Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CF125 - 50 Fire Rated Backing Foam.

390A SEALANTS - FIRE RESISTING SILICONE


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP601S Elastic Firestop Sealant

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 303 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

395A SEALANTS - ONE PART FIRE RESISTING ACRYLIC


• Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect
- Product reference: CP606 Firestop Joint and Gap Filler

EXECUTION

605 WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY


• Gaps: Seal gaps between building elements and services, to provide fire resistance and resist
the passage of smoke.
• Adjacent surfaces: Prevent overrun of sealant or mortar on to finished surfaces.
• Certificates: All Firestop Applicators shall be trained and certified by the approved
manufacturers qualified field Engineers.

610 INSTALLING FIRESTOP SEALANT


• Installation (joints): Install CP 601S Elastic Fire Resistant Sealant in all movement and
expansion joints in all fire compartment walls and floors of concrete, masonry, metal or glass
construction to provide up to 4 hours insulation and integrity when subject to the test conditions
of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366 after age testing to DafStb guidelines. Sealant to provide +/- 25%
MAF in tension and a water and gas tight seal from a minimum depth of 6mm. All installations
to be in full accordance with the manufacturer's application instructions.
• Installation (penetration): Install CP 601S Elastic Fire Resistant Silicone Sealant around all
metal service penetrations in all fire compartment walls and floors of concrete, masonry, metal
or glass construction to provide up to 4 hours insulation and integrity when subject to the test
conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366 after age testing to DafStb guidelines. Sealant to
provide +/- 50% MAF in shear and a water and gas tight seal from a minimum depth of 6mm
and be resistant to degradation from alcohol and methanol cleaning agents. All installations to
be in full accordance with manufacturer's application instructions.

620A INSTALLING FIRESTOP ACRYLIC SEALANT


• Installation: Install CP606 Joint Filler in all low movement and construction joints in all fire
compartment walls of concrete, masonry, drywall and metal construction to provide up to 4
hours insulation and integrity when subject to the test conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366
after age testing to DafStb guidelines. Sealant to provide +/- 10% MAF in tension and a water
and gas tight seal from a minimum depth of 6mm. All installations to be in full accordance with
manufacturer's application instructions.

630 INSTALLING FIRESTOP INTUMESCENT SEALANT


• Installation: Install CP611A/FS ONE graphite based pressure exerting intumescent mastic
around plastic pipe, insulated metal pipe, bunched cable penetrations in walls and ceiling
expanding with minimum 5 bar to provide 1,2,3,4 hours insulation and integrity under test
conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366 and age tested to DafStb guidelines. Pipe sizes up to
82mm dia in dry wall, concrete and masonry. All installations to be in full accordance with
manufacturer's application instructions.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 304 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

640A INSTALLING ELASTOMERIC SPRAY


• Installation: Apply CP672 Sprayable fire-rated mastic with minimum of 50% movement
capability for Top-of-wall joints, curtain wall / edge of slab and expansion joints in concrete,
masonry, and gypsum and curtain wall construction to provide up to 3 hours insulation and
integrity when subject to the test conditions of BS 476: Pt 20/prEN 1366, after age testing to
DafStb guidelines. All installations to be in full accordance with manufacturer's application
instructions.

650A INSTALLING FLEXIBLE INTUMESCENT BRICKS


• Installation: Install CP657 pressure exerting graphite based intumescent fire prevention blocks
around cable tray, bunched cable including telecom cable and metal, insulated metal and
plastic pipes in solid walls and floors and dry wall from 100mm thick with an expansion ratio of
1 : 5 providing dust, fibre, asbestos, halogen and solvent free installation for gas and air tight
temporary or permanent firestopping with temperature resistance of –50 to +60 deg C for up to
4 hours integrity and insulation when subjected to the test conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN
1366 and after age testing to DafStb guidelines. Installation to be in full accordance with
manufacturer's application instructions.

660A INSTALLING BOARDING


• Install CP671/CP670 Coated Board System around all service penetrations including cable
tray, ladder rack, trunking, metal and insulated metal pipes, plastic pipes and ductwork with
dampers. Coated board is to have minimum density of 150kg/m3 or 160kg/m3 and provide an
air tight seal with odourless and solvent free bonding and coating agents when used in solid
walls and floors and in dry wall from 50mm width and provide up to four hours integrity and
insulation when subjected to the test conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366 and after age
testing to DafStb guidelines. Installation to be in full accordance with manufacturer's
application instructions.

670A INSTALLING FIRESTOP METAL PIPE JACKET


• Installation: Install CP642 Firestop Jacket with graphite based intumescent to all flammable
plastic pipes of B1/B2 rating ranging in diameter from 32mm to 250mm with pipe wall thickness
from 1.8 to 16.2mm in the following: PVC, PVCC, PVC-U, PVC-HI, PP, ABS, PE, PE-HC, duel
line pneumatic tube conveyors, pipes with acoustic insulation and insulated metal and plastic
pipes. The Jacket is to exert an expansion pressure of 2 bar and provide up to 4 hours integrity
and insulation in walls and floors of concrete, masonry, timber and dry wall under test
conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366 and after age testing to DafStb guidelines. Adjustable
fixing points and casing must be galvanised to minimum 70 microns 275 g/m² zinc overlay. All
installations to be in full accordance with manufacturer's application instructions.

680A INSTALLING INTUMESCENT PIPE WRAPS


• Installation: Install CP648 Intumescent Firestop Wrap with graphite base in a moisture
resistant polyethylene pack with self adhesive strip to all flammable uPVC plastic pipes of B2
rating ranging in diameter from 50mm to 160mm with pipe wall thickness from 2.3 to 3.8mm in
solid walls and floors. The Wrap is to exert an expansion pressure of 2 bar we have only
pressure of the material (measured in defined layers of the material) available, not the
pressure of the application; and provide up to 4 hours integrity and insulation in walls and
floors of concrete and masonry under test conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366. All spaces
between the wrap and the substrate to be infilled with Firestop mortar with installation to be in
full accordance with manufacturer's application instructions.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 305 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

690 APPLYING INTUMESCENT PUTTY


• Sequence: Install putty after services are permanently installed.
• Loose dust and combustible materials: Remove from the opening.

690A INSTALLING FIRESTOP INTUMESCENT FOAM


• Installation: Install CP620 Expanding Fire Seal around all services including cable and cable
trays, metal and insulated metal pipes, plastic pipes and plastic trunking in dry walls from 120
mm thick foaming agent (CFC) and solvent- free, gastight, permanent seal with reinstallation
possibility to provide up to 2 hours integrity when subject to test conditions of BS 476 Pt
20/prEN 1366 and after age testing to DafStb guidelines. CP 620 Expanding Fire Seal may
also be used for multiple service penetrations and seals painted with water-based paint. All
installations to be in full accordance with the manufacturer's application instructions.

700A INSTALLING FIRESTOP MORTAR


• Installation: Install CP636 Fire resistant cement based mortar with thermal insulating properties
from admixed perlite around all services including metal, plastic and insulated metal pipes,
cable tray, trunking and ductwork with HEVAC damper frame allowing up to 60% cable loading
as a percentage of the opening size in all solid walls and floors from 75mm thick with no
asbestos, phenol or halogen constituents to provide smoke, gas and water tight seal with up to
4 hours integrity and insulation when subjected to the test conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN
1366 and after age testing to DafStb guidelines. All installations to be in full accordance with
manufacturer's application instructions.

710 INSTALLING BATTS


• Installing batts: Fit tight into void between the floor or wall and the penetrating services.
• Face of batts: Flush with the surface of wall, floor or soffit.
• Joints: Closed butt joints..
• Gaps between services and bulkhead: Seal with fire resisting sealant.

710A INSTALLING STRUCTURAL GRADE MORTAR


• Installation: Install CP637 Firestop Mortar around services to provide up to 4 hours fire
resistance to BS476 Pt20 (1987) / pr EN1366-3 for penetration seals. Seals to be rated Non
Combustible in accordance with BS46 Pt 4 and toxicity tested in accordance with NES 713
(issue 3). All installations to be in full accordance with manufacturer's application instructions.

720A INSTALLING HIGH STRENGTH STRUCTURAL GRADE FIRESTOP MORTAR


• Installation: Install CP638 High Strength Firestop Mortar around services to provide up to 4
hours fire resistance to BS476 Pt20 (1987) / pr EN1366-3 for penetration seals and also load
bearing performance in accordance with BS6399 parts 1 and 3. Seals to be rated Non
Combustible in accordance with BS46 Pt 4 and toxicity tested in accordance with NES 713
(issue 3). All installations to be in full accordance with manufacturer's application instructions.

730 FIXING PIPE COLLARS


• Collar fixing: Submit proposals.
• Gap around collar: Seal with joint filler and sealant.
• Length of wraps: Project 50 mm from each side of the element.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 306 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

730A INSTALLING INTUMESCENT CUSHIONS


• Installation: Install CP651 Firestop cushion with a dual temperature dependant graphite and
vermiculite intumescent powder acting at 150 °C and 300 °C with an expansion pressure of 2 –
5 bar we have only pressure data of the material (measured in defined layers of the material)
available, not the pressure of the application; inside an inner polyethylene bag within an outer,
protective woven fibreglass tear resistant bag around cable, cable tray and metal pipe
penetrations in compartment walls and floors of concrete, masonry and drywall for dust free
and odourless temporary or permanent firestopping of up to 2 hours integrity and insulation
when subjected to the test conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366 and after age testing to
DafStb guidelines. The cushion is to be temperature resistant up to 120 °C with metal tying
rings for security. Installation to be in full accordance with manufacturer's application
instructions

740A INSTALLING INTUMESCENT COMPRESSIBLE PLUGS


• Installation: Install CP656 intumescent fire prevention plugs in circular holes up to 200mm
diameter in solid walls and floors from 100mm thick to seal penetrations of flammable cables
and bunches of cables with an expansion ratio of 1:5 providing dust, fibre, halogen and solvent
free installation for gas and air tight temporary or permanent firestopping for up to 3 hours
integrity and insulation when subjected to the test conditions of BS 476 pt 20/prEN 1366 and
after age testing to DafStb guidelines. Installation to be in full accordance with manufacturer's
application instructions.

750 APPLYING SEALANT TO JOINTS


• De-greasing: Cleaner by sealant manufacturer.
• Priming: Primer by sealant manufacturer.
• Depth of sealant: 10 mm.
• Temperature: Do not apply water based sealants when they could be damaged by frost.

COMPLETION

910A CLEANING
• Masking tapes: Size and type as recommended by Firestopping manufacturer and compatible
with selected system and contiguous materials.
• Cleaning: As required by Firestopping manufacturer and compatible with selected system and
contiguous materials.
- Products: CF R-1: Foam Cleaner Solvent
- Manufacturer: Hilti or equal and approved by Architect

920A EXAMINATION
• Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the work and the conditions under
which the work would be performed. Trade contractors shall remedy conditions detrimental to
the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have
been corrected. Do not apply Firestop material until the construction defining the opening and
installation of all penetrants through the opening has been completed.

921 PREPARATION
• Surface Preparation: Perform cleaning and surface preparation immediately prior to installation
of Firestopping. Remove materials and substances from openings which re not part of the
tested Firestop system, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 307 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

922 INSTALLATION
• Firestopping Applications: Provide in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and the
accepted design drawings. Apply materials to obtain complete filling to the correct depth and
dimensions without gaps or voids. Provide Firestopping for applications including, but not
limited to, the following conditions.
- Cavity Barrier between access floor and structural slab.
- Cavity Barrier between suspended ceilings and structural slab at freestanding walls.
- Penetrations by conduits, cables, wires, cable trays, pipes, ducts and similar penetrants
through cavity barriers.
• Engineered Deviations: Where field deviate from tested system conditions or are not otherwise
reflected on design drawings and certified by manufacturer as an engineered deviation consult
with manufacturers technical representative to determine the proper system, and submit the
proposed design before proceeding.
• Void Filler: Provide to seal gaps in non-combustible type damming materials and to seal
around penetrants where the void filler is an integral part of the Firestop system.
• Bundled and Touching Penetrants: Where penetrants are bundled together or contact each
other in passing through the same opening, sufficiently separate each penetrant and
completely encapsulate with Firestopping to make a smoke tight and airtight installation.

923 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


• Manufacturers Field Service: At the start of the installation, periodically as the work
progresses, and after completion, furnish the services of the Firestop material manufacturer's
technical representative at the job site as necessary to advise on every phase of the work. As
a minimum, furnish representatives attendance during the first day of installation for each
major type of Firestop material and furnish technical assistance to the installer as may be
required.

924 IDENTIFICATION
• Identification of Finished Installation: All finished installations must be clearly and uniquely
identified with a reference label that includes the following information:
- Unique Reference Information: The fire stop system installation must be identified with a
unique reference number that can be traced back through the installers' reference system
for the specific job site. The label must also include the date of the installation, the date
inspected and handed over and the name of the installer.
- Manufacturers Information: Unique manufacturers product reference and contact details
- Installer Information: Full contact details for the installer, including name, and address and
relevant contact numbers
- System Information: Fire rating of the system as installed in the precise building location, to
include integrity and insulation values

Issue 0: Construction Documents P12 Fire stopping systems Page 308 of 367
P20
Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry items
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

P20 Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ sundry items

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install internal isolated trims / skirtings and sundry items in
accordance with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- The supply and installation of all isolated trims / skirtings and sundry items to complete the
works, including all fixings, materials, adhesives, sealants etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with the specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application

200 MEDIUM DENSITY FIBREBOARD SKIRTING BOARDS TO BOH GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Not applicable.
• Standard: To BS EN 622-5.
- Type: MDF - 75mm high.
- Formaldehyde class: To BS EN 622-1, Class E1.
• Fire rating: To BS 476-7, Class 1.
• Thickness: Refer to drawings.
Edges: Square refer to drawings for profile.
• Finish: Paint Finish, RAL 9010 - Pure White to match walls.
• Recycled content: 60% (minimum) to BS EN ISO 14021.
• Support/ Fixing: Glued. Contractor to provide finished samples of skirting for approval prior to
completing installation. 3.0m length sample in situ..

Issue 0: Construction Documents P20 Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ Page 310 of 367
sundry items
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

450A WALL GUARD PROTECTION RAIL TO B.o.H CORRIDORS


• Manufacturer: Pawling Systems. Tel: +44 845 355 6666. Email: sales@pawlingsystems.com -
or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: WG-8C or equal and approved by Architect.
• Type/ Size: Heavy Duty Impact Protection: 25mm x 197mm.
• Location: [B.o.H Areas as indicated on Architect's drawings]
• Finish/Colour: Mid Grey - submit proposals from Manufacturer's standard range for Architect
Approval.
• Fixing: E-clip, bolted to concrete / blockwork wall - as per Manufacturer's recommendations
and guidelines.

450B CORNER GUARD PROTECTION TO B.o.H CORRIDORS


• Manufacturer: Pawling Systems. Tel: +44 845 355 6666. Email: sales@pawlingsystems.com -
or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: CG-10 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Type/ Size: Heavy Duty Impact Protection: 76mm x 76mm wing dimension around 90 degree
corner.
• Location: [B.o.H Areas as indicated on Architect's drawings]
• Finish/Colour: Mid Grey - submit proposals from Manufacturer's standard range for Architect
Approval.
• Fixing: Proprietary clip, bolted to concrete / blockwork wall - as per Manufacturer's
recommendations and guidelines.

450C CORNER GUARD PROTECTION TO B.o.H KITCHEN AREAS


• Manufacturer: Pawling Systems. Tel: +44 845 355 6666. Email: sales@pawlingsystems.com -
or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: CG-51 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Type/ Size: Heavy Duty Impact Protection: 51mm x 51mm wing dimension around 90 degree
corner.
• Location: [B.o.H Areas as indicated on Architect's drawings]
• Finish/Colour: Stainless Steel - submit proposals from Manufacturer's standard range for
Architect Approval.
• Fixing: Proprietary clip, bolted to concrete / blockwork wall - as per Manufacturer's
recommendations and guidelines.

450D CORNER GUARD PROTECTION TO B.o.H LIFT DOORS


• Manufacturer: Pawling Systems. Tel: +44 845 355 6666. Email: sales@pawlingsystems.com -
or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: CG-50 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Type/ Size: Heavy Duty Impact Protection: 89mm x 89mm wing dimension around 90 degree
corner.
• Location: [B.o.H Lift Doors as indicated on Architect's drawings]
• Finish/Colour: Stainless Steel - submit proposals from Manufacturer's standard range for
Architect Approval.
• Fixing: Proprietary clip, bolted to concrete / blockwork wall - as per Manufacturer's
recommendations and guidelines.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P20 Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ Page 311 of 367
sundry items
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

EXECUTION

510 INSTALLATION GENERALLY


• Joinery workmanship: As section Z10.
• Metal workmanship: As section Z11.
• Methods of fixing and fasteners: As section Z20 where not specified.
• Straight runs: To be in one piece, or in long lengths with as few joints as possible.
• Running joints: Location and method of forming to be agreed where not detailed.
• Joints at angles: Mitre unless otherwise shown.
• Position and level: To be agreed where not detailed.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P20 Unframed isolated trims/ skirtings/ Page 312 of 367
sundry items
P21
Door/ window ironmongery
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

P21 Door/ window ironmongery

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

PRE-TENDER

10 QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS


• Quantities and locations of ironmongery are as per the door / ironmongery section .
• Fixing: As sections L10 and L20.

15 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor is to complete the supply and installation of all door ironmongery in accordance
with this specification. The scope of works includes but is not limited to the following:
- Complete ironmongery sets for fire resisting doorsets and associated fixings.
- Complete ironmongery sets for internal doorsets and associated fixings.
- Complete ironmongery sets for frameless glass entrance door/ screen and associated
fixings.
- Interfaces with associated works.
- Fixings and methods of alignment for the above.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed applications.

GENERAL

121 IRONMONGERY FROM SINGLE PROPRIETARY RANGE


• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: refer to ironmongery section .
• Principal material/ finish: Satin stainless steel, grade 1.4301 (304) .
• Items unavailable within selected range: Submit proposals.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P21 Door/ window ironmongery Page 314 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

140 SAMPLES
• General: Before placing orders with suppliers submit labelled samples of the following: All
ironmongery components .
- Conformity: Retain samples on site for the duration of the contract. Ensure conformity of
ironmongery as delivered with labelled samples.

170 IRONMONGERY FOR FIRE DOORS


• Relevant products: Ironmongery fixed to, or morticed into, the component parts of a fire
resisting door assembly.
• Compliance: Ironmongery included in successful tests to BS 476-22 or BS EN 1634-1 on door
assemblies similar to those proposed.
- Certification: Submit CERTIFIRE certificates or approved equivalent .
• Melting point of components (except decorative non functional parts): 800°C minimum.

180 CATEGORY OF DUTY FOR DOOR IRONMONGERY


• Standard: To DD 171.
- Category of duty of doors: Heavy duty .
• General: Durability of ironmongery components to be compatible with stated category of duty
of each door leaf.
- Exclusions: Ironmongery with specific duty or 'category of use' defined elsewhere.
Documentation: Before placing orders with suppliers submit documentation showing product
compliance with stated category of duty.

180A MASTER KEYS AND SUBMASTER KEYS


• Provide a minimum of 3 x Master Keys.
Provide 10 sets of Sub-Master Keys to areas to be specified specified by Employer

DOOR HANGING DEVICES

320 DOOR HINGES GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: refer to Ironmongery Schedule .
• Type: refer to Ironmongery Schedule .
• Size: refer to Ironmongery Schedule .
• Material/ finish: Satin stainless steel, grade 1.4401 (316) .
• Other requirements: None .

Issue 0: Construction Documents P21 Door/ window ironmongery Page 315 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

DOOR OPERATING DEVICES

410 OVERHEAD DOOR CLOSERS GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS EN 1154.
- Door closing devices to fire/ smoke control doors: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: As schedule .
• Type: As schedule .
• Power size: As schedule .
• Other functions: As schedule .
• Casing finish: As schedule .
• Operational adjustment:
- Variable power: Matched to size, weight and location of doors.
- Latched doors: Override latches and/ or door seals when fitted.
- Unlatched doors: Hold shut under normal working conditions.
- Closing against smoke seals of fire doors: Positive. No gaps.

471 ELECTROMAGNETIC HOLD OPEN/ SWING-FREE DEVICES (24 V) BOH AREAS


• Standard: To BS EN 1155.
- Electromagnetic devices to fire/ smoke control doors: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: To Architects approval .
• Type: As schedule .
• Material/ finish: As schedule .
• Electric supply: Mains voltage .
• Means of release: Alarm system and/ or failure of power supply.
• Test switch: Located in a convenient position adjacent to door.
Operational adjustment of integral closer:
- Variable power: Matched to size, weight and location of doors.
- Latched doors: Override latches and/ or door seals when fitted.
- Unlatched doors: Hold shut under normal working conditions.

481 DOOR COORDINATORS WHERE REQUIRED


• Standard: To BS EN 1158.
- Door coordinators to fire/ smoke control doors: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: refer schedule .
Material/ finish: Satin stainless steel .
• Application: To all single swing double doors with rebated meeting stiles and fitted with self
closers.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P21 Door/ window ironmongery Page 316 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

DOOR SECURING DEVICES

515 DOOR LOCKS GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS EN 12209.
• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: refer schedule .
• Type: As schedule .
• Backset: As schedule .
• Material/ finish: As schedule .
• Keying: As schedule .

540 DOOR LATCHES GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS EN 12209.
• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: as schedule .
• Type: As schedule .
• Backset: As schedule .
• Material/ finish: As schedule .
• Latch spring strength: Select to prevent unsprung lever handles drooping.

577 PANIC EXIT DEVICES TO EMERGENCY EXITS


• Standard: To BS EN 1125.
- Panic exit devices for locked doors on escape routes: CE marked.
• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: As schedule .
• Type: As schedule .
• Material/ finish: As schedule .
• Additional requirements: None .

586 PRIVACY INDICATOR BOLTS STAFF WC's


• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: Refer schedule .
• Type: As schedule .
• Material/ finish: As schedule .
• Emergency release facility: Required.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P21 Door/ window ironmongery Page 317 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

DOOR FURNITURE

610 LEVER HANDLES GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS EN 1906.
• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: refer schedule .
• Style: As schedule .
• Size: As schedule .
• Material/ finish: Satin stainless steel, grade 1.4401 (316)As schedule .
• Mounting: As schedule .
• Additional requirements: None .

641 PULL HANDLES GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS 8424.
• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: as schedule .
• Shape: As schedule .
• Diameter: As schedule .
• Distance between centres: As schedule .
• Material/ finish: As schedule .
• Mounting: As schedule .
• Additional requirements: None .

670 PUSH PLATES GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: As schedule .
• Size: As schedule .
• Material/ finish: As schedule .
• Mounting: As schedule .
• Additional requirements: Rounded edges and radiused corners .

710 ESCUTCHEONS GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: Refer to schedule .
• Material/ finish: As schedule .
• Keyhole type: As schedule .
• Usage: As schedule .

720 DOOR STOPS


• Manufacturer: Ingersoll Rand, PO Box 31000, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 308 42 78. Fax: +971
4 346 0087 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: as schedule .
• Type: As schedule .
• Usage: As schedule .

Issue 0: Construction Documents P21 Door/ window ironmongery Page 318 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

850 THRESHOLD WEATHERSTRIP EXTERNAL DOORS GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: Schuco Middle East, Windows & Face Systems L.L.C, PO Box 1861, Sharjah,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 6 5336659 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: as per manufactuer's recommendations .
• Type: Neoprene wiping strip on door with low profile metal threshold .
• Size: To suit door .
• Material/ finish: Satin anodized aluminium .

851 THRESHOLD WEATHERSTRIP TO EXTERNAL M.E.P DOORS


• Manufacturer: Crawford, P.O Box 18025, Jeddah 21415, Saudi Arabia. Tel: 02 651 1248 or
equal and approved .
- Product reference: as per manufactuer's recommendations .
• Type: Neoprene wiping strip on door with low profile metal threshold .
• Size: To suit door .
• Material/ finish: Satin anodized aluminium .

855 WEATHERSTRIP TO DOOR HEAD AND JAMBS EXTERNAL DOORS GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: Schuco Middle East, Windows & Face Systems L.L.C, PO Box 1861, Sharjah,
U.A.E. Tel: +971 6 5336659 or equal and approved .
- Product reference: as per manufacturer's recommendations .
• Type: Elastomeric compression strip in metal carrier .
• Size: To suit door .
• Material/ finish: Powder coated aluminium to suit door frame colour .

856 WEATHERSTRIP TO DOOR HEAD AND JAMBS EXTERNAL M.E.P DOORS


• Manufacturer: Crawford, P.O Box 18025, Jeddah 21415, Saudi Arabia. Tel: 02 651 1248 or
equal and approved .
- Product reference: as per manufacturer's recommendations .
• Type: Elastomeric compression strip in metal carrier .
• Size: To suit door .
• Material/ finish: Powder coated aluminium to suit door frame colour .

896 DOOR MOUNTED FIRE RESISTING AIR TRANSFER GRILLES


• Manufacturer: Lorient Polyproducts Ltd, Fairfax Road, Heathfield, Newton Abbot, Tel: +44 (0)
1626 834252 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: LVH44 .
• Type: High performance intumescent air transfer grille .
• Size: refer to Internal Door Schedule and Architect's drawings .
• Fire resistance: 120 minutes .
• Material/ finish: as per manufacturer's recommendations .

Issue 0: Construction Documents P21 Door/ window ironmongery Page 319 of 367
P31
Holes, chases, covers and supports for services
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

P31 Holes, chases, covers and supports for services

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install all floor ducting/ trunking meter cabinets in accordance
with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Floor ducting/ trunking cores and associated fixings trims and support structures.
- Structural fixings to superstructure.
- Secondary steel required to achieve design profile and appearance and design performance
criteria.
- Meter cabinets and associated fixings, trims and support stainless.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• Preparation of documentation sufficient in detail to determine location and form of all relevant
details including joints, fixings, edge details, chases, brackets and interfaces to adjacent
construction with associated fixings, flushings and seals.

PRODUCTS

300 FLOOR DUCTING/ TRUNKING


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Sizes: Submit proposals for approval.
• Bases:
- Jointing type: Butt jointed.
• Covers: Steel covers suitable to take floor finish.
- Jointing type: Butt jointed.
• Accessories: Preformed corners and T-junctions.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P31 Holes, chases, covers and supports Page 321 of 367
for services
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

370 ACCESS COVERS/ GRATINGS FOR MEP services


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
- Product reference: Submit proposals.
• Covers/ Gratings: to match adjacent external finish.
- Sizes: to suit MEP Engineer access requirements, refer to MEP drawings.
- Loading grade: contractor to submit loadings to structural engineer for approval.
• Frame/ Support/ Fixing: Profiled edge to concrete (no frame).
• Accessories: Gas spring assisted action and hold open stay.

400 METER CABINETS


• Type: Inset.
• Manufacturer: As per Electrical specification.
• - Product reference: Submit proposals.
• Size: Refer to Electrical drawings.

EXECUTION

610 COORDINATION
• Locations and dimensions of holes and chases for services: Submit details where adjacent
finished surfaced will be disturbed

620 HOLES AND CHASES IN IN SITU CONCRETE


• Cast in: Holes larger than 10 mm diameter and chases.
• Cutting and drilling:
- Permitted for holes not larger than 10 mm diameter.
- Not permitted for holes larger than 10 mm diameter except as indicated on drawings.

640 HOLES IN STRUCTURAL STEELWORK


• Cutting and drilling: Not permitted except as indicated on drawings.

650 HOLES, RECESSES AND CHASES IN MASONRY


• Locations: To maintain integrity of strength, stability and sound resistance of construction.
• Sizes: Minimum needed to accommodate services.
- Holes (maximum): 300 x 300 mm.
• Walls of hollow or cellular blocks: Do not chase.
• Walls of other materials:
- Vertical chases: No deeper than one third of single leaf thickness, excluding finishes.
- Horizontal or raking chases: No longer than 1 m. No deeper than one sixth of the single leaf
thickness, excluding finishes.
• Chases and recesses: Do not set back to back. Offset by a clear distance at least equal to the
wall thickness.
• Cutting: Do not cut until mortar is fully set. Cut carefully and neatly. Avoid spalling, cracking
and other damage to surrounding structure.

660 PREFORMED HOLES IN MASONRY


• Width of holes without bridging over (maximum): one block.
- Holes requiring bridging: Submit proposals.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P31 Holes, chases, covers and supports Page 322 of 367
for services
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

680 FIXING FLOOR DUCTING/ TRUNKING


• Bases:
- Fixing method: Screed dabs.
- Fixing level: So as to provide a flush smooth surface when the floor finish is laid.
- Jointing: Waterproof tape to outside of butt joints.
• Covers:
- Applied finish: As Finishes chedule.
- Fixing: Fit temporarily before screeding.
- Configuration: Concealed below floor finish.
• Intumescent fire barriers: Not required.

690 INSTALLING PIPE SLEEVES


• Sleeves: Fit to pipes passing through building fabric.
• Material: Match pipeline.
• Size: One or two sizes larger than pipe to allow clearance.
• Finish: Install sleeves flush with building finish. In areas where floors are washed down, install
protruding 100 mm above floor finish.
• Masking plates: Fit at visible penetrations, including through false ceilings of occupied rooms.

710 SEALING TO SMALL SERVICE PENETRATIONS


• Service: Electrical conduits.
• Location: Walls and floors.
• Sealing material: Tightly rammed mineral wool.
• Method: Point neatly around pipes.
• Performance requirement: Moisture vapour and airtight.

740 INSTALLING METER CABINETS


• Fixing: Heavy duty masonry fixing bolts.
• Keys: Hand over to Employer at completion.

Issue 0: Construction Documents P31 Holes, chases, covers and supports Page 323 of 367
for services
Q10
Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving accessories
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Q10 Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving accessories

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILTIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install all kerbs and precast wheel stoppers in accordance
with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- The supply and installation of all kerbs and precast wheel stoppers and associated products
to meet manufacturers recommendations and to comply with the other sections of the
specification.
- The supply and fixing of all fixings required to installed items etc.

TYPES OF KERBS/EDGINGS AND CHANNELS

110 PROPRIETARY PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS TO BASEMENT CAR PARKS


• Standard: To BS EN 1340.
• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Designations: BN Kerb, bullnosed.
• Size (width x height x length): 125 wide x 180 high x 915 mm long.
• Special shapes:
- Transition kerbs TL and TR as shown on drawings;
- Dropper kerbs DL1 and DR1 to footway crossings;
- Internal radius kerbs as shown on drawings; and
- External radius kerbs as shown on drawings.
• Finish: Exposed aggregate.
• Colour: Grey.
• Bedding: Cement mortar.
• Joints generally: Dry, 2-3 mm gap.
• Sealant movement joints: At 8 m (maximum) centres.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q10 Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving Page 325 of 367
accessories
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

180 DRAINAGE CHANNEL SYSTEMS WITH GRATINGS


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Submit proposals - refer to the drawings for type.
• Size: Nominal internal width 460mm x height 250 mm .
• Type of fall: Constant depth.
• Finish: Exposed aggregate.
• Colour: Natural.
• Accessories: Sump units with mud buckets.
• Bedding: Cement mortar.
• Joints generally: Bituminous mastic jointing.
• Cover gratings: Stainless steel, slotted.
- Fixings: Friction clips.
- Loading grade to BS EN 124: A15.
- Finish/ Colour: natural.

200 SPECIAL PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOPPER


• Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architects approval.
- Product reference: Wheel Stopper.
• Size: 140mm wide x 100mm high x 2000mm long.
• Type/ Material: Precast concrete.
- Finish: Painted finish as per Q10 / 390A.
- Colour: Yellow and black stripes.
• Accessories: Anchors for casting in.
• Bedding: To manufacturers recommendations.
• Joints: n/a.

250 MATERIAL SAMPLES


• Samples representative of colour and appearance of designated materials: Submit before
placing orders.
- Designated materials: As clause 110 - PROPRIETARY PRECAST CONCRETE KERB and
clause 200 PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOPPER .

ROADS/PAVING ACCESSORIES/MARKING

315A TRAFFIC CALMING SPEED BUMPS


• Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971
4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: WABO S Speed Gard.
• Material: Rubber.
- Finish and colour: Self finish.
• Method of fixing: M12 x 120 mm resin anchors.
• Accessories: Reflectors.
• Other Requirements: For exact locations refer to Traffic Consultant drawings.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q10 Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving Page 326 of 367
accessories
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

390A ROAD MARKING (LIGHT DUTY) TO ENTRY AND EXTERNAL VEHICLE CIRCULATION.
(carparks included elsewhere)
• Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals UAE LLC, PO Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel: +971
4 809 0800, Fax: +971 4 885 1002 or equal and approved by Architect .
- Product reference: Mastertop TC 44 LM .
• Colour: To be advised .
• Surfaces to receive markings: Clean and dry, loose material removed.
• Application: Uniform, with no streaks or ragged edges.

LAYING

510 LAYING KERBS, EDGINGS AND CHANNELS


• Cutting: Neat, accurate and without spalling. Form neat junctions.
- Long units (450 mm and over) minimum length after cutting: 300 mm.
- Short units minimum length after cutting: The lower of one third of their original length or 50
mm.
• Bedding of units: Positioned true to line and levelled along top and front faces, in a mortar bed
on accurately cast foundations or on a race of fresh concrete.
• Securing of units: After bedding has set, secured with a continuous haunching of concrete or
on a race of fresh concrete with backing concrete cast monolithically.

520 ADVERSE WEATHER


• Conditions: Do not construct if the temperature is below 3°C on a falling thermometer or 1°C
on a rising thermometer. Adequately protect foundations, bedding and haunching against frost
and rapid drying by sun and wind.

540 CEMENT MORTAR BEDDING


• General: To section Z21.
• Mix (Portland cement:sand): 1:3.
- Portland cement: Class CEM I 42.5 to BS EN 197-1.
- Sand: to BS EN 12620, grade 0/4 or 0/2 (MP).
• Bed thickness: 12-40 mm.

550 KERB DOWELS


• Dowels: Steel bar to BS 4482.
- Size: 12 mm diameter, 150 mm long.
• Installation of dowels: Vertically into foundation while concrete is plastic.
- Centres: To suit holes in kerbs.
- Projection: 75 mm.
• Grouting of holes in kerbs: Filled with 1:3 cement:sand mortar finished flush.

580 DRAINAGE CHANNEL SYSTEMS


• Installation: To an even gradient, without ponding or backfall. Commence laying from outlets.
• Silt and debris: Removed from entire system immediately before handover.
• Washing and detritus: Safely disposed without discharging into sewers or watercourses.

600 RADIUS KERBS/CHANNELS


• Usage: Radii of 15 m or less.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q10 Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving Page 327 of 367
accessories
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

610 ANGLE KERBS


• Usage: Internal and external 90° changes of direction.
• Cutting of mitres: Not permitted.

620 ACCURACY
• Deviations (maximum):
- Level: ± 6 mm.
- Horizontal and vertical alignment: 3 mm in 3 m.

630 NARROW MORTAR JOINTS


• Jointing: Ends of units buttered with bedding mortar as laying proceeds. Joints completely
filled, tightly butted and surplus mortar removed immediately.
- Joint width: 3 mm.

650 SEALANT MOVEMENT JOINTS


• Joint filler: Compressible cellular rubber or plastics compatible with specified sealant.
• Filler installation: Built in as work proceeds, extending through haunching and foundation. Filler
positioned accurately to fully support sealant at the recommended depth below exposed faces
of units.
• Joint width: 10-15 mm.
• Sealant: Silicone.
- Colour: Colour match to kerbs.
• Sealant application: As section Z22.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q10 Kerbs/ edgings/ channels/ paving Page 328 of 367
accessories
Q41
Barriers/ guardrails
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Q41 Barriers/ guardrails

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install Vehicle Control Barriers & Height Restrictors in
accordance with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Vehicle Control Barriers and all associated fixings etc.
- Height Restrictors and all associated fixings etc.
- All adhesives and structural fixings.
- All granting etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with all specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details, setting out, including joints, edge details, expansion joint, service penetrations,
abutments stops, steps and interface details to adjacent construction.

TYPES OF BARRIERS/ GUARDRAILS

130A COLUMN GUARD TO BASEMENTS


• Manufacturer: Saudi BASF for Building Materials Co. (Jeddah Branch), Baladiyah Street, PO
Box 19465, Jeddah 21434, Saudi Arabia. Tel: +966 2 663 5019.
• Product Ref: WABO CLM 75 COLGARD.
• Height/Length: 1000mm.
• Material: High impact resistance extruded rubber profile.
• Colour: Black with yellow reflective cover strips.
• Wing Length: 75mm.
• Other requirements: Fixed to the column surface using appropriate MBT epoxy resin adhesive.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q41 Barriers/ guardrails Page 330 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

190A VEHICLE CONTROL BARRIERS TO BASEMENT RAMPS


• Manufacturer: Gunnebo Middle East FZE, Tel: +971 4 701 783 or equal and approved by
Architect.
- Product reference: Submit proposals for Architect approval.
• Boom:
- Span: Approx. 3500mm, refer to Architect's drawings.
- Type: GES type, Vertical lifting pole.
- Operation: Powered.
- Control system: Proximity card and reader for automatic timed control access.
- Colour: Yellow and black.
• Fixings/ Foundations: Expanding anchors grouted into concrete foundation.
• Other requirements: Warning signs. An appropriate power supply to be provided by the
contractor.

230A VEHICLE HEIGHT RESTRICTORS TO BASEMENT RAMPS


• Manufacturer: Autopa Limited, Cottage Leap, Rugby, Warwickshire, CV21 3XP, UK. Tel: +44
1788 550556 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Swing height restrictor.
• Material: Galvanised Steel with painted finish.
• Dimensions:
- Height: 2.5 metres clear height above basement ramp entrance/exit.
- Width: width of accessway.
• Finish/ Colour: black and yellow stripes.
• Fixings/ Foundations: suspended from concrete soffit.
• Markings/ Lettering/ Signage: to be advised by traffic consultant.

INSPECTION/ TESTING

305 PRODUCTION INSPECTION OF POSTS


• General: At place of fabrication, at rate of 15 per order selected randomly.
- Weld defect levels: As stipulated in Highways Agency 'Manual of contract documents for
highway works' Volume 1 'Specification for highway works' Series 400.

310 TESTING SPORTS GROUND BARRIERS


• Requirement: Test erected barriers in accordance with Department of National Heritage (DNH)
'Guide to safety at sports grounds', paragraphs 10.22 to 10.24.
• Testing authority: United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) independent laboratory.
• Test records: Submit, including barrier identity, location, test date, and all results/ comments.

INSTALLATION

420 ALIGNMENT
• Erection: Fences/ barriers to present a flowing alignment. Tops of posts to follow ground
profile.
• Tolerance: ±30 mm of prescribed alignment and, within any 10 m length, ±15 mm from the
straight or required radius.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q41 Barriers/ guardrails Page 331 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

430 ERECTION GENERALLY


• Protection: Coat all internal and external surfaces of aluminium and steel posts below and up
to 150 mm above ground level, with two coats of bituminous paint to BS 6949 type 2, unless
other applied surface finish is specified.
• Prevention of electrolytic corrosion: Isolate dissimilar metals.
• Steel components: Do not drill, cut or weld after galvanizing.

490 DAMAGE REPAIR TO GALVANIZED SURFACES


• Areas of repair: Minor damage, including fixings and fittings.
- Total area of repair not to exceed 0.5% of total surface area.
- Each area not to exceed 1000 mm².
• Renovation: Use low melting point zinc alloy repair rods or powders or at least two coats of
zinc-rich paint to BS 4652.

510 PREPARATION FOR SITE PAINTING


• Preparation and application: As soon as possible after installation of barriers/ guardrails.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q41 Barriers/ guardrails Page 332 of 367


Q50
Site/ street furniture/ equipment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Q50 Site/ street furniture/ equipment

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install flagpoles in accordance with this specification. The
scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- All adhesives and structural fixings.
- All grouting etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with all specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details, setting out, including joints, edge details, expansion joint, service penetrations,
abutments stops, steps and interface details to adjacent construction.

GATES, BARRIERS AND PARKING CONTROLS

190 BOLLARDS FIXED - AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS


• Manufacturer: Autopa Limited, Cottage Leap, Rugby, Warwickshire, CV21 3XP, United
Kingdom. Tel: +44 (0)1788 550556. Fax: +44 (0)1788 550265 or equal and approved by
Architect.
- Product reference: Plain round stainless steel bollards, 100mm diameter.
• Material: Stainless Steel grade 316.
- Finish: Brushed.
- Colour: Silver.
• Height above ground: 1000 mm (400mm below ground - 1400mm overall. Columns to be
positioned no more than 1200mm apart to prevent vehicle access - refer to Architect's
drawings for setting-out.
• Special features: domed welded caps.
• Method of fixing: As per manufacturer's recommendations. Bollards to be supplied with welded
fixing spikes to ensure firm ground anchorage. Excavate holes to depth of approx.
400mmx300mm diameter and cast into concrete.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q50 Site/ street furniture/ equipment Page 334 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

196 REMOVABLE BOLLARDS TO PARKING AREAS AS INDICATED


• Manufacturer: Autopa Limited, Cottage Leap, Rugby, Warwickshire, CV21 3XP, United
Kingdom. Tel: +44 (0)1788 550556. Fax: +44 (0)1788 550265 or equal and approved by
Architect.
- Product reference: Removable post - RPP.
• Material: Stainless steel.
- Finish: Brushed.
- Colour: Silver.
• Height above ground: 1000mm x 100mm diameter.
• Special features: Ground socket of depth 200mm & flap made from cast iron to provide high
impact resistance. Weather cap to be black polypropylene. Standard retaining pin required
along with heavy duty padlock.
• Method of fixing: Concrete base with manufacturer's standard lockable socket.

SITE AND STREET FURNITURE

320A FLAG POLES TO MAIN ENTRANCE


• Manufacturer: Falco UK Ltd, Unit 8, Leekbrook Way, Leekbrook, Staffordshire, ST13 7AP, UK.
Tel: +44 1538 380080 or equal and approved by Architect.
- Product reference: Aluminium Flagpole - submit proposal to architect for approval.
• Quantity: refer to Architect's drawings.
• Height: 12 metres.
• Diameter: 120mm - or as per manufacturer's recommendations to suit height.
• Material: Aluminium alloy.
- Finish: Polyester powder coated as per section Z31 - RAL Colour 9010 Pure White.
• Accessories: As per manufacturer's recommendations and guidelines.
• Method of fixing: Bolted to concrete with galvanised steel base plate - refer to Architect's
details. Flagpoles should be a minimum of 1000mm apart, refer to Architect's drawings for
setting out.

INSTALLATION

515 SETTING COMPONENTS IN CONCRETE


• Foundation holes: Neat vertical sides; bottom covered with a 50 mm layer of concrete.
• Components: Accurately positioned and securely supported.
• Depth of foundations, bedding and haunching: Appropriate to provide adequate support and to
receive overlying soft landscape or paving finishes.
• Concrete fill: Fully compacted as filling proceeds.
• Temporary support: Maintain for 48 hours (minimum) and prevent disturbance.
• Concrete foundations exposed to view: Compacted until air bubbles cease to appear on the
upper surface, then weathered to shed water and trowelled smooth.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q50 Site/ street furniture/ equipment Page 335 of 367
Q55
External decks and wall features
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Q55 External decks and wall features

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and install Timber Decking in accordance with this specification.
The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- Timber Decking and associated fixings.
- All adhesive fixings.
- All grouting etc.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with all specification and all test data to
prove suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- Preparation of documentation sufficient to determine the location and form of all relevant
details, setting out, including joints, edge details, expansion joint, service penetrations,
abutments stops, steps and interface details to adjacent construction:

GENERAL

110A DECKING TO POOL DECK


• Manufacturer: WPC Corporation, 3-21-1077, Kandanishiki-cho, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0054
Japan. Tel: +81-3-5442-1570 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Supplier: Nahar Building Materials LLC, PO Box 39330, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4 340 8626,
Fax: +971 4 340 8636 or equal and approved by Architect.
• Product Ref: Einwood EW20 - large span, professional quality
- Board Thickness: 30mm
- Board Width: 145mm
- Board length: 2000mm
- Colour: refer to Architect's Fixed Finishes Specification.
• Extent: Refer to Architect's drawings for location and extent of decking
• Base preparation: To be confirmed on site.
• Subframing: Meranti Timber
• Distance between supports: 600mm max.
• Structure, other than surfacing: Concrete slab.
- Fixings: As per manufacturer's literature and recommendations.
• Accessories: As per manufacturer's literature and recommendations.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q55 External decks and wall features Page 337 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

130A TIMBER PERGOLA GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: Purpose made - submit proposals for Architect approval.
- Product reference: Purpose made - refer to Architect's drawings.
• Species: Hardwood - submit proposals to the Architect for approval.
- Finish: Specified stain finish as per M60 / 160.
- Colour: Refer to finishes schedule.
• Fixings: All fixings to be Stainless Steel.
• Other Requirements: Timber to be sourced from a sustainable supplier with validating
documentation for Architect approval.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

210 DESIGN OF TIMBER DECK


• Structure and associated features: Contractor to complete the detailed design.
• Proposals: Submit drawings, technical information, calculations and manufacturers' literature.
• Performance criteria: To comply with Local Authority requirements.

PRODUCTS

330 STRUCTURAL HARDWOOD (GRADED DIRECT TO STRENGTH CLASS) FOR DECK


STRUCTURE GENERALLY
• Grading standard: To BS 5756 and so marked.
• Strength class to BS EN 338: D30.
• Surface finish: Planed all round.
• Treatment: Not required.

355 STRUCTURAL STEEL TO BANQUET DROP-OFF CANOPY


• Steel: To BS EN 10025-2.
- Grade: S275J0.
- Section properties and dimensions: To BS 4-1 .
- Surface condition: Free from heavy pitting and rust, burrs, sharp edges and flame cutting
dross.
• Finish as delivered: Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.

FABRICATION

510 FABRICATION GENERALLY


• Design: Complete the detailed design and obtain approval prior to commencing fabrication.
• Shop drawings: Submit.
• Structural calculations: Submit.
• Frameworks: Assemble and brace, including temporary members required for installation.
• Contact between dissimilar metals: Avoid.
• Fixings: Fully bolt together. Tighten bolts.
• Temporary support: Do not subject members to non-design loadings.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q55 External decks and wall features Page 338 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

EXECUTION

610 LOADING
• Site activities: Restrict, to ensure that design loads are not exceeded, or submit proposals for
temporary supports.

620 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS GENERALLY


• Standard: To BS 8500-2.
• Mix: Designated concrete not less than GEN 1 or standard prescribed concrete not less than
ST2.
• Admixtures: Do not use.
• Foundation holes: Neat vertical sides.
• Depth of foundations, bedding, haunching: Appropriate to provide adequate support and to
receive overlying soft landscape or paving finishes.

660 PRESERVATIVE TREATED TIMBER


• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and drilling: Treated by immersion or with two flood coats of
a solution recommended for the purpose by main treatment solution manufacturer.
• Heavily worked sections: Re-treat.

670 INSTALLATION OF SURFACING


• Heading joints: Kept to a minimum, and formed only as butt joints situated over joists.
• Length: Each board must span not less than two bays between joists with joints in adjacent
boards staggered.
• Gaps between boards: 2-5 mm.

680 SITE PAINTING AND STAINING


• Timing: Prepare surfaces and apply finishes as soon as possible after installing components.

COMPLETION

910 INSPECTION OF TIMBER STRUCTURES


• Standard: In accordance with BS 5268-2.
• Timing: Give reasonable notice before covering up.
• Period of notice (minimum): 3 working days.
• Maintenance inspection: Check and tighten fixings 6-8 weeks after completion of structure.

930 TESTING OF TIMBER STRUCTURES


• Standard: In accordance with BS 5268-2, section 8.

950 DOCUMENTATION
• Contents:
- Copies of structural design calculations/ test reports.
- General product information.
- Installation information.
- Inspection and maintenance reports.
• Number of copies: 5.
• Submission: 2 weeks after request by contract administrator.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Q55 External decks and wall features Page 339 of 367
Z10
Purpose made joinery
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Z10 Purpose made joinery

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILTIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor is to supply and install purpose made joinery in accordance with this
specification which shall be read in conjunction with all other specifications. The scope of work
includes but is not limited to:
- The fabrication, supply and installation of all purpose made joinery items.
- The supply and installation of all plastic, and wood veneered paneling including all low edge
trims, fixing supports etc.
- Associated support system.
- Interface with adjoining works.
- Fixings and method of alignment for the above.
- All certification and proof calculations to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
- The preparation of documentation/ drawings in sufficient detail to determine location and
form of all relevant details including joints, fixings, clips, edge details, expansion joints,
service integration, abutments, steps, brackets and interfaces to adjacent construction with
associated fixing, flushings and seals.

110 FABRICATION
• Standard: To BS 1186-2.
• Sections: Accurate in profile and length, and free from twist and bowing. Formed out of solid
unless shown otherwise.
- Machined surfaces: Smooth and free from tearing, wooliness, chip bruising and other
machining defects.
• Joints: Tight and close fitting.
• Assembled components: Rigid. Free from distortion.
• Screws: Provide pilot holes.
- Screws of 8 gauge (4 mm diameter) or more and screws into hardwood: Provide clearance
holes.
- Countersink screws: Heads sunk at least 2 mm below surfaces visible in completed work.
• Adhesives: Compatible with wood preservatives applied and end uses of timber.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z10 Purpose made joinery Page 341 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

120 CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS OF TIMBER


• General: Dimensions on drawings are finished sizes.
• Maximum permitted deviations from finished sizes:
- Softwood sections: To BS EN 1313-1:-
Clause 6 for sawn sections.
Clause NA.2 for further processed sections.
- Hardwood sections: To BS EN 1313-2:-
Clause 6 for sawn sections.
Clause NA.3 for further processed sections.

130 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD


• Cutting and machining: Completed as far as possible before treatment.
• Extensively processed timber: Retreat timber sawn lengthways, thicknessed, planed,
ploughed, etc.
• Surfaces exposed by minor cutting and/ or drilling: Treat with two flood coats of a solution
recommended by main treatment solution manufacturer.

140 MOISTURE CONTENT


• Wood and wood based products: Maintained within range specified for the component during
manufacture and storage.

210 LAMINATED PLASTICS VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS


• Fabrication: To British Laminated Plastics Fabricators Association Ltd (BLF) fabricating
standards.
• Balancing veneer: From decorative veneer manufacturer and of similar composition. Applied to
reverse side of core.
• Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, cracks,
pimpling, indentations, glue marks, staining and variations in colour and pattern.
• Joints visible in completed work: Tight butted, true and flush.

220 WOOD VENEERED BOARDS/ PANELS


• Core material and veneers: Conditioned before bonding.
• Setting out: Veneer features and grain pattern aligned regularly and symmetrically unless
instructed otherwise.
• Balancing veneer: Applied to reverse side of core material.
- Moisture and temperature movement characteristics: As facing veneer.
• Veneer edges: Tight butted and flush, with no gaps.
• Tolerance of veneer thickness (maximum): ± 0.5 mm.
• Finished components: Free from defects, including bow, twist, scratches, chipping, splits,
blebs, indentations, glue marks and staining.
• Surface finish: Fine, smooth, free from sanding marks.

250 FINISHING
• Surfaces: Smooth, even and suitable to receive finishes.
- Arrises: Eased unless shown otherwise on drawings.
• End grain in external components: Sealed with primer or sealer as section M60 and allowed to
dry before assembly.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z10 Purpose made joinery Page 342 of 367
Z11
Purpose made metalwork
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Z11 Purpose made metalwork

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS & CONTRACTOR'S


RESPONSIBILITIES
• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor is to fabricate, supply and install purpose made metalwork in accordance with
this specification which shall be read in conjunction with all other specifications. The scope of
work includes but is not limited to:
- The fabrication , supply and installation of all purpose made metalwork items.
- Associated support system.
- Interfaces with adjoining works.
- Fixings and method of alignment for the above.
- All certification and proof calculations to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for the proposed application.
• The preparation of documentation/ drawings in sufficient detail to determine location and form
of all relevant details including joints, fixings, clips, edge, abutments, steps, brackets and
interfaces, to adjacent construction with associated fixings, flushings and seals.

310 METAL PRODUCTS


• Standards: Generally, as specified in the following clauses.
• Fasteners: Generally, same metal as component, with matching coating and finish.

320 STEEL LONG AND FLAT PRODUCTS


• Hot rolled structural steels (excluding structural hollow sections and tubes): To BS EN 10025-
1.
• Fine grain steels, including special steels: To BS EN 10025-3 and -4.
• Improved atmospheric corrosion resistance: To BS EN 10025-5.

330 STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP


• Plates and wide flats, high yield strength steel: To BS EN 10025-6.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z11 Purpose made metalwork Page 344 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

340 HOT ROLLED STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP


• Flat products, high yield strength for cold forming: To BS EN 10149-1, -2 and -3.
• Low carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10111.
• Narrow strip, formable and general engineering purposes: To BS 1449-1.8 and BS 1449-1.14.

350 COLD ROLLED STEEL PLATE, SHEET AND STRIP


• Steel sections: To BS EN 10162.
• Flat products, high yield strength micro-alloyed steels for cold forming: To BS EN 10268.
• Low carbon steel flat products for cold forming: To BS EN 10130 and BS EN 10131.
• Uncoated mild steel narrow strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10139 and BS EN 10140.
• Narrow strip, general engineering purposes: To BS EN 10132-1, -2, and -3.
• Low carbon steel flat products for vitreous enamelling: To BS EN 10209.

360 STEEL COATED FLAT PRODUCTS


• Hot dip zinc coated low carbon steel sheet and strip for cold forming: To BS EN 10327 and BS
EN 10143.
• Hot dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip: To BS EN 10143 and BS EN 10326.
• Hot dip zinc-aluminium (za) coated sheet and strip: To BS EN 10326 and 10327.
• Hot dip aluminium-zinc (az) coated sheet and strip: To BS EN 10327.
• Organic coated flat products: To BS EN 10169-1.

370 STEEL STRUCTURAL HOLLOW SECTIONS (SHS)


• Non alloy and fine grain steels, hot finished: To BS EN 10210-1 and -2.
• Non-alloy and fine grain steels, cold formed welded: To BS EN 10219-2.
• Weather resistant steels, hot finished: To BS 7668.

380 OTHER STEEL SECTIONS


• Equal flange tees: To BS EN 10055.
• Equal and unequal angles: To BS EN 10056-1 and -2.
• Wire, mild steel for general engineering purposes: To BS 1052.
• Wire and wire products, general: To BS EN 10218-2.
• Tubes:
- Seamless circular: To BS EN 10297-1.
- Seamless cold drawn: To BS EN 10305-1.
- Welded and cold sized square and rectangular: To BS EN 10305-5.
- Welded circular: To BS EN 10296-1.
- Welded cold drawn: To BS EN 10305-2.
- Welded cold sized: To BS EN 10305-3.

400 STAINLESS STEEL PRODUCTS


• Chemical composition and physical properties: To BS EN 10088-1.
• Sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 10088-2.
• Semi-finished products bars, rods and sections: To BS EN 10088-3.
• Wire: To BS EN 1088-3.
• Tubes:
- Welded circular: To BS EN 10296-2.
- Seamless circular: To BS EN 10297-2.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z11 Purpose made metalwork Page 345 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

410 ALUMINIUM ALLOY PRODUCTS


• Designations:
- Designation system, chemical composition and forms: To BS EN 573-1 to -4.
- Temper designations: To BS EN 515.
• Sheet, strip and plate: To BS EN 485-1 to -4.
• Cold drawn rods, bars and tubes: To BS EN 754-1 and -2.
• Extruded rods, bars, tubes and profiles: To BS EN 755-1 and -2.
• Drawn wire: To BS EN 1301-1, -2 and -3.
• Rivet, bolt and screw stock: To BS 1473.
• Structural sections: To BS 1161.

510 PREPARATION FOR APPLICATION OF COATINGS


• General: Complete fabrication, and drill fixing holes before applying coatings.
• Paint, grease, flux, rust, burrs and sharp arrises: Remove.

515 FABRICATION GENERALLY


• Contact between dissimilar metals in components: Avoid.
• Finished components: Rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises.
- Moving parts: Free moving without binding.
• Corner junctions of identical sections: Mitre.
• Prefinished metals: Do not damage or alter appearance of finish.

520 COLD FORMED WORK


• Profiles: Accurate, with straight arrises.

525 ADHESIVE BONDING


• Preparation of surfaces of metals to receive adhesives:
- Degrease.
- Abrade mechanically or chemically etch.
- Prime: To suit adhesive.
• Adhesive bond: Form under pressure.

530 THERMAL CUTTING OF STAINLESS STEEL


• Carbonation in the heat affected zone: Remove, after cutting.

535 WELDING/ BRAZING GENERALLY


• Surfaces to be joined: Clean thoroughly.
• Tack welds: Use only for temporary attachment.
• Joints: Fully bond parent and filler metal throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or
cracks.
• Surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in completed work: Protect from weld
spatter.
• Flux residue, slag and weld spatter: Remove.

540 WELDING OF STEEL


• Method: Metal arc welding to BS EN 1011-1 and -2.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z11 Purpose made metalwork Page 346 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

545 WELDING OF STAINLESS STEEL


• Method: TIG welding to BS EN 1011-3.
• Butt welds: Double bevel.

550 WELDING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS


• Method: TIG or MIG welding to BS EN 1011-4.

565 FINISHING WELDED AND BRAZED JOINTS VISIBLE IN COMPLETE WORK


• Butt joints: Smooth, and flush with adjacent surfaces.
• Fillet joints: Neat.
• Grinding: Grind smooth where indicated on drawings.

570 LIQUID ORGANIC COATING FOR ALUMINIUM ALLOY COMPONENTS


• Standard: To BS 4842.

575 ZINC AND CADMIUM PLATING OF IRON AND STEEL SURFACES


• Zinc plating: To BS EN 12329.
• Cadmium plating: To BS EN 12330.

580 CHROMIUM PLATING


• Standard: To BS EN 12540.

585 GALVANIZING
• Standard: To BS EN ISO 1461.
• Vent and drain holes:
- Location: Submit proposals..
- Sealing after galvanizing: Required. Submit proposals.

590 VITREOUS ENAMELLING


• Standard: To BS EN 14431.
• Substrate metal: Carbon steel or cast iron.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z11 Purpose made metalwork Page 347 of 367
Z12
Preservative/ fire retardant treatment
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILTIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and apply all preservative/ fire retardant treatment in accordance
with this specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- The supply and application of preservative/ fire retardant treatments in accordance to
manufacturers recommendations as these apply to other sections of the specification.
- All proof calculations and certification to comply with specification and all test data to prove
suitability of materials for proposed application.

110 TREATMENT APPLICATION


• Timing: After cutting and machining timber, and before assembling components.
• Processor: Licensed by manufacturer of specified treatment solution.
• Certification: For each batch of timber provide a certificate of assurance that treatment has
been carried out as specified.

120 COMMODITY SPECIFICATIONS


• Standard: Current edition of the British Wood Preserving and Damp-proofing Association
(BWPDA) Manual.

130 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT SOLUTION STRENGTHS/ TREATMENT CYCLES


• General: Select to achieve specified service life and to suit treatability of specified wood
species.

140 COPPER-ORGANIC PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT


• Solution:
- Manufacturer: Submit proposals.
Product reference: n/a.
• Application: High pressure impregnation.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: Not more than 28%. After treatment, allow
timber to dry before using.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment Page 349 of 367
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

160 ORGANIC SOLVENT PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT


• Solution:
- Manufacturer: Submit proposals .
Product reference: n/a .
- Application: Double vacuum + low pressure impregnation, or immersion.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/ component at time
of fixing. After treatment, timber to be surface dry before use.

220 LEACH RESISTANT FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT


• Solution:
- Manufacturer: Submit proposals for Architect and Fire Engineers approval.
Product reference: n/a.
- Application: Vacuum + pressure impregnation.
• Moisture content of wood at time of treatment: As specified for the timber/ component at time
of fixing.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z12 Preservative/ fire retardant treatment Page 350 of 367
Z20
Fixings/ adhesives
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Z20 Fixings/ adhesives

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and apply all fixings/ adhesives in accordance with this
specification. The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- The supply and application of adhesives and associated products to meet manufacturers
recommendations and to comply with the other sections of the specification.
- The supply and fixing of all fixings.

110 FIXINGS GENERALLY


• Integrity of supported components: Types, sizes and quantities of fasteners/ packings and
spacings of fixings selected to retain supported components without distortion or loss of
support.
• Components/ substrates/ fasteners of dissimilar metals: Fixed with isolating washers/ sleeves
to avoid bimetallic corrosion.
• General usage: To recommendations of fastener manufacturers and/ or manufacturers of
components, products or materials fixed and fixed to.
• Appearance: As approved samples.

120A FASTENER DURABILITY


• Fasteners in external construction: Of corrosion resistant material or with a corrosion resistant
finish.
• Metal parts shall be grade A4 (316 SS) if stainless steel, and Galvanized with a minimum 5
microns thick coating if galvanized steel GI. All fixings chemical parts shall be methacrylate
based styrene-free resin with 2 hours fire rating/Integrity. All provisions are to be made to
prevent bimetallic corrosion and staining.
• Fasteners in indoor applications (LOW CORROSION RATE): The metal components of all
fasteners shall be GI Galvanized steel Anchors with a minimum of 5 Microns coating.
- Fasteners in outdoor applications (HIGH CORROSION RATE): All the metal
components shall be Stainless Steel of Grade A4, 316 SS

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z20 Fixings/ adhesives Page 352 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

135 TESTING
• All fixings shall be tested in accordance with BS 5080: Parts 1 and 2. Pullout Test for all
anchoring System to be conducted by an independent Testing Authority acceptable to the
Engineer or by approved manufacturer in the job site. Test result to be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.

140 FIXINGS THROUGH FINISHES


• Penetration of fasteners/ plugs into substrate: To achieve a secure fixing.

150 PACKINGS
• Function: To take up tolerances and prevent distortion of materials/ components.
• Materials: Noncompressible, noncorrodible, rot proof.
• Locations: Not within zones to be filled with sealant.

160 CRAMP FIXINGS


• Cramp positions: Maximum 150 mm from each end of frame sections and at 600 mm
maximum centres.
• Fasteners: Cramps fixed to frames with screws of same material as cramps.
• Cramp fixings in masonry work: Fully bedded in mortar.

170 NAILED TIMBER FIXINGS


• Nails:
- Steel: To BS 1202-1 or BS EN 10230-1
- Copper: To BS EN 1202-2.
- Aluminium: To BS 1202-3.
• Penetration: Fully driven in without splitting or crushing timber.
• Surfaces visible in completed work: Nail heads punched below surfaces.
• Nailed timber joints: Two nails per joint (minimum), opposed skew driven.

180 FIXINGS TO MASONRY


• Fasteners:
- Light duty: Plugs and screws.
- Heavy duty: Expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

210 PLUGS
• Type: Proprietary types suited to background, loads to be supported and conditions expected
in use.

220 SCREW FIXINGS


• Screws: To BS 1210.
• Finished level of countersunk screw heads:
- Exposed: Flush with timber surface.
- Concealed (holes filled/ stopped): Sunk minimum 2 mm below surface.
• Washers and screw cups: Of same material as screw.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z20 Fixings/ adhesives Page 353 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

230 PELLETED COUNTERSUNK FIXINGS


• Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface.
• Pellets: Cut from matching timber, grain matched and glued in to full depth of hole.
• Finished level of pellets: Flush with surface.

240 PLUGGED COUNTERSUNK FIXINGS


• Finished level of countersunk screw heads: Minimum 6 mm below timber surface.
• Plugs: Glued in to full depth of hole.
• Finished level of plugs: Projecting above surface.

250 POWDER ACTUATED FIXING SYSTEMS


• Powder actuated fixing tools: To BS 4078-2 and Kitemark certified. Operatives trained and
certified as competent by tool manufacturer.
• Types of fastener, accessories and consumables: As recommended by tool manufacturer.
• Protective coating to exposed fasteners used externally or in other locations subject to
dampness: Zinc rich primer to fastener heads.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z20 Fixings/ adhesives Page 354 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

320 FIXINGS

• Carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting, cutting
for anchor bolts or sockets to be cast-in and for making good, including grouting-in of anchor
bolts and fixings where necessary.
• The method of fixing shall not damage anything being fixed or anything receiving fixings.
• Welding shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the Engineer.
• Fasteners shall be installed with a co-ordinated purpose design tooling system that
incorporates a mechanical depth locator to ensure consistent depth setting and facilitates
perpendicular installation. The fastener manufacturer shall be capable of providing on-Site
instruction in the use of the fastener installation tooling system.
• All fixings shall comply with Section 2 of Approved Document A of the Building Regulations
and any subsequent amendments thereto.
• Submit QA/QC procedures for inspection of fixings to the Engineer to include, but not be
limited to, checking each fixing for correct torques, depth of mortices, alignment, etc.
• Ensure that no lock-up stresses are generated.
• Undercut Anchors: HDA Undercut anchors shall be of an undercut style, with brazed tungsten
carbides on the embedded end that perform the self-undercutting process. Undercut anchor
shall have a minimum projected bearing area equal to or greater than 2.5 times the nominal
bolt area. The bolt shall conform to ISO 898 class 8.8 strength requirements. The washer shall
be a conical spring style. Anchors shall be supplied by Hilti or approved equivalent. HDA
Undercut Anchors to be installed in holes drilled with specified Hilti carbide tipped metric stop
drill bits or matched tolerance diamond core bits and specified Hilti Rotary Hammer Drills.
Anchors shall be installed as per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Sleeve Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors shall be ISO 898 Class 8.8 Bolt headed
through fix Sleeve Anchor, ETA approved for tensile zone applications with a collapsible
sleeve section to ensure adequate clamping of the component fastened, and a documented
fire resistance of up to 2 hours, such as Hilti HSL Anchor. Anchors shall be supplied by Hilti or
approved equivalent. HSL Expansion Anchors to be installed in holes drilled with Hilti carbide
tipped metric drill bits or matched tolerance diamond core bits. Anchors shall be installed and
torqued per manufacturer's recommendations.
• Stud Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors shall be ETA approved zinc plated/ A4 Stainless
steel stud type with a single piece three section wedge. Anchor to be suitable for non tensile
zone applications and to achieve 120 minutes Fire rating / integrity such as Hilti HSA Anchor.
Anchors shall be supplied by Hilti or approved equivalent. Anchors to be installed in holes
drilled with Hilti carbide tipped drill bits or matched tolerance diamond core bits. Anchors shall
be installed per manufacturer's recommendation.
• Drop in Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors shall be ETA approved zinc plated/ EN 10088
Stainless steel flush or shell type expansion shield anchors such as Hilti HKD-S Drop In
Anchor. Anchors shall be supplied by Hilti or approved equivalent. Shell or flush type anchors
to be installed in holes drilled with Hilti carbide tipped drill bits. Anchors shall be installed per
manufacturer's recommendations.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z20 Fixings/ adhesives Page 355 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

510A ADHESIVES
• Storage/ Usage: In accordance with manufacturer's and statutory requirements.
• Surfaces: Clean. Regularity and texture adjusted to suit bonding and gap filling characteristics
of adhesive.
• Finished adhesive joints: Fully bonded. Free of surplus adhesive.
Adhesive Capsule Anchoring system: shall consist of an all-thread HAS anchor rod, nut,
washer and HVU adhesive capsule. The system shall be HVA Anchor manufactured by Hilti or
approved equivalent.
i) Anchor Rod: Shall be provided with 45-degree chisel point to provide proper mixing of the
adhesive components. Anchor rod shall cold formed and manufactured to meet the following
requirements: 1. ISO 898 Class 5.8 2.ISO 898 Class 8.8 3. A4-70; 1.4401, 1.4404, 1.4571
stainless steel 4. 1.4529 Stainless Steel (High Corrosive Resistance). 5. Rebar with chisel
point.
ii) Adhesive Capsule: Shall consist of a dual chamber foil capsule. The resin material shall be
vinyl urethane methacrylate. No Glass capsules shall be accepted.
iii) Nuts and Washers: Shall be furnished to meet the requirements of the above anchor rod
specifications. All of the stainless steel anchoring elements shall be grade of A4 (316 stainless
Steel). All of the GI Galvanized steel Anchors shall have a minimum of 5 Microns coating.
iv) Installation: Adhesive anchors to be installed in holes drilled using the specified diameter of
Hilti carbide-tipped drill bit or matched tolerance Hilti DD-B diamond core bit. Anchors shall be
installed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's recommendation and shall not be disturbed
until cure time has elapsed.
• Injectable Adhesive System: HIT RE500 Injectable Adhesive shall be used for installation of all
reinforcing steel dowels or threaded anchor rods and inserts into new or existing concrete.
Adhesive shall be furnished in side by side refill packs that keep component A and component
B separate. Side by side packs shall be designed to compress during use to minimize waste
volume. Side by side packs shall also be designed to accept static mixing nozzle which
thoroughly blends component A and component B and allows injection directly into drilled hole.
Alternately, product may be furnished in large rigid cartridges for high volume work. Only
injection tools and static mixing nozzles as recommended by manufacturer shall be used.
Anchors shall be supplied by Hilti or approved equivalent. Manufacturer's instructions shall be
followed. Injection adhesive shall be formulated to include resin and hardener (Resin to
Hardener Mixing Ratio = 3:1 by volume). The hardener should be free of any poisonous
substance such as Phenol and Mercaptane.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z20 Fixings/ adhesives Page 356 of 367


Z21
Mortars
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Z21 Mortars

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and apply all mortars in accordance with this specification. The
scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- The supply and application of mortars and associated products to meet manufacturers
recommendations and to comply with the other sections of the specification.

CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS

110 CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MIXES


• Specification: Proportions and additional requirements for mortar materials are specified
elsewhere.

120 SAND FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS


• Standard: To BS EN 13139.
• Grading: 0/2 (FP or MP).
- Fines content where the proportion of sand in a mortar mix is specified as a range (e.g. 1:1:
5-6):
Lower proportion of sand: Use category 3 fines.
Higher proportion of sand: Use category 2 fines.
• Sand for facework mortar: Maintain consistent colour and texture. Obtain from one source.

135 SITE MADE LIME:SAND FOR CEMENT GAUGED MASONRY MORTARS


• Permitted use: Where a special colour is not required and in lieu of factory made ready-mixed
material.
• Lime: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.
- Type: CL 90S.
• Mixing: Thoroughly mix lime with sand, in the dry state. Add water and mix again. Allow to
stand, without drying out, for at least 16 hours before using.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z21 Mortars Page 358 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

160 CEMENTS FOR MORTARS


• Cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.
- Types: Portland cement, CEM I.
Portland limestone cement, CEM ll/A-L or CEM ll/A-LL.
Portland slag cement, CEM II/B-S.
Portland fly ash cement, CEM II/B-V.
- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.
• White cement: To BS EN 197-1 and CE marked.
- Type: Portland cement, CEM I.
- Strength class: 52.5.
• Sulfate resisting Portland cement:
- Types: To BS 4027 and Kitemarked.
To BS EN 197-1 fly ash cement, CEM ll/B-V and CE marked.
- Strength class: 32.5, 42.5 or 52.5.
• Masonry cement: To BS EN 413-1 and CE marked.
- Class: MC 12.5.

180 ADMIXTURES FOR SITE MADE CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


• Air entraining (plasticizing) admixtures: To BS EN 934-3 and compatible with other mortar
constituents.
• Other admixtures: Submit proposals.
• Prohibited admixtures: Calcium chloride, ethylene glycol and any admixture containing calcium
chloride.

190 RETARDED READY TO USE CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR


• Standard: To BS EN 998-2.
• Lime for cement:lime:sand mortars: Nonhydraulic to BS EN 459-1.
- Type: CL 90S.
• Pigments for coloured mortars: To BS EN 12878.
• Time and temperature limitations: Use within limits prescribed by mortar manufacturer.
- Retempering: Restore workability with water only within prescribed time limits.

200 STORAGE OF CEMENT GAUGED MORTAR MATERIALS


• Sands and aggregates: Keep different types/ grades in separate stockpiles on hard, clean, free
-draining bases.
• Factory made ready-mixed lime:sand/ ready to use retarded mortars: Keep in covered
containers to prevent drying out or wetting.
• Bagged cement/ hydrated lime: Store off the ground in dry conditions.

210 MAKING CEMENT GAUGED MORTARS


• Batching: By volume. Use clean and accurate gauge boxes or buckets.
- Mix proportions: Based on dry sand. Allow for bulking of damp sand.
• Mixing: Mix materials thoroughly to uniform consistency, free from lumps.
- Mortars containing air entraining admixtures: Mix mechanically. Do not overmix.
• Working time (maximum): Two hours at normal temperatures.
• Contamination: Prevent intermixing with other materials.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z21 Mortars Page 359 of 367


Z22
Sealants
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Z22 Sealants

To be read with Preliminaries/General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and apply all sealants in accordance with this specification. The
scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- The supply and application of sealants and associated products to meet manufacturers
recommendations and to comply with the other sections of the specification.

PRODUCTS

310A JOINTS GENERALLY


• Manufacturer: BASF Construction Chemicals.
P.O. Box 37127, Dubai, UAE. Tel: 00971 4 809 0800. Fax: 00971 4 885 1130. Webiste:
www.basf-cc.ae.
• Multi purpose sealant: BASF - Masterflex 472 or Sonolastic 150.
• Primer, backing strip, bond breaker: Types recommended by sealant manufacturer.
• Other requirements: Select sealant type to suit application - Contractor to consult with
manufacturer representative prior to installation for confirmation.

EXECUTION

610 SUITABILITY OF JOINTS


• Presealing checks:
- Joint dimensions: Within limits specified for the sealant.
- Substrate quality: Surfaces regular, undamaged and stable.
• Joints not fit to receive sealant: Submit proposals for rectification.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z22 Sealants Page 361 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

620 PREPARING JOINTS


• Surfaces to which sealant must adhere:
- Remove temporary coatings, tapes, loosely adhering material, dust, oil, grease, surface
water and contaminants that may affect bond.
- Clean using materials and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer.
• Vulnerable surfaces adjacent to joints: Mask to prevent staining or smearing with primer or
sealant.
• Backing strip and/ or bond breaker installation: Insert into joint to correct depth, without
stretching or twisting, leaving no gaps.
• Protection: Keep joints clean and protect from damage until sealant is applied.

630 APPLYING SEALANTS


• Substrate: Dry (unless recommended otherwise) and unaffected by frost, ice or snow.
• Environmental conditions: Do not dry or raise temperature of joints by heating.
• Sealant application: Fill joints completely and neatly, ensuring firm adhesion to substrates.
• Sealant profiles:
- Butt and lap joints: Slightly concave.
- Fillet joints: Flat or slightly convex.
• Protection: Protect finished joints from contamination or damage until sealant has cured.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z22 Sealants Page 362 of 367


Z31
Powder coatings
Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

Z31 Powder coatings

To be read with Preliminaries/ General conditions.

10 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTORS REQUIREMENTS & RESPONSIBILITIES


• The Employer's Requirements are set out in:
- The drawings listed in the architectural drawing schedules.
- The specifications included in this Section.
- The other liabilities, responsibilities, constraints and restrictions expressed or implied within
these conditions.

30 DOCUMENTS
• The Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings, specifications, method statements and all
other relevant documents necessary for the execution of the works in accordance with the
Conditions and General Preliminaries.

40 SCOPE OF WORK
• The Contractor is to supply and apply all powdercoatings in accordance with this specification.
The scope of work includes but is not limited to:
- The supply and application of powdercoatings and associated products to meet
manufacturers recommendations and to comply with the other sections of the specification.

120A POWDER COATING MATERIALS


• Manufacturer: Jotun Powdercoatings U.A.E. (LLC), PO Box 51033, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971 4
347 2515, Fax: +971 4 347 2815.
- Product Ref for External Use: Jotun Heat Reflective Super Durable powder coating - Cool
Shades Collection.
- Product Ref for Internal Use: Jotun Super Durable.
• Selected manufacturer: Submit details before commencement of powder coating including:
- Name and contact details.
- Details of accreditation schemes.
- Technical data of product including current Agrément certificates.

210 WORKING PROCEDURES


• Comply with the follow following standards.
- Aluminium components: To BS 6496 or BS EN 12206-1.
- Steel components: To BS EN 13438.
- Safety standards: To British Coatings Federation 'Code of safe practice - Application of
thermosetting powder coatings by electrostatic spraying'.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z31 Powder coatings Page 364 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

220 POWDER COATING APPLICATORS


• Applicator requirements:
- Approved by powder coating manufacturer.
- Currently certified to BS EN ISO 9001.
- Comply with quality procedures, guarantee conditions, standards and tests required by
powder coating manufacturer.
- Applicator to use only one plant.
- Selected applicator: Submit details before commencement of powder coating including:
Name and contact details.
Details of accreditation schemes.

225 GUARANTEES
• Powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees:
- Submit sample copies before commencement of powder coating.
- Submit signed project specific copies on completion of work.

230 CONTROL SAMPLES


• Sequence: Prior to ordering materials for the works, obtain approval of appearance for:
- Powder coated samples: Of various grades and forms of background metal to be used,
showing any colour, texture and gloss variation.
- Fabrication samples: Showing joint assembly, how powder coating is affected and how any
cut metal edges are finished and protected.
• Samples to include the following information:
- Product reference.
- Colour.
- Reference number.
- Name.
- Gloss level.

235 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AT PLANT


• Requirement: Contractors/ suppliers of the following designated components must commission
an approved Independent Inspection Authority to carry out acceptance inspections to confirm
that powder coating application complies with this specification.
- Designated components: Staff Lockers .
• Acceptance inspections: Carry out for each variation of colour and finish of each component
work package at applicator's plant prior to any fabrication of units, in accordance with the
following:
- Where three of more production runs are required for application of coatings, not less than
three acceptance inspections must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-1, general
inspection level 2, with an acceptance quality limit of 1%.
- Where less than three production runs are required for application of coatings, one
acceptance inspection must be carried out in accordance with BS 6001-2, with a limiting
quality of 5% where the probability of acceptance is 10%.
• Components failing inspection: Reprocess or replace and reinspect.
• Inspection reports: Independent Inspection Authority must submit copies.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z31 Powder coatings Page 365 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

240 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM


• Requirement: Powder and coating application to the following designated components is to be
tested and approved in accordance with the Qualicoat system.
- Designated components: Curtain Walling mullions, window frames, louvres etc.

250 COMPONENT DESIGN


• Condition of components to be powder coated:
- To comply with relevant recommendations of BS 4479-1, -3, and -4.
- Of suitable size to fit plant capacity.
- Of suitable thickness to withstand oven curing.

310A PRETREATMENT OF ALUMINIUM COMPONENTS


• Condition of components to be pretreated:
- Free from corrosion and damage.
- All welding and jointing completed and finish off as specified.
- Free from impurities including soil, grease, oil.
- Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment process.
• Conversion coating requirements:
- Chromate system: To Qualicoat Class 2 standard.
- Chromate-free system: To Qualicoat Class 2 standard. Submit details before using.
• Rinsing requirements: Use demineralized water. Drain and dry.

320 PRETREATMENT OF STEEL COMPONENTS


• Condition of components to be pretreated:
- Free from corrosion and damage.
- All welding and jointing completed and finish off as specified.
- Free from impurities including soil, grease, oil.
- Suitable for and compatible with the pretreatment process.
• Conversion coating requirements: To BS EN 13438.
• Rinsing requirements: Use demineralized water. Drain and dry.

430 EXTENT OF POWDER COATINGS


• Application: To visible component surfaces, and concealed surfaces requiring protection.
Coated surfaces will be deemed 'significant surfaces' for relevant BS 6496 or BS EN 13438
performance requirements.

435 APPLICATION OF POWDER COATINGS


• Surfaces to receive powder coatings: Free from dust or powder deposits.
• Powder colours: Obtain from one batch of one manufacturer.
• Commencement of powder coating: To be continuous from pretreatment.
• Jig points: Not visible on coated components.
• Curing: Controlled to attain metal temperatures and hold periods recommended by powder
coating manufacturer.
• Stripping and recoating of components: Only acceptable by prior agreement of powder coating
manufacturer. Stripping, pretreatment and powder coating are to be in accordance with
manufacturer's requirements.
• Overcoating of components: Not acceptable.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z31 Powder coatings Page 366 of 367


Intercontinental Hotel, Dhaka

440A PERFORMANCE AND APPEARANCE OF POWDER COATINGS


• For aluminium components:
- Standard: To Qualicoat Class 2 standard.
• For steel components:
- Standard: To BS EN 13438.
• Visual inspection after powder coating: Significant surface viewing distances to be as specified
in the relevant Standard, unless specified otherwise.
• Colour and gloss levels: To conform with approved samples.

480 DAMAGED COMPONENTS - REPAIR/ REPLACEMENT


• Before delivery to site: Check all components for damage to powder coatings. Replace
damaged components.
• Site damage: Submit proposals for repair or replacement.

510 PROTECTION
• Powder coated surfaces of components: Protect from damage during handling and installation,
or by subsequent site operations.
• Protective coverings: Must be:
- Resistant to weather conditions.
- Partially removable to suit building in and access to fixing points.
• Protective tapes in contact with powder coatings: Must be:
- Low tack, self adhesive and light in colour.
- Applied and removed in accordance with tape and powder coating manufacturers'
recommendations. Do not use solvents to remove residues as these are detrimental to the
coating.
• Inspection of protection: Carry out monthly. Promptly repair any deterioration or deficiency.

535 DOCUMENTATION
• Submit the following information for each batch of powder coated components:
- Supplier.
- Trade name.
- Colour.
- Type of powder.
- Method of application.
- Batch and reference number.
- Statutory requirements.
- Test certificates.
- Maintenance instructions.

540 COMPLETION
• Protection: Remove.
• Cleaning and maintenance of powder coatings: Carry out in accordance with procedures
detailed in powder coating manufacturer and applicator guarantees.

Issue 0: Construction Documents Z31 Powder coatings Page 367 of 367